Home

UNIX Version 7 Volume 1

1. the standard input is used Filel and file2 must be sorted in increasing ASCII collating sequence on the fields on which they are to be joined normally the first in each line There is one line in the output for each pair of lines in filel and file2 that have identical join fields The output line normally consists of the common field then the rest of the line from file then the rest of the line from file2 Fields are normally separated by blank tab or newline In this case multiple separators count as one and leading separators are discarded These options are recognized an In addition to the normal output produce a line for each unpairable line in file n where n is 1 or 2 es Replace empty output fields by string s jnm Join on the mth field of file n If n is missing use the mth field in each file o list Each output line comprises the fields specifed in list each element of which has the form n m where n is a file number and m is a field number tc Use character c as a separator tab character Every appearance of c in a line is significant SEE ALSO sort 1 comm 1 awk 1 BUGS With default field separation the collating sequence is that of sort b with t the sequence is that of a plain sort The conventions of join sort comm uniq look and awk 1 are wildly incongruous 7th Edition 1 KIEL 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual KILL 1 NAME kill terminate a process with ex
2. main memory allocator 2 000 maintain program groups 00 Maintaller aa aro Bo Ba dans act dr do ea make maintain program groups make a directory 0 2 0 0 e eee make a directory or a special file make link SER 6 aa he donate Reale th Ge BAe Bele wares 3 make a unique file name make long posters 2 2 ee e o makekey generate encryption key malloc free realloc calloc main memory man macros to typeset manual join 1 makekey 8 kill 2 kill 1 mem 4 13tol 3 awk 1 be 1 sh 1 ld 1 frexp 3 lex 1 lorder 1 ar 5 intro 3 ar 1 col 1 comm 1 uniq 1 look 1 rev 1 In 1 link 2 a out 5 link 2 lint 1 look 1 nlist 3 nm 1 1s 1 refer 1 In 1 ld 1 ctime 3 end 3 lock 2 newgrp 1 exp 3 login 1 ac 1 getlogin 3 sh 1 passwd 1 utmp 5 setjmp 3 look 1 refer 1 lorder 1 1s 1 lseek 2 13tol 3 m4 1 ms 7 man 7 mp 3 tp 5 ht 4 tm 4 xsend 1 mail 1 malloc 3 make 1 ar 1 make 1 mkdir 1 mknod 2 In 1 mktemp 3 banner 6 makekey 8 malloc 3 man 7 tp frexp Idexp modf split into man print sections of this man macros to typeset ms macros for formatting umask set file creation mode eqn neqn checkeq typeset precision integer itom madd msub mult bcd ppt convert to antique l
3. tp DEC mag tape formats tp manipulate tape archive o tr translate characters MAC it oS a o ee Ea Se X translate characters 2 o ee ee su 1 sum 1 du 1 quot 1 sync 1 update 8 sync 2 sleep 1 sleep 3 swab 3 strip 1 sync 2 sync 1 perror 3 mtab 5 mkconf 1 tbl 1 tabs 1 tail 1 sin 3 sinh 3 dumpdir 1 tp 1 tar 1 tp 5 tar 1 tbl 1 deroff 1 tc 1 tc 4 tee 1 tk 1 lseek 2 su 1 ttyname 3 ttys 5 tty 4 tty 1 stty 1 tabs 1 term 7 wait 2 kill 1 exit 2 test 1 quiz 6 roff 1 ed 1 troff 1 ttt 6 alarm 2 at 1 stime 2 time 2 time 1 time 2 profil 2 ctime 3 times 2 utime 2 times 2 sh 1 ctime 3 tk 1 tm 4 tsort 1 touch 1 tp 5 tp 1 tr 1 ptrace 2 tr 1 newgrp read readonly set shift times sin cos tan asin acos atan atan2 tbl format tables for nroff or typesetting a A Re deroff remove nroff terminal caia a a it A ttyname isatty tm TM 11 ht RH 11 te TC 11 file determine file types primitive system data man macros to eqn neqn checkeq troff nroff text formatting and getty set getpw get name from read readonly set shift times trap mount mount mktemp make a cu call uux unix to uucp uulog unix to uux uucp uulog rm rmdir remove touch s
4. DODE los KA N KR ada E TR a Ss EE a exponential logarithm power square root export login newgrp read readonly set expr evaluate arguments as an expression f77 Fortran 77 compiler o fabs floor ceil absolute value floor factor a number generate large primes false provide truth values A E he Ne oe d oe hee ee Rs Eee eee Ih Birt de A fclose fflush close or flush a stream fevt gevt output conversion fdopen Open a stream feof ferror clearerr fileno stream fetch store delete firstkey nextkey fflush close or flush a stream fgetc getw get character or word from fgets get a string from a stream fgrep search a file for a pattern files oy a es eek eae et EG e eS ed 1 end 3 ed 1 sed 1 a out 5 grep 1 crypt 1 crypt 3 makekey 8 end 3 getgrent 3 getpwent 3 xsend 1 nlist 3 getgrent 3 getpwent 3 unlink 2 exec 2 environ 5 getenv 3 eqnchar 7 deroff 1 eqn 1 eqnchar 7 intro 2 perror 3 intro 2 spell 1 pkon 2 end 3 hypot 3 sh 1 expr 1 exec 2 sh 1 exec 2 at 1 uux 1 acct 5 sleep 1 sleep 3 monitor 3 profil 2 exec 2 exit 2 sh 1 exp 3 frexp 3 exp 3 sh 1 expr 1 17701 floor 3 factor 1 true 1 abort 3 fclose 3 ecvt 3 fop
5. itom madd msub mult mdiv min mout pow j0 jl jn yO yl yn bessel functions Jack A se EO een a ae Se jn yO yl yn bessel functions grep 1 chown 1 newgrp 1 group 5 getgrent 3 setuid 2 getuid 2 chown 2 make 1 ioctl 2 moo 6 words 6 hier 7 hp 4 hs 4 ht 4 wump 6 sinh 3 hypot 3 icheck 1 setuid 2 su 1 getpid 2 getuid 2 sh 1 signal 2 core 5 dump 5 dump 1 restor 1 ptx 1 string 3 indir 2 init 8 ttys 5 popen 3 filsys 5 clri 1 scanf 3 ungetc 3 fread 3 stdio 3 ferror 3 refer 1 cat 4 dn 4 du 4 ht 4 plot 3 plot 5 tm 4 tty 4 spline 1 pipe 2 intro 1 intro 3 intro 2 ncheck 1 iostat 1 popen 3 ioctl 2 iostat 1 abort 3 ctype 3 ttyname 3 ctype 3 system 3 ctype 3 mp 3 j0 3 bire j0 3 makekey generate encryption prejudice integers and long integers awk pattern scanning and processing bc arbitrary precision arithmetic shift times trap umask wait command EXPONENT s e aa Ee KR re frexp find ordering relation for an object ar archive intro introduction to ar archive and col filter reverse comm select or reject uniq report repeated look find rev reverse In make a a out assembler and link look find lines in a sorted nlist get entries from name nm print name Is ref
6. volume vp Versatec printer plotter wait await completion of process wait command language newgrp read wait wait for process to terminate wall write to all users o o WC word count a what to do when the system crashes while break continue cd eval exec exit who who is on the system sh 1 sin 3 tbl 1 troff 1 deroff 1 true 1 tsort 1 ttt 6 tty 4 tty 1 ttyname 3 ttys 5 ttyname 3 tm 4 ht 4 tc 4 file 1 types 5 man 7 eqn 1 troff 1 getty 8 getpw 3 umask 2 sh 1 mount 1 mount 2 ungetc 3 uniq 1 mktemp 3 units 1 cu 1 uux 1 uucp 1 uux 1 uucp 1 unlink 2 rm 1 update 8 touch 1 sync 2 sync 1 update 8 du 1 write 1 setuid 2 getuid 2 environ 5 su 1 mail 1 wall 1 utime 2 utmp 5 uucp 1 uux 1 abs 3 floor 3 getenv 3 true 1 assert 3 lint 1 vp 4 filsys 5 vp 4 wait 1 sh 1 wait 2 wall 1 we 1 crash 8 sh 1 who 1 we getchar fgetc getw get character or hangman words putchar fputc putw put character or hangman cd change pwd write Iseek tell move read wall write open open for reading or utmp xsend j0 jl jn XXIV word count working directory working directory name write write on a file writ
7. rmt7 Each read or write call reads or writes the next record on the tape In the write case the record has the same length as the buffer given During a read the record size is passed back as the number of bytes read provided it is no greater than the buffer size if the record is long an error is indicated In raw tape I O the buffer must begin on a word boundary and the count must be even Seeks are ignored A zero byte count is returned when a tape mark is read but another read will fetch the first record of the new tape file FILES dev mt dev rmt SEE ALSO tp 1 BUGS If any non data error is encountered it refuses to do anything more until closed In raw I O there should be a way to perform forward and backward record and file spacing and to write an EOF mark 7th Edition 1 TTY 4 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual TTY 4 tty general terminal interface DESCRIPTION 7th Editi This section describes both a particular special file and the general nature of the terminal interface The file dev tty is in each process a synonym for the control terminal associated with that process It is useful for programs that wish to be sure of writing messages on the terminal no matter how output has been redirected It can also be used for programs that demand a file name for output when typed output is desired and it is tiresome to find out which terminal is currently in use As for terminals in general all of t
8. tc photypesetter simulator tc TC 11 TUS6 DECtape a tee pipe fitting 2 2 2 ae Tektronix 4014 tell move read write pointer temporarily eco sar ai Be wwe eed terminal o ask so YD tee oh Caan ky terminal initialization data terminal interface terminal ame 32 dao rare Se Gh he eee eS ashe a ea e terminal options 2 2 2 0000000 Ge t rminal tabs ui a Gog ee we YBa we Ge N terminals conventional names ELM Ate lt td a terminate a process with extreme prejudice terminate process 2 2 ee ee ee test condition command 0 test your knowledge 20 WOKE S ps dd oh och DA TEXT CAOR e a a Pace Me eae Lie ee text formatting and typesetting ticttaet0e 2 Rade e Ge BE Ae Swe time time a command time ftime get dateandtime time profile aie t te de on e ude ok eee a T time to ASCI aia a Se i a ctime localtime TIMES ata o AAA A a ae ae O Th re Ss wey a eh E A te a ea ah E times get process times 0 times trap umask wait command language timezone convert date and time to ASCH 2 tk paginator for the Tektronix 4014 tm TM 11 TU 10 magtape interface topological sort R p esya e e touch update date last modified of a file
9. Bad freeblock means that a block number outside the available space was encountered in the free list n dups in free means that n blocks were found in the free list which duplicate blocks either in some file or in the earlier part of the free list BUGS Since icheck is inherently two pass in nature extraneous diagnostics may be produced if applied to active file systems It believes even preposterous super blocks and consequently can get core images 7th Edition 1 IOSTAT 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual IOSTAT 1M NAME iostat report I O statistics SYNOPSIS iostat option interval count DESCRIPTION FILES Tostat delves into the system and reports certain statistics kept about input output activity Information is kept about up to three different disks RF RK RP and about typewriters For each disk IO comple tions and number of words transferred are counted for typewriters collectively the number of input and output characters are counted Also each sixtieth of a second the state of each disk is examined and a tally is made if the disk is active The tally goes into one of four categories depending on whether the system is executing in user mode in nice background user mode in system mode or idle From all these numbers and from the known transfer rates of the devices it is possible to determine information such as the degree of IO overlap and average seek times for each device Th
10. a a x b b i c a b if c 0 return s S SLC defines a function to compute an approximate value of the exponential function and for i 1 i lt 10 i e 1 prints approximate values of the exponential function of the first ten integers Bc is actually a preprocessor for dc 1 which it invokes automatically unless the e compile only option is present In this case the dc input is sent to the standard output instead FILES usr lib lib b mathematical library dc 1 desk calculator proper SEE ALSO dc 1 L L Cherry and R Morris BC An arbitrary precision desk calculator language BUGS No amp amp Il or operators For statement must have all three E s Quit is interpreted when read not when executed 7th Edition 2 CAL 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual CAL 1 NAME cal print calendar SYNOPSIS cal month year DESCRIPTION Cal prints a calendar for the specified year If a month is also specified a calendar just for that month is printed Year can be between 1 and 9999 The month is a number between and 12 The calendar produced is that for England and her colonies Try September 1732 BUGS The year is always considered to start in January even though this is historically naive Beware that cal 78 refers to the early Christian era not the 20th century 7th Edition 1 CALENDAR 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual CALENDAR 1 NAME calendar reminder service SYNOPSIS
11. change default directory SYNOPSIS chdir dirname char dirname chroot dirname char dirname DESCRIPTION Dirname is the address of the pathname of a directory terminated by a null byte Chdir causes this directory to become the current working directory the starting point for path names not beginning with Eje Chroot sets the root directory the starting point for path names beginning with The call is restricted to the super user SEE ALSO cd 1 DIAGNOSTICS Zero is returned if the directory is changed 1 is returned if the given name is not that of a directory or is not searchable ASSEMBLER chdir 12 sys chdir dirname chroot 61 sys chroot dirname 7th Edition 1 CHMOD 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual CHMOD 2 NAME chmod change mode of file SYNOPSIS chmod name mode char name DESCRIPTION The file whose name is given as the null terminated string pointed to by name has its mode changed to mode Modes are constructed by ORing together some combination of the following 04000 set user ID on execution 02000 set group ID on execution 01000 save text image after execution 00400 read by owner 00200 write by owner 00100 execute search on directory by owner 00070 read write execute search by group 00007 read write execute search by others If an executable file is set up for sharing n or i option of d 1 then mode 1000 prevents the system from abandoning the swa
12. dir filsys fIbIk ino tbl roff tp DEC mag tape scanf fscanf sscanf printf fprintf sprintf troff nroff text ms macros for f77 ratfor rational struct structure COOKIES T 446 414 Z A ore Be e a la ching CONVERSION cti KS a aed ie gon ae wae en ea printf SHCA ose E S ap ae hehe ad dee putc putchar puts df disk allocator R ii a ee K malloc fopen exponents sy a is Selec Se NKE ea Se scanf stat fseek time floor ceil absolute value floor ceiling intro introduction to library jO jl jn yO yl yn bessel tan asin acos atan atan2 trigonometric sinh cosh tanh hyperbolic fread backgammon the checkers moo guessing bj the chess the reversi a wump the hangman words word itom madd msub mult mdiv min mout pow ecvt fevt maze mkconf makekey abort factor primes factor a number ncheck rand srand random number lex or word from stream 2 2 ee identity endgrent get group fileentry endpwent get password file entry getc getchar fgetc Ba Gs ad ae a Pere a Ss oye Some ctime localtime setjmp longjmp non local graph draw a plot plot openpl et al plot and group identity time to ASCII XIV format format of core image fille 0 format of directorie
13. local for page foot Set prevailing indent and tabs to 51 Set prevailing indent to i Begin indented paragraph with hanging tag given by next text line If tag doesn t fit place it on separate line TP i yes i p i n t l next text line p i prevailing indent 7th Edition MS 7 UNIX Programmer s Manual MS 7 NAME ms macros for formatting manuscripts SYNOPSIS nroff ms options file troff ms options file DESCRIPTION This package of nroff and troff macro definitions provides a canned formatting facility for technical papers in various formats When producing 2 column output on a terminal filter the output through col 1 The macro requests are defined below Many nroff and troff requests are unsafe in conjunction with this package however these requests may be used with impunity after the first PP bp begin new page br break output line here Spn insert n spacing lines Js n line spacing n 1 single n 2 double space na no alignment of right margin Output of the eqn neqn refer and tbl 1 preprocessors for equations and tables is acceptable as input FILES asr lib tmac tmac s SEE ALSO eqn 1 troff 1 refer 1 tbl 1 REQUESTS Request Initial Cause Explanation Value Break LC yes yes One column format on a new page 2C no yes Two column format AB no yes _ Begin abstract AE yes End abstract Al no Yes Author s institution follows Suppressed in TM AT no
14. o only Use as keywords only the words given in the only file i ignore Do not use as keywords any words given in the ignore file If the i and o options are miss ing use usr lib eign as the ignore file b break Use the characters in the break file to separate words In any case tab newline and space characters are always used as break characters r Take any leading nonblank characters of each input line to be a reference identifier as to a page or chapter separate from the text of the line Attach that identifier as a 5th field on each output line The index for this manual was generated using ptx bin sort usr lib eign Line length counts do not account for overstriking or proportional spacing on 1 PUBINDEX 1 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual PUBINDEX 1 pubindex make inverted bibliographic index SYNOPSIS pubindex file DESCRIPTION Pubindex makes a hashed inverted index to the named files for use by refer 1 The files contain biblio graphic references separated by blank lines A bibliographic reference is a set of lines that contain bibliographic information fields Each field starts on a line beginning with a followed by a key letter followed by a blank and followed by the contents of the field which continues until the next line starting with Except for Z YW Q OZ Z N Aa C DH G DO D gt example is FILES The most common key letters and t
15. DESCRIPTION Bj is a serious attempt at simulating the dealer in the game of black jack or twenty one as might be found in Reno The following rules apply The bet is 2 every hand A player natural black jack pays 3 A dealer natural loses 2 Both dealer and player natur als is a push no money exchange If the dealer has an ace up the player is allowed to make an insurance bet against the chance of a dealer natural If this bet is not taken play resumes as normal If the bet is taken it is a side bet where the player wins 2 if the dealer has a natural and loses 1 if the dealer does not If the player is dealt two cards of the same value he is allowed to double He is allowed to play two hands each with one of these cards The bet is doubled also 2 on each hand If a dealt hand has a total of ten or eleven the player may double down He may double the bet 2 to 4 and receive exactly one more card on that hand Under normal play the player may hit draw a card as long as his total is not over twenty one If the player busts goes over twenty one the dealer wins the bet When the player stands decides not to hit the dealer hits until he attains a total of seventeen or more If the dealer busts the player wins the bet If both player and dealer stand the one with the largest total wins A tie is a push The machine deals and keeps score The following questions
16. Roff is the simplest of the text formatting programs and is utterly frozen 7th Edition 1 ROFF 1 Request ad ar br bl n bp n cc C cen de xx ds ef t eh t fi fo hc c he t hx hy n Ag in n Ax n lin Jl n ls n mln m2 n m3 n m4 n na ne n hn n nl n2 n ni n nf nx file of t oh t pa n pl n po n ro sk n Sp n SS ta n n tec ti n tr cdef ul n UNIX Programmer s Manual ROFF 1 REQUEST SUMMARY Break Initial Meaning yes no yes yes yes no yes no yes no no yes no no no no no no yes no no no yes no no no no yes no no no no no yes no no yes no no no no yes yes no yes no no 7th Edition yes Begin adjusting right margins arabic Arabic page numbers Causes a line break the filling of the current line is stopped Insert of n blank lines on new page if necessary n Begin new page and number it n no n means 1 c Control character becomes c Center the next n input lines without filling Define parameterless macro to be invoked by request xx definition ends on line begin ning no Double space same as ls 2 t Even foot title becomes t t Even head title becomes t yes Begin filling output lines All foot titles are t none Hyphenation character becomes c t All head titles are t Title lines are suppressed n Hyphenation is
17. permit or deny messages SYNOPSIS mesg n y DESCRIPTION Mesg with argument n forbids messages via write 1 by revoking non user write permission on the user s terminal Mesg with argument y reinstates permission All by itself mesg reports the current state without changing it FILES dev tty dev SEE ALSO write 1 DIAGNOSTICS Exit status is 0 if messages are receivable if not 2 on error 7th Edition 1 MKCONF 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual MKCONF 1M NAME mkconf generate configuration tables SYNOPSIS mkconf DESCRIPTION FILES Mkconf examines a machine configuration table on its standard input Its output is a pair of files l s and c c The first is an assembler program that represents the interrupt vectors located in low memory addresses the second contains initialized block and character device switch tables Input to mkconf is a sequence of lines The following describe devices on the machine pe PC11 Ip LP11 rf RS11 hs RS03 RS04 tc TUS6 rk RK03 RK05 tm TU10 rp RP03 hp RP04 5 6 ht TU16 dc DC11 kM KL11 DL11 ABC dl DL11 E dp DP11 dn DN1I dh DH11 dhdm DM11 BB du DU11 The devices marked with may be preceded by a number telling how many are to be included The console typewrite is automatically included don t count it as part of the KL or DL specification Count DN s in units of 4 1 system unit The following lines are
18. setuid setgid set user and group ID sh for case if while break continue shell comma d 2 5 Sin ae Sof ees A shift times trap umask wait command sign on sional iaa A a G a signal catch or ignore signals signal after specified time signal toa process 2 2 eee ee ee ee simulator Simulators A d R ep ce a eh amp doe eee be sin cos tan asin acos atan atad2 sinh cosh tanh hyperbolic functions Siik 2 Sc ia we eo SG Sa Pea ORAS ae oe size size of an object hle o sleep suspend execution for an interval sleep suspend execution for interval SMOOth CurVve space ews BR a ce Re ee ae a aR BHEL are a ge ee a peel SOLO P a A e So aE N eh Se dP Sp ad A SS ee at sort sort or merge files sorted les ua sae Bog Ai ee aS Sorted list is Soe Bin Bias Be Sond Bane D spawn new process 2 00000 8 specified time spell spellin spellout find spelling spline interpolate smooth curve split split a file into pieces o split into mantissa and exponent sprintf formatted output conversion sqrt exponential logarithm power square srand random number generator sscanf formatted input conversion standard buffered input output package startup procedures 2
19. 7th Edition ABS 3 ASSERT 3X UNIX Programmer s Manual ASSERT 3X NAME assert program verification SYNOPSIS include lt assert h gt assert expression DESCRIPTION Assert is a macro that indicates expression is expected to be true at this point in the program It causes an exit 2 with a diagnostic comment on the standard output when expression is false 0 Compiling with the cc 1 option DNDEBUG effectively deletes assert from the program DIAGNOSTICS Assertion failed file f line n F is the source file and n the source line number of the assert statement 7th Edition 1 ATOF 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual ATOF 3 NAME atof atoi atol convert ASCII to numbers SYNOPSIS double atof nptr char nptr atoi nptr char nptr long atol nptr char nptr DESCRIPTION These functions convert a string pointed to by nptr to floating integer and long integer representation respectively The first unrecognized character ends the string Atof recognizes an optional string of tabs and spaces then an optional sign then a string of digits optionally containing a decimal point then an optional e or E followed by an optionally signed integer Atoi and atol recognize an optional string of tabs and spaces then an optional sign then a string of digits SEE ALSO scanf 3 BUGS There are no provisions for overflow 7th Edition 1 CRYPT 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual CRYPT 3 NAME
20. EOT resets to the left margin advances 8 inches and then performs a FF The ioctl 2 system call may be used to change the mode of the device Only the first word of the 3 word argument structure is used The bits mean 0400 Enter simultaneous print plot mode 0200 Enter plot mode 0100 Enter print mode default on open 040 Send remote terminate 020 Send remote form feed 010 Send remote EOT 04 Send remote clear 02 Send remote reset On open a reset clear and form feed are performed automatically Notice that the mode bits are not encoded so that it is required that exactly one be set In plot mode each byte is interpreted as 8 bits of which the high order is plotted to the left a 1 leaves a visible dot A full line of dots is produced by 264 bytes lines are terminated only by count or by a remote terminate function There are 200 dots per inch both vertically and horizontally When simultaneous print plot mode is entered exactly one line of characters terminated by NL CR or the remote terminate function should be written Then the device enters plot mode and at least 20 lines of plotting bytes should be sent As the line of characters which is 20 dots high is printed the plotting bytes overlay the characters Notice that it is impossible to print characters on baselines that differ by fewer than 20 dot lines In print mode lines may be terminated either with an appropriate ASCII character or by using the remote
21. Number of processes in core using this text segment Print process table for active processes with these headings The core location of this table entry Run state encoded thus 0 no process 1 waiting for some event 3 runnable PSTAT 1M PRI UNIX Programmer s Manual PSTAT 1M 4 being created 5 being terminated 6 stopped under trace Miscellaneous state variables or ed together 01 loaded 02 the scheduler process 04 locked 010 swapped out 020 traced 040 used in tracing 0100 locked in by lock 2 Scheduling priority see nice 2 SIGNAL Signals received signals 1 16 coded in bits 0 15 UID TIM CPU NI PGRP PID PPID ADDR SIZE Real user ID Time resident in seconds times over 127 coded as 127 Weighted integral of CPU time for scheduler Nice level see nice 2 Process number of root of process group the opener of the controlling terminal The process ID number The process ID of parent process If in core the physical address of the u area of the process measured in multiples of 64 bytes If swapped out the position in the swap area measured in multiples of 512 bytes Size of process image in multiples of 64 bytes WCHAN Wait channel number of a waiting process LINK TEXTP CLKT t RAW CAN OUT MODE ADDR DEL COL STATE PGRP u f LOC FLG 7th Edition Link pointer in list of runnable processes If text is pure pointer to location of text table en
22. The function exit circum vents all cleanup SEE ALSO wait 2 ASSEMBLER exit 1 status in r0 sys exit 7th Edition 1 FORK 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual FORK 2 NAME fork spawn new process SYNOPSIS fork gt DESCRIPTION Fork is the only way new processes are created The new process s core image is a copy of that of the caller of fork The only distinction is the fact that the value returned in the old parent process contains the process ID of the new child process while the value returned in the child is 0 Process ID s range from 1 to 30 000 This process ID is used by wait 2 Files open before the fork are shared and have a common read write pointer In particular this is the way that standard input and output files are passed and also how pipes are set up SEE ALSO wait 2 exec 2 DIAGNOSTICS Returns 1 and fails to create a process if there is inadequate swap space the user is not super user and has too many processes or the system s process table is full Only the super user can take the last process table slot ASSEMBLER fork 2 sys fork new process return old process return new process ID in r0 The return locations in the old and new process differ by one word The C bit is set in the old process if a new process could not be created 7th Edition 1 GETPID 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual GETPID 2 NAME getpid get process identification SYNOPSIS g
23. ar 5 arbitrary precision arithmetic language be 1 UC an pi ces as Bane ees gee a a e a tp 1 archive and library maintainer ar 1 archive library file format ar 5 ACME e RO ot ok See oe yeas a Benes Boe Ge ee Hos e tar 1 archives to new Tomat arcv 1 APQUMENS 6 o oe ee we a Re HR echo 1 arguments as an expression 20 expr 1 arithmetic msub mult mdiv min mout mp 3 arithmetic provide drill in number facts arithmetic 6 arithmetic language bc 1 as Assemblers roo ta e a R R H ed Ge oe as 1 ASCH an i o E ctime localtime gmtime ctime 3 ascii map of ASCH character Set ascii 7 ASCI to numbers e naciera a o e E Ad atof 3 asctime timezone convert date and time to ctime 3 asin acos atan atan2 trigonometric sin 3 assembler crs a ee fe e R A AEUR en as 1 assembler and link editor output a out 5 assert program verification assert 3 assign buffering to a stream ooo setbuf 3 at execute commands at a later time at 1 atan atan2 trigonometric functions sin 3 atof atoi atol convert ASCH to numbers atof 3 await completion of process o wait 1 awk pattern scanning and processing awk 1 backgammon the game backgammon 6 banner make long posters
24. bit boundaries by skipping bytes when necessary Data written to an mpx file must be formatted as an array of record structures defined as follows struct output_record short index short count short ccount char data T where the data portion of the record is referred to indirectly and the other cells have the same interpreta tion as in input_record The control messages listed below may be read from a multiplexed file descriptor They are presented as two 16 bit integers the first number is the message code defined in lt sys mx h gt the second is an optional parameter meaningful only with M_WATCH and M BLK 7th Edition M WATCH a process wants to attach on this channel The second parameter is the 16 bit user id of the process that executed the open M CLOSE the channel is closed This message is generated when the last file descriptor referencing a channel is closed The detach command see mpx 2 should be used in response to this message M ROT indicates logical end of file on a channel If the channel is joined to a typewriter EOT control d will cause the M_EOT message under the conditions specified in tty 4 for end of file If the channel is attached to a process M ROT will be gen erated whenever the process writes zero bytes on the channel M BLK if non blocking mode has been enabled on an mpx file descriptor xd by executing ioctl xd MXNBLK 0 write operations on the file are truncated in t
25. char ar_uid char ar_gid int ar_mode long ar_size 5 The name is a null terminated string the date is in the form of time 2 the user ID and group ID are numbers the mode is a bit pattern per chmod 2 the size is counted in bytes Each file begins on a word boundary a null byte is inserted between files if necessary Nevertheless the size given reflects the actual size of the file exclusive of padding Notice there is no provision for empty areas in an archive file SEE ALSO ar 1 1d 1 nm 1 BUGS Coding user and group IDs as characters is a botch 7th Edition 1 CORE 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual CORE 5 NAME core format of core image file DESCRIPTION UNIX writes out a core image of a terminated process when any of various errors occur See signal 2 for the list of reasons the most common are memory violations illegal instructions bus errors and user generated quit signals The core image is called core and is written in the process s working directory provided it can be normal access controls apply The first 1024 bytes of the core image are a copy of the system s per user data for the process including the registers as they were at the time of the fault see the system listings for the format of this area The remainder represents the actual contents of the user s core area when the core image was written If the text segment is write protected and shared it is not dumped otherwise the e
26. local or global data symbol local or global text symbol local or global absolute symbol 2 g p 2 Print the addressed value in symbolic form using the same rules for symbol lookup as a t 0 When preceded by an integer tabs to the next appropriate tab stop For example 8t moves to the next 8 space tab stop Print a space n 0 Print a newline O Print the enclosed string Dot is decremented by the current increment Nothing is printed Dot is incremented by 1 Nothing is printed Dot is decremented by 1 Nothing is printed o If the previous command temporarily incremented dot make the increment permanent Repeat the previous command with a count of 1 L value mask Words starting at dot are masked with mask and compared with value until a match is found If L is used then the match is for 4 bytes at a time instead of 2 If no match is found then dot is unchanged otherwise dot is set to the matched location If mask is omitted then 1 is used w value Write the 2 byte value into the addressed location If the command is W write 4 bytes Odd addresses are not allowed when writing to the subprocess address space m b1 el f1 2 New values for b1 el fl are recorded If less than three expressions are given then the remaining map parameters are left unchanged If the or is followed by x then the second segment b2 e2 f2 of the mapping is changed If the list is termi
27. mp 3 mv 1 lseek 2 hp 4 rp 4 ms 7 mp 3 mtab 5 mp 3 mv 1 getenv 3 getlogin 3 mktemp 3 pwd 1 tty 1 getpw 3 nlist 3 nm 1 ttyname 3 term 7 ncheck 1 dumpdir 1 ncheck 1 eqn 1 creat 2 arcv 1 newgrp 1 fork 2 newgrp 1 sh 1 dbm 3 nice 2 nice 1 nlist 3 clri clear i nice setjmp longjmp troff tbl format tables for deroff remove arithmetic provide drill in factor primes factor a rand srand random atof atoi atol convert ASCII to introduction to system calls and error ncheck generate names from i size size of an lorder find ordering relation for an od fopen freopen fdopen dup dup2 duplicate an open plot strncpy strlen index rindex string join relational database stty set terminal lorder find a out assembler and link editor fread fwrite buffered binary input ecvt fevt gcvt printf fprintf sprintf formatted stdio standard buffered input chown change chown chgrp change quot summarize file system pk pkopen pkclose pkread pkwrite pkfail pkon pkoff establish tk getpass read a passwd change login passwd getpwuid getpwnam setpwent endpwent get grep egrep fgrep search a file for a awk cc popen mesg ptx MESSA ES a A is du dp DU 11 201 data cat
28. msub a b c mult a b c mdiv a b q r min a mout a pow a b m c gcd a b c rpow a b c msqrt a b r mint a b c m q r sdiv a n q r mint a q short r mint itom n DESCRIPTION These routines perform arithmetic on integers of arbitrary length The integers are stored using the defined type mint Pointers to a mint should be initialized using the function itom which sets the initial value to n After that space is managed automatically by the routines madd msub mult assign to their third arguments the sum difference and product respectively of their first two arguments mdiv assigns the quotient and remainder respectively to its third and fourth argu ments sdiv is like mdiv except that the divisor is an ordinary integer msqrt produces the square root and remainder of its first argument rpow calculates a raised to the power b while pow calculates this reduced modulo m min andmout do decimal input and output The functions are obtained with the loader option mp DIAGNOSTICS Illegal operations and running out of memory produce messages and core images 7th Edition NLIST 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual NLIST 3 NAME nlist get entries from name list SYNOPSIS include lt a out h gt nlist filename nl char filename struct nlist nl DESCRIPTION Nlist examines the name list in the given executable output file and selectively extracts a list of values The
29. npgrp i xd pgrp If xd is negative npgrp applies to the process executing it otherwise i and xd are interpreted as a channel index and mpx file descriptor and npgrp is applied to the process on the non multiplexed end of the channel If pgrp is zero the process group number of the indicated process is set to the process number of that process otherwise the value of pgrp is used as the process group number Npgrp normally returns the new process group number If i and xd specify a nonexistant channel npgrp returns 1 ckill i xd signal sends the specified signal see signal 2 through the channel specified by i and xd If the channel is connected to anything other than a process ckill is a null operation If there is a process at the other end of the channel the process group will be interrupted see signal 2 kill 2 Ckill nor mally returns signal If ch and xd specify a nonexistent channel ckill returns 1 FILES usr include sys mx h asr include sgtty h SEE ALSO mpxio 5 BUGS Mpx files are an experimental part of the operating system more subject to change and prone to bugs than other parts Maintenance programs e g icheck 1 diagnose mpx files as an illegal mode Chan nels may only be connected to objects in the operating system that are accessible through the line discip line mechanism Higher performace line disciplines are needed The maximum tree depth restriction is not really checked A non destructive dis
30. o a banner 6 Das DASIC um sopes ratos dr in er T cio E bas 1 base subroutines dbminit fetch dbm 3 basename strip filename affixes basename 1 ASIC A O Becta tes tw neste Mae Pet Soe Bras ena bas 1 be arbitrary precision arithmetic language be 1 bed ppt convert to antique media bed 6 Bebe ie ace alg ae Sa Aa le A cb 1 j0 jl jn yO yl yn fread fwrite buffered sync update the super sync update super update periodically update the super sum sum and count ching fortune the brk sbrk export login sh for case if while fread fwrite stdio standard setbuf assign mknod 13tol Itol3 convert between 3 swab swap cc pec cb lint a hypot de desk cal print indir indirect system cu malloc free realloc intro errno introduction to system exec exit export login newgrp sh for signal cat sh for case if while break continue functions s s sasae a ee ae N fabs floor brk sbrk break chdir passwd chmod chmod chown chown chgrp cd ching fortune the book of pipe create an interprocess ungetc push ispunct isprint iscntrl isascii eqnchar special getc getchar fgetc getw get putc putchar fputc putw put ascii
31. return key Hard wired terminals Hard wired terminals usually begin at the right speed up to 9600 baud other wise the preceding instructions apply For all these terminals it is important that you type your name in lower case if possible if you type upper case letters UNIX will assume that your terminal cannot generate lower case letters and will translate all subsequent upper case letters to lower case The evidence that you have successfully logged in is that the Shell program will type a to you The Shell is described below under How to run a program For more information consult stty 1 which tells how to adjust terminal behavior getty 8 which discusses the login sequence in more detail and tty 4 which discusses terminal I O Logging out There are three ways to log out You can simply hang up the phone You can log out by typing an end of file indication EOT character control d to the Shell The Shell will terminate and the login message will appear again You can also log in directly as another user by giving a login 1 command How to communicate through your terminal When you type characters a gnome deep in the system gathers your characters and saves them in a secret place The characters will not be given to a program until you type a return or newline as described above in Logging in UNIX terminal I O is full duplex It has full read ahead which means that you can type at any t
32. section The title is entered in lower case The chapter namber does not need a letter suffix If no chapter is specified the whole manual is searched for title and all occurrences of it are printed Options and their meanings are t Phototypeset the section using troff 1 n Print the section on the standard output using nroff 1 k Display the output on a Tektronix 4014 terminal using troff 1 and tc 1 e Appended or prefixed to any of the above causes the manual section to be preprocessed by neqn or eqn 1 e alone means te W Print the path names of the manual sections but do not print the sections themselves default Copy an already formatted manual section to the terminal or if none is available act as n It may be necessary to use a filter to adapt the output to the particular terminal s characteristics Further options e g to specify the kind of terminal you have are passed on to troff 1 or nroff Options and chapter may be changed before each title For example man man would reproduce this section as well as any other sections named man that may exist in other chapters of the manual e g man 7 FILES usr man man asr man cat SEE ALSO nroff 1 eqn 1 tc 1 man 7 BUGS The manual is supposed to be reproducible either on a phototypesetter or on a terminal However on a terminal some information is necessarily lost 7th Edition 1 MESG 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual MESG 1 NAME mesg
33. uucp 1 dd 1 core 5 brk 2 core 5 mem 4 sin 3 sinh 3 wc 1 sum 1 cp 1 crash 8 creat 2 pipe 2 umask 2 cron 8 crypt 1 crypt 3 ctime 3 cu 1 ttt 6 spline 1 cron 8 prof 1 ttys 5 dbm 3 null types primitive system join relational du dp DU 11 201 date print and set the time ftime get gmtime asctime timezone convert touch update tp crypt encode te TC 11 TUS6 chdir change eqnchar special character subroutines dbminit fetch store tail mesg permit or CONSTUCIS as Morais ns Hiei e Bh aes ep ete ees crypt setkey encrypt dup dup2 duplicate an open file de access file ioctl stty gtty control diff diff3 3 way mv move or rename files and cd change working chdir change default ls list contents of mkdir make a dcheck file system unlink remove pwd working mknod make a hp RH 11 RP04 RPOS RP06 moving head rk RK 11 RK03 or RK05 rp RP 11 RP03 moving head hs RH11 RS03 RS04 fixed head rf RF11 RS11 fixed head df du summarize mount umount mount and prof hypot cabs euclidean find and insert literature references in du reversi a game of graph arithmetic provide pk packet pkclose pkread pkwrite pkfail packet dump incremental file system
34. write file descriptor in r1 7th Edition 1 PKON 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual PKON 2 NAME pkon pkoff establish packet protocol SYNOPSIS pkon fd size pkoff fd DESCRIPTION Pkon establishes packet protocol see pk 4 on the open character special file whose file descriptor is fd Size is a desired packet size a power of 2 in the range 32 lt size lt 4096 The size is negotiated with a remote packet driver and a possibly smaller actual packet size is returned An asynchronous line used for packet communication should be in raw mode see tty 4 Pkoff turns off the packet driver on the channel whose file descriptor is fd SEE ALSO pk 4 pkopen 3 tty 4 signal 2 DIAGNOSTICS Pkon returns 1 if fd does not describe an open file or if packet communication cannot be established Pkoff returns 1 for an unknown file descriptor Writing on a packet driver link that has been shut down by close or pkoff at the other end raises signal SIGPIPE in the writing process 7th Edition 1 PROFIL 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual PROFIL 2 NAME profil execution time profile SYNOPSIS profil buff bufsiz offset scale char buff int bufsiz offset scale DESCRIPTION Buff points to an area of core whose length in bytes is given by bufsiz After this call the user s pro gram counter pc is examined each clock tick 60th second offset is subtracted from it and the result multiplied by scale If the
35. DESCRIPTION System causes the string to be given to sh 1 as input as if the string had been typed as a command at a terminal The current process waits until the shell has completed then returns the exit status of the shell SEE ALSO popen 3 exec 2 wait 2 DIAGNOSTICS Exit status 127 indicates the shell couldn t be executed 7th Edition 1 TTYNAME 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual TTYNAME 3 NAME ttyname isatty ttyslot find name of a terminal SYNOPSIS char ttyname fildes isatty fildes ttyslot DESCRIPTION Ttyname returns a pointer to the null terminated path name of the terminal device associated with file descriptor fildes Isatty returns if fildes is associated with a terminal device 0 otherwise Ttyslot returns the number of the entry in the ftys 5 file for the control terminal of the current process FILES dev etc ttys SEE ALSO ioctl 2 ttys 5 DIAGNOSTICS Ttyname returns a null pointer 0 if fildes does not describe a terminal device in directory dev Ttyslot returns 0 if etc ttys is inaccessible or if it cannot determine the control terminal BUGS The return value points to static data whose content is overwritten by each call 7th Edition 1 UNGETC 3S UNIX Programmer s Manual UNGETC 3S NAME ungetc push character back into input stream SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt ungetc c stream FILE stream DESCRIPTION Ungetc pushes the character
36. If the l is capitalized register x is treated as a stack and its top value is popped onto the main stack The top value on the stack is duplicated The top value on the stack is printed The top value remains unchanged P interprets the top of the stack as an ascii string removes it and prints it All values on the stack and in registers are printed exits the program If executing a string the recursion level is popped by two If q is capital ized the top value on the stack is popped and the string execution level is popped by that value treats the top element of the stack as a character string and executes it as a string of dc com mands replaces the number on the top of the stack with its scale factor puts the bracketed ascii string onto the top of the stack x The top two elements of the stack are popped and compared Register x is executed if they obey the stated relation replaces the top element on the stack by its square root Any existing fractional part of the argu ment is taken into account but otherwise the scale factor is ignored interprets the rest of the line as a UNIX command All values on the stack are popped The top value on the stack is popped and used as the number radix for further input I pushes the input base on the top of the stack The top value on the stack is popped and used as the number radix for further output pushes the output base on the top of the stack the top of the stack is
37. When the contents of two files are identical the contents of the lower numbered file is suppressed Under the e option diff3 publishes a script for the editor ed that will incorporate into file all changes between file2 and file3 i e the changes that normally would be flagged and 3 Option x 3 produces a script to incorporate only changes flagged 3 The following command will apply the resulting script to filel cat script echo 1 p ed filel FILES tmp d3 922 lusr lib diff3 SEE ALSO diff 1 BUGS Text lines that consist of a single will defeat e Files longer than 64K bytes won t work 7th Edition 1 DU 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual DU 1 NAME du summarize disk usage SYNOPSIS du s a name DESCRIPTION Du gives the number of blocks contained in all files and recursively directories within each specified directory or file name If name is missing is used The optional argument s causes only the grand total to be given The optional argument a causes an entry to be generated for each file Absence of either causes an entry to be generated for each directory only A file which has two links to it is only counted once BUGS Non directories given as arguments not under a option are not listed If there are too many distinct linked files du counts the excess files multiply 7th Edition 1 DUMP 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual DUMP 1
38. address address function arguments In normal operation sed cyclically copies a line of input into a pattern space unless there is something left after a D command applies in sequence all commands whose addresses select that pattern space and at the end of the script copies the pattern space to the standard output except under n and deletes the pattern space An address is either a decimal number that counts input lines cumulatively across files a that addresses the last line of input or a context address regular expression in the style of ed 1 modified thus The escape sequence in matches a newline embedded in the pattern space A command line with no addresses selects every pattern space A command line with one address selects each pattern space that matches the address A command line with two addresses selects the inclusive range from the first pattern space that matches the first address through the next pattern space that matches the second If the second address is a number less than or equal to the line number first selected only one line is selected Thereafter the process is repeated looking again for the first address ep Editing commands can be applied only to non selected pattern spaces by use of the negation function below In the following list of functions the maximum number of permissible addresses for each function is indicated in parentheses An argument denoted
39. and F indicate the system maintained time just before and just after a date command has changed the system s idea of the time Wimp is maintained by login 1 and init 8 Neither of these programs creates the file so if it is removed record keeping is turned off It is summarized by ac 1 FILES etc utmp usr adm wtmp SEE ALSO login 1 init 8 who 1 ac 1 7th Edition 1 ARITHMETIC 6 UNIX Programmer s Manual ARITHMETIC 6 NAME arithmetic provide drill in number facts SYNOPSIS usr games arithmetic x range DESCRIPTION Arithmetic types out simple arithmetic problems and waits for an answer to be typed in If the answer is correct it types back Right and a new problem If the answer is wrong it replies What and waits for another answer Every twenty problems it publishes statistics on correctness and the time required to answer To quit the program type an interrupt delete The first optional argument determines the kind of problem to be generated x respectively cause addition subtraction multiplication and division problems to be generated One or more characters can be given if more than one is given the different types of problems will be mixed in random order default is Range is a decimal number all addends subtrahends differences multiplicands divisors and quotients will be less than or equal to the value of range Default range is 10 At the start
40. c Print three columns giving file size in blocks number of files of that size and cumulative total of blocks in that size or smaller file f Print count of number of files as well as space owned by each user FILES Default file system varies with system etc passwd to get user names SEE ALSO Is 1 du 1 BUGS Holes in files are counted as if they actually occupied space 7th Edition 1 RANLIB 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual RANLIB 1 NAME ranlib convert archives to random libraries SYNOPSIS ranlib archive DESCRIPTION Ranlib converts each archive to a form which can be loaded more rapidly by the loader by adding a table of contents named _ SYMDEF to the beginning of the archive It uses ar 1 to reconstruct the archive so that sufficient temporary file space must be available in the file system containing the current directory SEE ALSO Id 1 ar 1 BUGS Because generation of a library by ar and randomization by ranlib are separate phase errors are possi ble The loader d warns when the modification date of a library is more recent than the creation of its dictionary but this means you get the warning even if you only copy the library 7th Edition 1 RATFOR 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual RATFOR 1 NAME ratfor rational Fortran dialect SYNOPSIS ratfor option filename DESCRIPTION Ratfor converts a rational dialect of Fortran into ordinary irrational Fortran Ratfor provides contr
41. calendar DESCRIPTION Calendar consults the file calendar in the current directory and prints out lines that contain today s or tomorrow s date anywhere in the line Most reasonable month day dates such as Dec 7 december 7 12 7 etc are recognized but not 7 December or 7 12 On weekends tomorrow extends through Monday When an argument is present calendar does its job for every user who has a file calendar in his login directory and sends him any positive results by mail 1 Normally this is done daily in the wee hours under control of cron 8 FILES calendar lasr lib calendar to figure out today s and tomorrow s dates etc passwd tmp cal egrep sed mail subprocesses SEE ALSO at 1 cron 8 mail 1 BUGS Your calendar must be public information for you to get reminder service Calendar s extended idea of tomorrow doesn t account for holidays 7th Edition 1 CAT 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual CAT 1 NAME cat catenate and print SYNOPSIS cat u file DESCRIPTION Cat reads each file in sequence and writes it on the standard output Thus cat file prints the file and cat filel file2 gt file3 concatenates the first two files and places the result on the third ce gt If no file is given or if the argument is encountered cat reads from the standard input Output is buffered in 512 byte blocks unless the standard outpu
42. expression print expression list gt expression printf format expression list gt expression next skip remaining patterns on this input line exit skip the rest of the input Statements are terminated by semicolons newlines or right braces An empty expression list stands for the whole line Expressions take on string or numeric values as appropriate and are built using the operators and concatenation indicated by a blank The C operators and are also available in expressions Variables may be scalars array elements denoted x i or fields Variables are initialized to the null string Array subscripts may be any string not necessarily numeric this allows for a form of associative memory String constants are quoted The print statement prints its arguments on the standard output or on a file if gt file is present separated by the current output field separator and terminated by the output record separator The printf statement formats its expression list according to the format see printf 3 The built in function length returns the length of its argument taken as a string or of the whole line if no argument There are also built in functions exp log sqrt and int The last truncates its argument to an integer substr s m n returns the n character substring of s that begins at position m The function sprintf fmt expr expr formats the expressions
43. fgets keeps it all in the name of backward compatibility 7th Edition 1 HY POT 3M UNIX Programmer s Manual HYPOT 3M NAME hypot cabs euclidean distance SYNOPSIS include lt math h gt double hypot x y double x y double cabs z struct double x y Z DESCRIPTION Hypot and cabs return sqrt x x y y taking precautions against unwarranted overflows SEE ALSO exp 3 for sqrt 7th Edition 1 JO 3M UNIX Programmer s Manual JO 3M NAME j0 j1 jn yO yl yn bessel functions SYNOPSIS include lt math h gt double j0 x double x double j1 x double x double jn n x double x double y0 x double x double y1 x double x double yn n x double x DESCRIPTION These functions calculate Bessel functions of the first and second kinds for real arguments and integer orders DIAGNOSTICS Negative arguments cause y0 y and yn to return a huge negative value and set errno to EDOM 7th Edition 1 L3TOL 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual L3TOL 3 NAME 13tol ltol3 convert between 3 byte integers and long integers SYNOPSIS I3tol lp cp n long Ip char cp Itol3 cp Ip n char cp long Ip DESCRIPTION L3tol converts a list of n three byte integers packed into a character string pointed to by cp into a list of long integers pointed to by Ip Ltol3 performs the reverse conversion from long integers p to three byte integers cp These functions are use
44. getw get character getegid get user and group identity getenv value for environment name geteuid getegid get user and group getgrent getgrgid getgrnam setgrent getlogin get login name getpass read a password getpid get process identification getpw get name from UID getpwent getpwuid getpwnam setpwent gets fgets get a string froma stream getty set typewriter mode getuid getgid geteuid getegid get user getw get character or word from stream gmtime asctime timezone convert date and goto graph graphics filters e s ssc ava Z a ae ee 2 ae Se ew graphics interface graphics interface dump 5 core 5 dir 5 filsys 5 tbl 1 roff 1 tp 5 scanf 3 printf 3 troff 1 ms 7 f77 1 ratfor 1 struct 1 ching 6 printf 3 putc 3 puts 3 fread 3 df 1 malloc 3 fopen 3 frexp 3 scanf 3 fseek 3 stat 2 fseek 3 time 2 floor 3 intro 3 jo 3 sin 3 sinh 3 fread 3 backgammon 6 checkers 6 moo 6 bj 6 chess 6 reversi 6 wump 6 words 6 mp 3 ecvt 3 maze 6 mkconf 1 makekey 8 abort 3 factor 1 ncheck 1 rand 3 lex 1 getc 3 getuid 2 getenv 3 getuid 2 getgrent 3 getlogin 3 getpass 3 getpid 2 getpw 3 getpwent 3 gets 3 getty 8 getuid 2 getc 3 ctime 3 setjmp 3 graph 1 plot 1 plot 3 plot 5 chown chgrp change owner or newgrp log in to a new getergid geternam se
45. hangup signal is sent to all processes with the terminal as control terminal Unless other arrangements have been made this signal causes the processes to terminate If the hangup signal is ignored any read returns with an end of file indication Thus programs that read a terminal and test for end of file on their input can terminate appropriately when hung up on When one or more characters are written they are actually transmitted to the terminal as soon as previously written characters have finished typing Input characters are echoed by putting them in the output queue as they arrive When a process produces characters more rapidly than they can be typed it will be suspended when its output queue exceeds some limit When the queue has drained down to some threshold the program is resumed Even parity is always generated on output The EOT character 1s not transmitted except in raw mode to prevent terminals that respond to it from hanging up Several ioctl 2 calls apply to terminals Most of them use the following structure defined in lt sgtty h gt struct sgttyb char sg ispeed char sg ospeed char sg erase char sg kill int sg flags The sg _ispeed and sg _ospeed fields describe the input and output speeds of the device according to the following table which corresponds to the DEC DH 11 interface If other hardware is used impossible speed changes are ignored Symbolic values in the table are as defined in lt sgtty h g
46. isascii is true and on the single non ASCII value EOF see stdio 3 isalpha c is a letter isupper c is an upper case letter islower c is a lower case letter isdigit c is a digit isalnum c is an alphanumeric character isspace c is a space tab carriage return newline or formfeed ispunct c is a punctuation character neither control nor alphanumeric isprint c is a printing character code 040 8 space through 0176 tilde iscntrl c is a delete character 0177 or ordinary control character less than 040 isascli c is an ASCII character code less than 0200 SEE ALSO ascii 7 7th Edition 1 DBM 3X UNIX Programmer s Manual DBM 3X NAME dbminit fetch store delete firstkey nextkey data base subroutines SYNOPSIS typedef struct char dptr int dsize datum dbminit file char file datum fetch key datum key store key content datum key content delete key datum key datum firstkey datum nextkey key datum key DESCRIPTION These functions maintain key content pairs in a data base The functions will handle very large a bil lion blocks databases and will access a keyed item in one or two filesystem accesses The functions are obtained with the loader option Idbm Keys and contents are described by the datum typedef A datum specifies a string of dsize bytes pointed to by dptr Arbitrary binary data as well as normal ASCII strings are allowed The data base is stored in two fi
47. mkdir 1 mknod 1 filsys 5 DIAGNOSTICS Zero is returned if the file has been made 1 if the file already exists or if the user is not the super user ASSEMBLER mknod 14 sys mknod name mode addr 7th Edition 1 MOUNT 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual MOUNT 2 NAME mount umount mount or remove file system SYNOPSIS mount special name rwflag char special name umount special char special DESCRIPTION Mount announces to the system that a removable file system has been mounted on the block structured special file special from now on references to file name will refer to the root file on the newly mounted file system Special and name are pointers to null terminated strings containing the appropriate path names Name must exist already Name must be a directory unless the root of the mounted file system is not a directory Its old contents are inaccessible while the file system is mounted The rwflag argument determines whether the file system can be written on if it is 0 writing is allowed if non zero no writing is done Physically write protected and magnetic tape file systems must be mounted read only or errors will occur when access times are updated whether or not any explicit write is attempted Umount announces to the system that the special file is no longer to contain a removable file system The associated file reverts to its ordinary interpretation SEE ALSO mount 1 DIAGNOSTICS Mou
48. name value parameter A parameter is a sequence of letters digits or underscores a name a digit or any of the char acters O The value if any of the parameter is substituted The braces are required only when parameter is followed by a letter digit or underscore that is not to be interpreted as part of its name If parameter is a digit then it is a positional parameter If parameter is or then all the positional parameters starting with 1 are substituted separated by spaces 0 is set from argument zero when the shell is invoked parameter word y If parameter is set then substitute its value otherwise substitute word parameter word y If parameter is not set then set it to word the value of the parameter is then substituted Posi tional parameters may not be assigned to in this way parameter word If parameter is set then substitute its value otherwise print word and exit from the shell If word is omitted then a standard message is printed parameter word y If parameter is set then substitute word otherwise substitute nothing In the above word is not evaluated unless it is to be used as the substituted string So that for exam ple echo d pwd will only execute pwd if d is unset The following parameters are automatically set by the shell The number of positional parameters in decimal Options supplied to the shell on invocation or by set The valu
49. option DESCRIPTION Spline takes pairs of numbers from the standard input as abcissas and ordinates of a function It pro duces a similar set which is approximately equally spaced and includes the input set on the standard output The cubic spline output R W Hamming Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers 2nd ed 349ff has two continuous derivatives and sufficiently many points to look smooth when plotted for example by graph 1 The following options are recognized each as a separate argument a Supply abscissas automatically they are missing from the input spacing is given by the next argument or is assumed to be 1 if next argument is not a number k The constant k used in the boundary value computation yO ya kyn 1 is set by the next argument By default k 0 n Space output points so that approximately n intervals occur between the lower and upper x limits Default n 100 p Make output periodic i e match derivatives at ends First and last input values should normally agree x Next 1 or 2 arguments are lower and upper x limits Normally these limits are calculated from the data Automatic abcissas start at lower limit default 0 SEE ALSO graph 1 DIAGNOSTICS When data is not strictly monotone in x spline reproduces the input without interpolating extra points BUGS A limit of 1000 input points is enforced silently 7th Edition 1 SPLIT 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SPLIT
50. or until EOF is encountered Each routine picks up where the others leave off so successive calls may be used to search the entire file A call to setgrent has the effect of rewinding the group file to allow repeated searches Endgrent may be called to close the group file when processing is complete etc group SEE ALSO getlogin 3 getpwent 3 group 5 DIAGNOSTICS BUGS A null pointer 0 is returned on EOF or error All information is contained in a static area so it must be copied if it is to be saved 7th Edition 1 GETLOGIN 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual GETLOGIN 3 NAME getlogin get login name SYNOPSIS char getlogin DESCRIPTION Getlogin returns a pointer to the login name as found in etc utmp It may be used in conjunction with getpwnam to locate the correct password file entry when the same userid is shared by several login names If getlogin is called within a process that is not attached to a typewriter it returns NULL The correct procedure for determining the login name is to first call getlogin and if it fails to call getpwuid FILES etc utmp SEE ALSO getpwent 3 getgrent 3 utmp 5 DIAGNOSTICS Returns NULL 0 if name not found BUGS The return values point to static data whose content is overwritten by each call 7th Edition 1 GETPASS 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual GETPASS 3 NAME getpass read a password SYNOPSIS char getpass prompt char prompt DESCRIPTION
51. set file creation mode Mask sete times is ee gh a a S amp H oes set program priority 2 0004 set shift times trap umask wait set terminal options o e set terminal tabs o a e RA A set thedate sia cr e wie amp 8 SOU TIME Z e is S r BA aoe weds Soret ER set typewriter mode 22 0005 set user and group ID 04 setbuf assign buffering to a stream setgid set user and groupID setgrent endgrent get group file entry sh 1 open 2 sh 1 Iseek 2 malloc 3 mail 1 utmp 5 refer 1 comm 1 lorder 1 join 1 strip 1 calendar 1 unlink 2 mount 2 deroff 1 strip 1 rm 1 mv 1 uniq 1 iostat 1 uniq 1 fseek 3 restor 1 rev 1 reversi 6 col 1 rev 1 reversi 6 fseek 3 rf 4 hp 4 hs 4 ht 4 string 3 rk 4 rm 1 roff 1 exp 3 rp 4 hp 4 rp 4 mp 3 hs 4 rf 4 nice 1 sa 1 brk 2 scanf 3 awk 1 alarm 2 grep 1 xsend 1 man 1 sed 1 comm 1 mail 1 kill 2 ascii 7 umask 2 utime 2 nice 2 sh 1 stty 1 tabs 1 date 1 stime 2 getty 8 setuid 2 setbuf 3 setuid 2 getgrent 3 crypt getpwent getpwuid getpwnam cd eval exec exit export login newgrp system issue a export login newgrp read readonly set login pause stop until alarm schedule kill send signal
52. stream ferror stream FILE stream clearerr stream FILE stream fileno stream FILE stream DESCRIPTION Feof returns non zero when end of file is read on the named input stream otherwise zero Ferror returns non zero when an error has occurred reading or writing the named stream otherwise zero Unless cleared by clearerr the error indication lasts until the stream is closed Clrerr resets the error indication on the named stream Fileno returns the integer file descriptor associated with the stream see open 2 These functions are implemented as macros they cannot be redeclared SEE ALSO fopen 3 open 2 7th Edition 1 FLOOR 3M UNIX Programmer s Manual FLOOR 3M NAME fabs floor ceil absolute value floor ceiling functions SYNOPSIS include lt math h gt double floor x double x double ceil x double x double fabs x double x DESCRIPTION Fabs returns the absolute value x Floor returns the largest integer not greater than x Ceil returns the smallest integer not less than x SEE ALSO abs 3 7th Edition 1 FOPEN 35 UNIX Programmer s Manual FOPEN 35 NAME fopen freopen fdopen open a stream SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt FILE fopen filename type char filename type FILE freopen filename type stream char filename type FILE stream FILE fdopen fildes type char type DESCRIPTION Fopen opens the file named by filename and asso
53. terminate function FILES dev vp0 SEE ALSO opr 1 7th Edition 1 A OUT 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual A OUT 5 NAME a out assembler and link editor output SYNOPSIS include lt a out h gt DESCRIPTION A out is the output file of the assembler as 1 and the link editor d 1 Both programs make a out exe cutable if there were no errors and no unresolved external references Layout information as given in the include file for the PDP11 is struct exec a out header short a_magic magic number unsigned a text size of text segment unsigned a_data size of initialized data unsigned a_bss size of uninitialized data unsigned a_syms size of symbol table unsigned a entry entry point unsigned a unused not used unsigned a flag relocation info stripped 5 define A MAGICI 0407 normal define A MAGIC2 0410 read only text define A MAGIC3 0411 separated I amp D define A MAGIC4 0405 overlay struct nlist symbol table entry char n_name 8 symbol name int n_type type flag unsigned n_ value value 5 values for type flag define N_UNDF 0 undefined define N ABS 0 absolute define N TEXT 02 text symbol define N DATA 03 data symbol define N BSS 04 bss symbol define N TYPE 037 define N REG 024 register name define N FN 037 file name symbol define N EXT 040 external bit
54. with the even values indicating the broken lines Each hexagram consists of two major sections The Judgement relates specifically to the matter at hand E g It furthers one to have somewhere to go while the Image describes the general attributes of the hexagram and how they apply to one s own life Thus the superior man makes himself strong and untiring When any of the lines have the values six or nine they are moving lines for each there is an appended judgement which becomes significant Furthermore the moving lines are inherently unstable and change into their opposites a second hexagram and thus an additional judgement is formed Normally one consults the oracle by fixing the desired question firmly in mind and then casting a set of changes lines using yarrow stalks or tossed coins The resulting hexagram will be the answer to the question Using an algorithm suggested by S C Johnson the Unix oracle simply reads a question from the stan dard input up to an EOF and hashes the individual characters in combination with the time of day pro cess id and any other magic numbers which happen to be lying around the system The resulting value is used as the seed of a random number generator which drives a simulated coin toss divination The answer is then piped through nroff for formatting and will appear on the standard output For those who wish to remain steadfast in the old traditions the oracle will also accept the
55. 00000 stat fstat get file status 2 o a StAaliSICS Dd oie D whet a e E E status A A A status inquiries o oo 2 e stdio standard buffered input output Stime set time ci kk r a ee we eS stop until signal ee ee ee storage consistency check store delete firstkey nextkey data base strcat strncat strcmp strncmp strcpy SICA a ee et RA es Ay ae a ee SUCAM 36 52 3 tit rr en Dee rhe aE the Me Src ak Sone A A Ah 0 Seen N R 5 La es ee i So a A A NR stream STEAM R 0 R oes sec Soca e aes Se So ae oe eet SUC am ri a canal eee lee A hee ma od putc putchar SOCAN eos Gh Sak Lr ca gah Sh See a a R I SECA editor hose we a he BP Bek eg ws Y stream status inquiries 0004 String from a stream 2 000004 string onastream o string operations strncat stremp strncmp strip remove symbols and relocation bits strip filename affixes 2 2 2 ee eee strlen index rindex string operations struct structure Fortran programs stty set terminal options stty gtty control device su substitute user id temporarily subroutines setjmp 3 crypt 3 getpwent 3 setuid 2 sh 1 system 3 sh 1 login 1 pause 2 signal 2 alarm 2 kill 2 signal 2 pkopen 3 tc 1 sin 3 sinh 3 null 4 size 1 sleep 1 sleep 3 spline 1 qsort 3 tsort
56. 1 NAME split split a file into pieces SYNOPSIS split n file name DESCRIPTION Split reads file and writes it in n line pieces default 1000 as many as necessary onto a set of output files The name of the first output file is name with aa appended and so on lexicographically If no output name is given x is default If no input file is given or if is given in its stead then the standard input file is used 7th Edition 1 STRIP 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual STRIP 1 NAME strip remove symbols and relocation bits SYNOPSIS strip name DESCRIPTION Strip removes the symbol table and relocation bits ordinarily attached to the output of the assembler and loader This is useful to save space after a program has been debugged The effect of strip is the same as use of the s option of ld FILES tmp stm temporary file SEE ALSO ld 1 7th Edition 1 STRUCT 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual STRUCT 1 NAME struct structure Fortran programs SYNOPSIS struct option file DESCRIPTION Struct translates the Fortran program specified by file standard input default into a Ratfor program Wherever possible Ratfor control constructs replace the original Fortran Statement numbers appear only where still necessary Cosmetic changes are made including changing Hollerith strings into quoted strings and relational operators into symbols e g GT into gt The output is
57. 1 sort 1 comm 1 look 1 fork 2 alarm 2 spell 1 spline 1 split 1 frexp 3 printf 3 exp 3 rand 3 scanf 3 stdio 3 boot 8 stat 2 iostat 1 ps 1 stat 2 ferror 3 stdio 3 stime 2 pause 2 icheck 1 dbm 3 string 3 fclose 3 fopen 3 fseek 3 getc 3 gets 3 putc 3 puts 3 setbuf 3 ungetc 3 sed 1 ferror 3 gets 3 puts 3 string 3 strip 1 basename 1 string 3 struct 1 stty 1 ioctl 2 su 1 dbm 3 su du quot sync update the update periodically update the sync update sleep sleep strip remove MESSADES Pk a A ee aa a perror mtab mounted file system mkconf generate configuration tbl format tabs set terminal ty Ate tt ET Boe Ss cae Gay Oe ete ste sin COS sinh cosh dumpdir print the names of files on a dump tp manipulate tar tp DEC mag functions deroff remove nroff troff tk paginator for the lseek su substitute user id ttyname isatty ttyslot find name of a ttys tty general tty get stty set tabs set wait wait for process to kill exit quiz roff format ed troff nroff ttt cubic alarm schedule signal after specified at execute commands at a later stime set time ftime get date and profil execution gmtime asctime timezone convert date and times get proce
58. 157 o 167 w 177 del ASCII 7 EQNCHAR 7 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual eqnchar special character definitions for eqn SYNOPSIS eqn usr pub eqnchar files troff options neqn usr pub eqnchar files nroff options DESCRIPTION EQNCHAR 7 Eqgnchar contains troff and nroff character definitions for constructing characters that are not available on the Graphic Systems typesetter These definitions are primarily intended for use with eqn and neqn It contains definitions for the following characters ciplus citimes wig wig gt wig lt wig wig star bigstar dot orsign andsign del oppA oppE amp l IRAV R oll Kip gt lt I K angstrom A FILES usr pub eqnchar SEE ALSO troff 1 eqn 1 7th Edition langle rangle hbar ppd lt gt lt gt lt gt ang rang 3dot thf quarter 3quarter degree ais Pon rte teas Y square circle blot bullet prop empty member nomem cup cap incl subset supset Isubset supset O U n U nr 3 C AMHR HIER 7 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual HIER 7 hier file system hierarchy DESCRIPTION The following outline gives a quick tour through a representative directory hierarchy dev bin ib etc tmp usr 7th Edition root devices 4 console main console tty 4 tty terminals tty 4 cat phototypesetter cat 4 rp disks rp
59. 32 rather than 24 bit quantities Assembly language System entry points are no longer built in symbols Their values must be obtained from usr include sys s see intro 2 All system calls modify rO This means that sequences like mov file rO sys lseek 0 0 2 sys write buf n will no longer work In fact seek now modifies rl as well so be doubly cautious The sleep 2 entry point is gone see the more general facility alarm plus pause Few library functions have assembly language entry points any more You will have to simulate the C calling sequence Stty and gtty These system calls have been extensively altered see ioctl 2 and tty 4 Archive files The format of files produced by ar 1 has been altered To convert to the new style use arcv 1 C language lint The official syntax for initialization requires an equal sign before an initializer and brackets around compound initial values arrays and structures are now initialized honestly Two address operators such as and are now written and to avoid ambiguities although the old style is still accepted You will also certainly want to learn about long integers type definitions casts for type conversion unions for more honest storage sharing include lt filename gt which searches in standard places vil The program lint 1 checks for obsolete syntax and does strong type checking of C programs singly or in groups that are expected
60. An argument of 0 causes accounting to be turned off The accounting file format is given in acct 5 SEE ALSO acct 5 sa 1 DIAGNOSTICS On error 1 is returned The file must exist and the call may be exercised only by the super user It is erroneous to try to turn on accounting when it is already on BUGS No accounting is produced for programs running when a crash occurs In particular nonterminating pro grams are never accounted for ASSEMBLER acct 51 sys acct file 7th Edition 1 ALARM 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual ALARM 2 NAME alarm schedule signal after specified time SYNOPSIS alarm seconds unsigned seconds DESCRIPTION Alarm causes signal SIGALRM see signal 2 to be sent to the invoking process in a number of seconds given by the argument Unless caught or ignored the signal terminates the process Alarm requests are not stacked successive calls reset the alarm clock If the argument is 0 any alarm request is cancelled Because the clock has a 1 second resolution the signal may occur up to one second early because of scheduling delays resumption of execution of when the signal is caught may be delayed an arbitrary amount The longest specifiable delay time is 65535 seconds The return value is the amount of time previously remaining in the alarm clock SEE ALSO pause 2 signal 2 sleep 3 ASSEMBLER alarm 27 seconds in r0 sys alarm previous amount in r0 7th Edition 1 B
61. DESCRIPTION Make executes commands in makefile to update one or more target names Name is typically a program If no f option is present makefile and Makefile are tried in order If makefile is the standard input is taken More than one f option may appear Make updates a target if it depends on prerequisite files that have been modified since the target was last modified or if the target does not exist Makefile contains a sequence of entries that specify dependencies The first line of an entry is a blank separated list of targets then a colon then a list of prerequisite files Text following a semicolon and all following lines that begin with a tab are shell commands to be executed to update the target Sharp and newline surround comments The following makefile says that pgm depends on two files a o and b o and that they in turn depend on c files and a common file incl pgm a o b o cc a o b o Im o pgm a o incl a c cc c a c b o incl b c cc c b c Makefile entries of the form stringl string2 are macro definitions Subsequent appearances of string1 are replaced by string2 If stringl is a sin gle character the parentheses are optional Make infers prerequisites for files for which makefile gives no construction commands For example a file may be inferred as prerequisite for a o file and be compiled to produce the o file T
62. Getpass reads a password from the file dev tty or if that cannot be opened from the standard input after prompting with the null terminated string prompt and disabling echoing A pointer is returned to a null terminated string of at most 8 characters FILES dev tty SEE ALSO crypt 3 BUGS The return value points to static data whose content is overwritten by each call 7th Edition 1 GETPW 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual GETPW 3 NAME getpw get name from UID SYNOPSIS getpw uid buf char buf DESCRIPTION Getpw searches the password file for the numerical uid and fills in buf with the corresponding line it returns non zero if uid could not be found The line is null terminated FILES etc passwd SEE ALSO getpwent 3 passwd 5 DIAGNOSTICS Non zero return on error 7th Edition deprecated 1 GETPWENT 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual GETPWENT 3 NAME getpwent getpwuid getpwnam setpwent endpwent get password file entry SYNOPSIS include lt pwd h gt struct passwd getpwent struct passwd getpwuid uid int uid struct passwd getpwnam name char name int setpwent int endpwent DESCRIPTION FILES Getpwent getpwuid and getpwnam each return a pointer to an object with the following structure con taining the broken out fields of a line in the password file struct passwd see getpwent 3 char pw_name char pw_passwd int pw_uid int pw_gid int pw_quot
63. Manual SH 1 current value of the mask is printed wait n Wait for the specified process and report its termination status If n is not given then all currently active child processes are waited for The return code from this command is that of the process waited for Invocation If the first character of argument zero is commands are read from HOME profile if such a file exists Commands are then read as described below The following flags are interpreted by the shell when it is invoked C string If the c flag is present then commands are read from string s If the s flag is present or if no arguments remain then commands are read from the stan dard input Shell output is written to file descriptor 2 i If the i flag is present or if the shell input and output are attached to a terminal as told by gtty then this shell is interactive In this case the terminate signal SIGTERM see sig nal 2 is ignored so that kill 0 does not kill an interactive shell and the interrupt signal SIGINT is caught and ignored so that wait is interruptable In all cases SIGQUIT is ignored by the shell The remaining flags and arguments are described under the set command HOME profile tmp sh dev null SEE ALSO test 1 exec 2 DIAGNOSTICS BUGS Errors detected by the shell such as syntax errors cause the shell to return a non zero exit status If the shell is being used non interactively then execut
64. SYNOPSIS xsend person xget enroll DESCRIPTION These commands implement a secure communication channel it is like mail 1 but no one can read the messages except the intended recipient The method embodies a public key cryptosystem using knap sacks To receive messages use enroll it asks you for a password that you must subsequently quote in order to receive secret mail To receive secret mail use xget It asks for your password then gives you the messages To send secret mail use xsend in the same manner as the ordinary mail command However it will accept only one target A message announcing the receipt of secret mail is also sent by ordinary mail FILES lasr spool secretmail key keys usr spool secretmail 0 9 messages SEE ALSO mail 1 BUGS It should be integrated with ordinary mail The announcement of secret mail makes traffic analysis pos sible 7th Edition 1 YACC 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual YACC 1 NAME yacc yet another compiler compiler SYNOPSIS yace vd grammar DESCRIPTION Yacc converts a context free grammar into a set of tables for a simple automaton which executes an LR 1 parsing algorithm The grammar may be ambiguous specified precedence rules are used to break ambiguities The output file y tab c must be compiled by the C compiler to produce a program yyparse This pro gram must be loaded with the lexical analyzer program yylex as well as main and yyerror an
65. a X Ge Pe ee Fare eee a packet driver simulator 20 packet protocol 2 2 ee ee paginator for the Tektronix 4014 passwd change login password passwd password file password password password file a we ae ORS password file entry getpwent Pattern ws ose dn ge OA cay R er r tan SE pattern scanning and processing language pause stop until signal 2 2 ee a pec C compiler pclose initiate I O to from a process permit or deny messages permuted index perror sys errlist sys nerr system error phone interface w S E r a ee ee phototypesetter interface o o photypesetter simulator o phys allow a process to access physical pipe create an interprocess channel Pipe ANS ea rana a A a ee 5 pk packet driver 2 o e pkclose pkread pkwrite pkfail packet pkoff establish packet protocol pkopen pkclose pkread pkwrite pkfail plot graphics filters plot graphics interface o o plot openpl et al graphics interface Plotter ue rca ir a saw ee pomier eramo o Phe aa popen pclose initiate I O to from a O Ase oh U8 aed go tes th al ats or SES pow gcd rpow multiple precision integer pow sqrt exponential logarithm power o ppt
66. a b with a and b in ascending ASCII order stands for the inclusive range of ASCII characters 5 A regular expression of form 1 4 followed by matches a sequence of 0 or more matches of the regular expression A regular expression x of form 1 8 bracketed x V matches what x matches A followed by a digit n matches a copy of the string that the bracketed regular expression beginning with the nth matched 8 A regular expression of form 1 8 x followed by a regular expression of form 1 7 y matches a match for x followed by a match for y with the x match being as long as possible while still permitting a y match 9 A regular expression of form 1 8 preceded by or followed by is constrained to matches that begin at the left or end at the right end of a line 10 A regular expression of form 1 9 picks out the longest among the leftmost matches in a line 11 An empty regular expression stands for a copy of the last regular expression encountered 7th Edition 1 ED 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual ED 1 Regular expressions are used in addresses to specify lines and in one command see s below to specify a portion of a line which is to be replaced If it is desired to use one of the regular expression meta characters as an ordinary character that character may be preceded by V This also applies to the char acter bounding the regular expression often and to itself To understand addressing in ed it i
67. also accepted root dev minor The specified block device e g hp is used for the root minor is a decimal number giving the minor device This line must appear exactly once swap dev minor The specified block device is used for swapping If not given the root is used pipe dev minor The specified block device is used to store pipes If not given the root is used swplo number nswap number Sets the origin block number and size of the area used for swapping By default the not very useful numbers 4000 and 872 pack Include the packet driver By default 1t is left out mpx Include the multiplexor driver By default it is left out l s c c output files 7th Edition 1 MKCONF 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual MKCONF 1M SEE ALSO Setting up Unix in Volume 2 BUGS The set of devices it knows about the set of drivers included and the set of devices on the machine are mutually incomparable Some handwork is certain to be necessary Because of floating vectors that may have been missed It is mandatory to check the s file to make sure it corresponds with reality 7th Edition 2 MKDIR 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual MKDIR 1 NAME mkdir make a directory SYNOPSIS mkdir dirname DESCRIPTION Mkdir creates specified directories in mode 777 Standard entries for the directory itself and for its parent are made automatically Mkdir requires write permission in the parent directory SEE ALSO r
68. are too small 7th Edition 1 TTYS 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual TTYS 5 NAME ttys terminal initialization data DESCRIPTION The ttys file is read by the init program and specifies which terminal special files are to have a process created for them which will allow people to log in It contains one line per special file gt The first character of a line is either 0 or 1 the former causes the line to be ignored the latter causes it to be effective The second character is used as an argument to gefty 8 which performs such tasks as baud rate recognition reading the login name and calling login For normal lines the character is 0 other characters can be used for example with hard wired terminals where speed recognition is unnecessary or which have special characteristics Getty will have to be fixed in such cases The remainder of the line is the terminal s entry in the device directory dev FILES etc ttys SEE ALSO init 8 getty 8 login 1 7th Edition 1 TYPES 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual TYPES 5 NAME types primitive system data types SYNOPSIS include lt sys types h gt DESCRIPTION The data types defined in the include file are used in UNIX system code some data of these types are accessible to user code typedef struct int r 1 y physadr typedef long daddr t typedef char caddr t typedef unsigned short ino t typedef char cnt t typedef long time t typ
69. be looked up in the system s name list using adb 1 and its command to get a reverse calling order In most cases this procedure will give an idea of what is wrong A more complete discussion of system debugging is impossible here SEE ALSO clri 1 icheck 1 dcheck 1 boot 8 7th Edition 3 CRON 8 UNIX Programmer s Manual CRON 8 NAME cron clock daemon SYNOPSIS etc cron DESCRIPTION Cron executes commands at specified dates and times according to the instructions in the file asr lib crontab Since cron never exits it should only be executed once This is best done by running cron from the initialization process through the file etc rc see init 8 Crontab consists of lines of six fields each The fields are separated by spaces or tabs The first five are integer patterns to specify the minute 0 59 hour 0 23 day of the month 1 31 month of the year 1 12 and day of the week 1 7 with 1 monday Each of these patterns may contain a number in the range above two numbers separated by a minus meaning a range inclusive a list of numbers separated by commas meaning any of the numbers or an asterisk meaning all legal values The sixth field is a string that is executed by the Shell at the specified times A percent character in this field is translated to a new line character Only the first line up to a or end of line of the command field is executed by the Shell The other lines are made available to th
70. be on hand A latest version appears on the standard output shift cat echo 1 p ed 1 Except in rare circumstances diff finds a smallest sufficient set of file differences Option h does a fast half hearted job It works only when changed stretches are short and well separated but does work on files of unlimited length Options e and f are unavailable with h FILES tmp d usr lib diffh for h SEE ALSO cmp 1 comm 1 ed 1 DIAGNOSTICS Exit status is O for no differences 1 for some 2 for trouble BUGS Editing scripts produced under the e or f option are naive about creating lines consisting of a single 7th Edition 1 DIFP3 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual DIFP3 1 NAME diff3 3 way differential file comparison SYNOPSIS diff3 ex3 filel file2 file3 DESCRIPTION Diff3 compares three versions of a file and publishes disagreeing ranges of text flagged with these codes all three files differ filel is different file2 is different file3 is different The type of change suffered in converting a given range of a given file to some other is indicated in one of these ways f nla Text is to be appended after line number n in file f where f 1 2 or 3 finl n2e Text is to be changed in the range line n to line n2 If nl n2 the range may be abbreviated to n The original contents of the range follows immediately after a e indication
71. be used to halt an editor printout without losing the file being edited The quit signal is generated by typing the ASCII FS character FS appears many places on different ter minals most commonly as control or control It not only causes a running program to terminate but also generates a file with the core image of the terminated process Quit is useful for debugging Besides adapting to the speed of the terminal UNIX tries to be intelligent about whether you have a ter minal with the newline function or whether it must be simulated with carriage return and line feed In the latter case all input carriage returns are turned to newline characters the standard line delimiter and both a carriage return and a line feed are echoed to the terminal If you get into the wrong mode the stty 1 command will rescue you Tab characters are used freely in UNIX source programs If your terminal does not have the tab function you can arrange to have them turned into spaces during output and echoed as spaces during input The system assumes that tabs are set every eight columns Again the stty 1 command will set or reset this mode Also the command tabs 1 will set the tab stops automatically on many terminals How to run a program the Shell When you have successfully logged in a program called the Shell is listening to your terminal The Shell reads typed in lines splits them up into a command name and arguments and executes the command
72. capable replacement for the debugger db The first time user should be especially careful about distinguishing and in adb commands and watching to make sure that the x whose value he asked for is the real x and not just some absolute location equal to the stack offset of some automatic x You can always use the true name x to pin down a C external variable Dsw This little known but indispensable facility has been taken over by rm ri Boot procedures Needless to say these are all different See section 8 of this volume and Setting up UNIX in Volume 2 PERMUTED INDEX fabs floor ceil phys allow a process to access determine ac login sa accton system acct execution acct turn sa sin cos tan asin dn DN 11 phys allow a process to access physical basename strip filename plot openpl et brk sbrk break change core malloc free realloc calloc main memory lex generator of lexical bed ppt convert to be tp manipulate tape ar ar tar tape arcv convert echo echo expr evaluate pow gcd rpow multiple precision integer be arbitrary precision asctime timezone convert date and time to atof atoi atol convert ASC da He a ctime localtime gmtime functions e rl oes ob whee ee Ga ss i e e sin cos tan as a out setbuf sin cos tan asin acos la
73. case no signal can be sent the remainder of the line is treated as arguments to the subprocess The current subprocess if any is terminated Adb provides a number of variables Named variables are set initially by adb but are not used subse quently Numbered variables are reserved for communication as follows 0 The last value printed 1 The last offset part of an instruction source 2 The previous value of variable 1 On entry the following are set from the system header in the corfil If corfil does not appear to be a core file then these values are set from objfil 7th Edition The base address of the data segment The data segment size The entry point The magic number 0405 0407 0410 or 0411 The stack segment size The text segment size ADB 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual ADB 1 ADDRESSES FILES The address in a file associated with a written address is determined by a mapping associated with that file Each mapping is represented by two triples b el fl and b2 e2 f2 and the file address corresponding to a written address is calculated as follows bl lt address lt el gt file address address f1 b1 otherwise b2 lt address lt e2 gt file address address f2 b2 otherwise the requested address is not legal In some cases e g for programs with separated I and D space the two segments for a file may overlap If a or is followed by an then only the second tri ple is used The
74. catch or ignore pkread pkwrite pkfail packet driver tc photypesetter trigonometric functions o null data spline interpolate qsort quicker tsort topological comm select or reject lines common to two look find lines in a fork alarm schedule signal after frexp ldexp modf printf fprintf TOOL a o Bote 9 exp log log10 pow rand scanf fscanf stdio boot iostat report I O ps process stat fstat get file feof ferror clearerr fileno stream Package ar R AE e AN td de ed pause icheck file system subroutines dbminit fetch strncpy strlen index rindex String fclose fflush close or flush a fopen freopen fdopen open a fseek ftell rewind reposition a fgetc getw get character or word from gets fgets get a string from a fputc putw put character or word on a puts fputs put a string on a setbuf assign buffering to a ungetc push character back into input sed feof ferror clearerr fileno gets fgets get a puts fputs put a strcpy strncpy strlen index index basename strncat stremp strncmp strepy strncpy ioctl store delete firstkey nextkey data base XXI setjmp longjmp non local goto setkey encrypt DES encryption setpwent endpwent get password file entry
75. convert to antique media o o o oa aa nm 1 clri 1 nice 1 setjmp 3 troff 1 tb1 1 deroff 1 null 4 arithmetic 6 factor 1 rand 3 atof 3 intro 2 ncheck 1 size 1 lorder 1 od 1 open 2 fopen 3 dup 2 open 2 plot 3 string 3 join 1 stty 1 lorder 1 a out 5 fread 3 ecvt 3 printf 3 stdio 3 chown 2 chown 1 quot 1 pk 4 pkopen 3 pkon 2 tk 1 passwd 1 passwd 5 getpass 3 passwd 1 passwd 5 getpwent 3 grep 1 awk 1 pause 2 cc 1 popen 3 mesg 1 ptx 1 perror 3 du 4 cat 4 tc 1 phys 2 pipe 2 tee 1 pk 4 pkopen 3 pkon 2 pkopen 3 plot 1 plot 5 plot 3 vp 4 lseek 2 popen 3 banner 6 mp 3 exp 3 bed 6 bc arbitrary mdiv min mout pow gcd rpow multiple monitor lock lock a process in primes factor a number generate large types cat catenate and date cal pr nm man pstat dumpdir vp Versatec O hee a Ped Ra ee aces nice nohup run a command at low nice set program boot startup exit terminate fork spawn new kill send signal to a popen pclose initiate I O to from a wait await completion of init rc getpid get lock lock a ps times get phys allow a wait wait for ptrace kill terminate a awk pattern scanning and m macro monitor prepare execution profil execution time prof dis
76. crypt setkey encrypt DES encryption SYNOPSIS char crypt Key salt char key salt setkey key char key encrypt block edflag char block DESCRIPTION Crypt is the password encryption routine It is based on the NBS Data Encryption Standard with varia tions intended among other things to frustrate use of hardware implementations of the DES for key search The first argument to crypt is a user s typed password The second is a 2 character string chosen from the set a zA Z0 9 The salt string is used to perturb the DES algorithm in one of 4096 different ways after which the password is used as the key to encrypt repeatedly a constant string The returned value points to the encrypted password in the same alphabet as the salt The first two characters are the salt itself The other entries provide rather primitive access to the actual DES algorithm The argument of setkey is a character array of length 64 containing only the characters with numerical value O and 1 If this string is divided into groups of 8 the low order bit in each group is ignored leading to a 56 bit key which is set into the machine The argument to the encrypt entry is likewise a character array of length 64 containing 0 s and 1 s The argument array is modified in place to a similar array representing the bits of the argument after having been subjected to the DES algorithm using the key set by setkey If edflag is 0 the argument is enc
77. done if n 1 and is not done if n 0 Ignore input lines through a line beginning with lt Indent n spaces from left margin Same as in but without break Literal treat next n lines as text n 65 Line length including indent is n characters n Line spacing set to n lines per output line n 2 Put n blank lines between the top of page and head title n 2 n blank lines put between head title and beginning of text on page n n blank lines put between end of text and foot title n 3 n blank lines put between the foot title and the bottom of page no Stop adjusting the right margin Begin new page if n output lines cannot fit on present page The next n output lines are not numbered no Add 5 to page offset number lines in margin from 1 on each page no Add 5 to page offset number lines from n stop 1f n 0 n 0 Line numbers are indented n no Stop filling output lines Switch input to file t Odd foot title becomes t t Odd head title becomes t n Same as bp n 66 Total paper length taken to be n lines n 0 Page offset All lines are preceded by n spaces arabic Roman page numbers Produce n blank pages starting next page Insert block of n blank lines except at top of page yes Single space output lines equivalent to ls 1 Pseudotab settings Initial tab settings are columns 9 17 25 space Tab replacement character becomes c Temporarily indent next ou
78. file that actually refers to an I O device The names in this section refer to the DEC device names for the hardware instead of the names of the special files themselves The file formats and conventions section 5 documents the structure of particular kinds of files for exam ple the form of the output of the loader and assembler is given Excluded are files used by only one command for example the assembler s intermediate files Games have been relegated to section 6 to keep them from contaminating the more staid information of section 1 Section 7 is a miscellaneous collection of information necessary to writing in various specialized languages character codes macro packages for typesetting etc The maintenance section 8 discusses procedures not intended for use by the ordinary user These pro cedures often involve use of commands of section 1 where an attempt has been made to single out UNIX is a Trademark of Bell Laboratories 111 peculiarly maintenance flavored commands by marking them 1M Each section consists of a number of independent entries of a page or so each The name of the entry is in the upper corners of its pages together with the section number and sometimes a letter characteristic of a subcategory e g graphics is 1G and the math library is 3M Entries within each section are alpha betized The page numbers of each entry start at 1 it is infeasible to number consecutively the pages of a document li
79. given by the following four bytes label Place the following ASCH string so that its first character falls on the current point The string is terminated by a newline arc The first four bytes give the center the next four give the starting point and the last four give the end point of a circular arc The least significant coordinate of the end point is used only to determine the quadrant The arc is drawn counter clockwise circle The first four bytes give the center of the circle the next two the radius erase Start another frame of output linemod Take the following string up to a newline as the style for drawing further lines The styles are dotted solid longdashed shortdashed and dotdashed Effective only in plot 4014 and plot ver space The next four bytes give the lower left corner of the plotting area the following four give the upper right corner The plot will be magnified or reduced to fit the device as closely as possible Space settings that exactly fill the plotting area with unity scaling appear below for devices sup ported by the filters of plot 1 The upper limit is just outside the plotting area In every case the plotting area is taken to be square points outside may be displayable on devices whose face isn t square 4014 space 0 0 3120 3120 ver space 0 0 2048 2048 300 300s space 0 0 4096 4096 450 space 0 0 4096 4096 plot 1 plot 3 graph 1 7t
80. hp 4 rrp raw disks rp hp 4 utility programs cf usr bin 1 as assembler first pass cf usr lib as2 CC C compiler executive cf usr lib c 012 object libraries and other stuff cf usr lib libc a system calls standard I O etc 2 3 3S libm a math routines 3M libplot a plotting routines plot 3 libF77 a Fortran runtime support libI77 a Fortran I O as2 second pass of as 1 c 012 passes of cc 1 essential data and dangerous maintenance utilities passwd password file passwd 5 group group file group 5 motd message of the day login 1 mtab mounted file table mtab 5 ddate dump history dump 1 ttys properties of terminals ttys 5 getty part of login getty 8 init the father of all processes init 8 rc shell program to bring the system up cron the clock daemon cron 8 mount mount 1 wall wall 1 temporary files usually on a fast device cf usr tmp e used by ed 1 ctm used by cc 1 general pupose directory usually a mounted file system adm administrative information wtmp login history utmp 5 messages hardware error messages tracct phototypesetter accounting troff 1 HIER 7 usr usr 7th Edition bin vpacct UNIX Programmer s Manual HIER 7 line printer accounting Ipr 1 utility programs to keep bin small temporaries to keep tmp small tmp dict games stm raster used by sort 1 used by plot 1 word lists etc words spe
81. in rotation Systems distributed for these devices use disk O for the root disk 1 for swapping and disk 4 RP04 5 or disk 7 RPO6 for a mounted user file system The block files access the disk via the system s normal buffering mechanism and may be read and writ ten without regard to physical disk records A raw interface provides for direct transmission between the disk and the user s read or write buffer A single read or write call results in exactly one I O operation and therefore raw I O is considerably more efficient when many words are transmitted The names of the raw files conventionally begin with an extra r In raw I O the buffer must begin on a word boundary and raw I O to an interleaved device is likely to have disappointing results FILES dev rp dev rrp SEE ALSO rp 4 BUGS In raw I O read and write 2 truncate file offsets to 512 byte block boundaries and write scribbles on the tail of incomplete blocks Thus in programs that are likely to access raw devices read write and Iseek 2 should always deal in 512 byte multiples Raw device drivers don t work on interleaved devices 7th Edition 1 HS 4 UNIX Programmers Manual HS 4 NAME hs RH11 RS03 RS04 fixed head disk file DESCRIPTION The files AsO hs7 refer to RJSO3 disk drives O through 7 The files hs8 hs15 refer to RJSO4 disk drives O through 7 The RJSO3 drives are each 1024 blocks long and the RJS04 drives are 2048 blo
82. libc a crt C runtime support Idiv s division into a long Imul s multiplication to produce long csu startup and wrapup routines needed with every C program crt0 s regular startup mert0 s modified startup for cc p sys system calls 2 access s alarm s stdio standard I O functions 3S fgets c fopen c gen other functions in 3 abs c atof c compall shell procedure to compile libc mklib shell procedure to make lib libc a libI77 source for lib libI77 libF77 games source for usr games SEE ALSO Is 1 ncheck 1 find 1 grep 1 BUGS The position of files is subject to change without notice 7th Edition 4 MAN 7 UNIX Programmer s Manual MAN 7 NAME man macros to typeset manual SYNOPSIS nroff man file troff man file DESCRIPTION These macros are used to lay out pages of this manual A skeleton page may be found in the file asr man man0 xx Any text argument t may be zero to six words Quotes may be used to include blanks in a word If text is empty the special treatment is applied to the next input line with text to be printed In this way I may be used to italicize a whole line or SM followed by B to make small bold letters A prevailing indent distance is remembered between successive indented paragraphs and is reset to default value upon reaching a non indented paragraph Default units for indents i are ens Type font and size are reset to default values before each para
83. line in that it terminates a line is echoed and is passed to the program The stop and start characters may be the same to produce a toggle effect It is probably counterproductive to make other special characters including erase an kill identical The calls are TIOCSETC Change the various special characters to those given in the structure TIOCSETP Set the special characters to those given in the structure FILES dev tty dev tty dev console SEE ALSO getty 8 stty 1 signal 2 ioctl 2 BUGS Half duplex terminals are not supported The terminal handler has clearly entered the race for ever greater complexity and generality It s still not complex and general enough for TENEX fans 7th Edition 5 VP 4 UNIX Programmer s Manual VP 4 NAME vp Versatec printer plotter DESCRIPTION Vp0 is the interface to a Versatec D1200A printer plotter with a Versatec C PDP11 DMA controller Ordinarily bytes written on it are interpreted as ASCII characters and printed As a printer it writes 64 lines of 132 characters each on 11 by 8 5 inch paper Only some of the ASCII control characters are interpreted NL performs the usual new line function i e spaces up the paper and resets to the left margin It is ignored however following a CR which ends a non empty line CR is ignored if the current line is empty but is otherwise like NL FF resets to the left margin and then to the top of the next page
84. map of ASCII tr translate dcheck file system directory consistency icheck file system storage consistency eqn neqn chess the game of chown other cookies isprint iscntrl isascii character clri feof ferror 1X lt bessel functions 020000007 binary input output 2 ee ee bj the game of black jack Block A gene o eB Avie eh Fees De Bet hal rado blocks ima files 274 6 484 foes Pe Oe ee eS book of changes and other cookies boot startup procedures break change core allocation break continue cd eval exec exit brk sbrk break change core allocation buffered binary input output o buffered input output package buffering to a Stream build special file A E Ka a Be K A SO es byte integers and long integers PYES a See Pa ee bie oe Rw ee g EE c T as aks Pa eee ap Rs owt oar E ae oye Sree C program beautifier 2 o o C program verifier 2 o e e cabs euclidean distance o cal print calendar 2 000 Calculator ici e a Stee NER Sh d calendar tia Meare it 2 O calendar reminder service Call co gh Aad he Bk De eG a eG A Ae 2S CallUNIX Sa taal A aha Get A Boa ie tied calloc main memory allocator calls and error numbers 0 case i
85. mode SEE ALSO ls 1 chmod 2 chown 1 stat 2 umask 2 7th Edition 1 CHOWN 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual CHOWN 1 NAME chown chgrp change owner or group SYNOPSIS chown owner file chgrp group file DESCRIPTION Chown changes the owner of the files to owner The owner may be either a decimal UID or a login name found in the password file Chgrp changes the group ID of the files to group The group may be either a decimal GID or a group name found in the group ID file Only the super user can change owner or group in order to simplify as yet unimplemented accounting procedures FILES etc passwd etc group SEE ALSO chown 2 passwd 5 group 5 7th Edition 1 CLRI 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual CLRI 1M NAME clri clear i node SYNOPSIS clri filesystem i number DESCRIPTION Clri writes zeros on the i nodes with the decimal i numbers on the filesystem After clri any blocks in the affected file will show up as missing in an icheck 1 of the filesystem Read and write permission is required on the specified file system device The i node becomes allocat able The primary purpose of this routine is to remove a file which for some reason appears in no directory If it is used to zap an i node which does appear in a directory care should be taken to track down the entry and remove it Otherwise when the i node is reallocated to some new file the old entry will still point
86. name list consists of an array of structures containing names types and values The list is ter minated with a null name Each name is looked up in the name list of the file If the name is found the type and value of the name are inserted in the next two fields If the name is not found both entries are set to 0 See a out 5 for the structure declaration This subroutine is useful for examining the system name list kept in the file unix In this way pro grams can obtain system addresses that are up to date SEE ALSO a out 5 DIAGNOSTICS All type entries are set to O if the file cannot be found or if it is not a valid namelist 7th Edition 1 PERROR 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual PERROR 3 NAME perror sys_errlist sys_nerr system error messages SYNOPSIS perror s char s int sys_nerr char sys_errlist DESCRIPTION Perror produces a short error message on the standard error file describing the last error encountered during a call to the system from a C program First the argument string s is printed then a colon then the message and a new line Most usefully the argument string is the name of the program which incurred the error The error number is taken from the external variable errno see intro 2 which is set when errors occur but not cleared when non erroneous calls are made To simplify variant formatting of messages the vector of message strings sys_errlist is provided errno can be used as an index i
87. of characters to be printed from a string the character specifying that a following d o x or u corresponds to a long integer arg A capitalized conversion code accomplishes the same thing a Character which indicates the type of conversion to be applied A field width or precision may be instead of a digit string In this case an integer arg supplies the field width or precision The conversion characters and their meanings are dox The integer arg is converted to decimal octal or hexadecimal notation respectively f The float or double arg is converted to decimal notation in the style ddd ddd where the number of d s after the decimal point is equal to the precision specification for the argument If the precision is missing 6 digits are given if the precision is explicitly 0 no digits and no decimal point are printed e The float or double arg is converted in the style d dddetdd where there is one digit before the decimal point and the number after is equal to the precision specification for the argument when the precision is missing 6 digits are produced g The float or double arg is printed in style d in style f or in style e whichever gives full preci sion in minimum space 7th Edition 1 PRINTF 35 UNIX Programmer s Manual PRINTF 35 c The character arg is printed Null characters are ignored s Arg is taken to be a string character pointer and characters from the string
88. of file system filter reverse line feeds rru r an a unora neta a a e a filters find find files find and insert literature references in NAMES is Soe ews A ee he find lines in a sorted list 2 2 ee eee ee find name of a terminal find ordering relation for an object library find spelling errors 2 1 ee ee ee ee firstkey nextkey data base subroutines fixed head disk file o KR A T N fixed head disk file o flblk ino format of file system volume floor ceil absolute value floor ceiling flush ta streami a as on tg fopen freopen fdopen open a stream fork spawn new process o e e A hie Ste ge Se PR oe A we Aes N dd 1 exec 2 group 5 hs 4 link 2 mknod 1 mknod 2 passwd 5 pr 1 read 2 rev 1 rf 4 size 1 sum 1 tail 1 touch 1 uniq 1 write 2 file 1 diff 1 diff3 1 umask 2 dup 2 getgrent 3 getpwent 3 grep 1 ar 5 split 1 mktemp 3 stat 2 mkfs 1 mount 1 mount 2 dcheck 1 dump 1 hier 7 quot 1 restor 1 icheck 1 mtab 5 filsys 5 utime 2 file 1 basename 1 ferror 3 cmp 1 comm 1 find 1 rm 1 sort 1 mv 1 dumpdir 1 filsys 5 col 1 plot 1 find 1 refer 1 find 1 look 1 ttyname 3 lorder 1 spell 1 dbm 3 hs 4 rf 4 filsys 5 floor 3 fclose 3 fopen 3 fork 2 ar 5 arcv 1 dump ddate incremental dump core
89. of the first followed by a match of the second 7th Edition 1 GREP 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual GREP 1 Two regular expressions separated by or newline match either a match for the first or a match for the second A regular expression enclosed in parentheses matches a match for the regular expression The order of precedence of operators at the same parenthesis level is then then concatenation then and newline SEE ALSO ed 1 sed 1 sh 1 DIAGNOSTICS Exit status is O if any matches are found 1 if none 2 for syntax errors or inaccessible files BUGS Ideally there should be only one grep but we don t know a single algorithm that spans a wide enough range of space time tradeoffs Lines are limited to 256 characters longer lines are truncated 7th Edition 2 ICHECK 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual ICHECK 1M NAME icheck file system storage consistency check SYNOPSIS icheck s b numbers filesystem DESCRIPTION Icheck examines a file system builds a bit map of used blocks and compares this bit map against the free list maintained on the file system If the file system is not specified a set of default file systems is checked The normal output of icheck includes a report of The total number of files and the numbers of regular directory block special and character spe cial files The total number of blocks in use and the numbers of single double and triple indirect
90. of the game move Let the program select a move for you print Print a map of the present position 7th Edition CHESS 6 UNIX Programmer s Manual CHESS 6 NAME chess the game of chess SYNOPSIS usr games chess DESCRIPTION Chess is a computer program that plays class D chess Moves may be given either in standard descrip tive notation or in algebraic notation The symbol is used to specify check o o and o o o specify castling To play black type first to print the board type an empty line Each move is echoed in the appropriate notation followed by the program s reply FILES asr lib book opening book DIAGNOSTICS The most cryptic diagnostic is eh which means that the input was syntactically incorrect WARNING Over use of this program will cause it to go away BUGS Pawns may be promoted only to queens 7th Edition 1 CHING 6 UNIX Programmer s Manual CHING 6 NAME ching fortune the book of changes and other cookies SYNOPSIS usr games ching hexagram usr games fortune DESCRIPTION The I Ching or Book of Changes is an ancient Chinese oracle that has been in use for centuries as a source of wisdom and advice The text of the oracle as it is sometimes known consists of sixty four hexagrams each symbolized by a particular arrangement of six straight and broken lines These lines have values ranging from six through nine
91. of the system ASSEMBLER phys 52 sys phys segreg size physadr 7th Edition PDP11 1 PIPE 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual PIPE 2 NAME pipe create an interprocess channel SYNOPSIS pipe fildes int fildes 2 DESCRIPTION The pipe system call creates an I O mechanism called a pipe The file descriptors returned can be used in read and write operations When the pipe is written using the descriptor fildes 1 up to 4096 bytes of data are buffered before the writing process is suspended A read using the descriptor fildes 0 will pick up the data Writes with a count of 4096 bytes or less are atomic no other process can intersperse data It is assumed that after the pipe has been set up two or more cooperating processes created by subse quent fork calls will pass data through the pipe with read and write calls The Shell has a syntax to set up a linear array of processes connected by pipes Read calls on an empty pipe no buffered data with only one end all write file descriptors closed returns an end of file SEE ALSO sh 1 read 2 write 2 fork 2 DIAGNOSTICS The function value zero is returned if the pipe was created 1 if too many files are already open A signal is generated if a write on a pipe with only one end is attempted BUGS Should more than 4096 bytes be necessary in any pipe among a loop of processes deadlock will occur ASSEMBLER pipe 42 sys pipe read file descriptor in r0
92. on a standard list Bstring Find substitute compiler passes in the files named string with the suffixes cpp c0 cl and c2 If string is empty use a standard backup version t p012 Find only the designated compiler passes in the files whose names are constructed by a B option In the absence of a B option the string is taken to be usr c 7th Edition PDP11 1 CC 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual CC 1 Other arguments are taken to be either loader option arguments or C compatible object programs typi cally produced by an earlier cc run or perhaps libraries of C compatible routines These programs together with the results of any compilations specified are loaded in the order given to produce an executable program with name a out The major purpose of the portable C compiler pcc is to serve as a model on which to base other com pilers Pcc does not support options f E B and t It provides in addition to the language of cc unsigned char type data and initialized bit fields FILES file c input file file o object file a out loaded output tmp ctm temporaries for cc lib cpp preprocessor Mib c 01 compiler for cc lasr c oc 012 backup compiler for cc usr c ocpp backup preprocessor lib fc 01 floating point compiler lib c2 optional optimizer lib crt0 o runtime startoff lib mert0 o startoff for profiling lib fcrt0 o startoff for floating point interpretation lib libc a standard lib
93. one per line it will give a more detailed descrip tion if you want This program is based on one described in People s Computer Company 2 2 November 1973 BUGS It will never replace Space War 7th Edition 1 ASCII 7 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual ascii map of ASCII character set SYNOPSIS cat usr pub ascii DESCRIPTION Ascii is a map of the ASCII character set to be printed as needed It contains 000 nul 001 010 bs 1011 020 dle 021 030 can 031 040 sp 1041 050 1051 060 0 061 070 8 1071 100 E 101 110 H 111 120 P 121 130 X 131 140 141 150 h 151 160 p 161 170 x 1171 FILES usr pub ascii 7th Edition soh ht dc1 em 1 9 A I Q Y a i q y 002 012 022 032 042 052 062 072 102 112 122 132 142 152 162 172 stx nl dc2 sub kY 2 Nac SNDE 003 013 023 033 043 053 063 073 103 113 123 133 143 153 163 173 etx vt dc3 esc wt ma G a LH N 004 eot 014 np 024 dc4 034 fs 044 054 064 074 104 114 124 134 144 154 164 174 r PE n B Kd a O A 005 015 025 035 045 055 065 075 105 115 125 135 145 155 165 175 enq cr nak we Bot S NN nl xe 006 016 026 036 046 056 066 076 106 116 126 136 146 156 166 176 ack so syn gt lt Z MN E Dom 007 bel 017 si 027 etb 037 us 047 057 067 7 077 107 G 117 O 127 W 137 147 g
94. passed as argument O see exec 2 The value of a simple command is its exit status if it terminates normally or 200 status if it terminates abnormally see signal 2 for a list of status values A pipeline is a sequence of one or more commands separated by The standard output of each com mand but the last is connected by a pipe 2 to the standard input of the next command Each command is run as a separate process the shell waits for the last command to terminate A list is a sequence of one or more pipelines separated by 8 amp amp or and optionally terminated by or and amp have equal precedence which is lower than that of amp amp and amp amp and II also have equal precedence A semicolon causes sequential execution an ampersand causes the preceding pipeline to be executed without waiting for it to finish The symbol amp amp lI causes the list following to be exe cuted only if the preceding pipeline returns a zero non zero value Newlines may appear in a list instead of semicolons to delimit commands A command is either a simple command or one of the following The value returned by a command is that of the last simple command executed in the command for name in word do list done Each time a for command is executed name is set to the next word in the for word list If in word is omitted then in is assumed Execution ends when there are no more words in the list case word in patte
95. primary bootstrap must reside in the otherwise unused block zero of the boot device It can be read in and started by the standard ROM programs or if necessary by keying in a small startup routine This program is capable of loading type 407 executable files not shared not separate I amp D The user types on the system console the name of the program wished in this case boot followed by a carriage return the named program is retrieved from the file system that starts at block O of drive O of the boot device No prompt is given no diagnostic results if the file cannot be found and no provision is made for correcting typographical errors The second step called boot actually brings in the system When read into location 0 and executed boot sets up memory management relocates itself into high memory and types a on the console Then it reads from the console a device specification see below followed immediately by a pathname Boot finds the corresponding file on the given device loads that file into memory location zero sets up memory management as required and calls the program by executing a trap instruction Normal line editing characters can be used Conventionally the name of the secondary boot program is boot and the name of the current version of the system is unix Then the recipe is 1 Load block O of the boot device by fiddling with the console keys as appropriate for your hardware If you have no
96. processes the send process reads the standard input and passes most of it to the remote system the receive process reads from the remote system and passes most data to the standard output Lines beginning with have special meanings The send process interprets the following Z terminate the conversation EOT terminate the conversation lt file send the contents of file to the remote system as though typed at the terminal a invoke an interactive shell on the local system emd run the command on the local system via sh c emd run the command locally and send its output to the remote system Gtake from to copy file from on the remote system to file to on the local system If to is omitted the from name is used both places put from to copy file from on local system to file to on remote system If to is omitted the from name is used both places gt send the line The receive process handles output diversions of the following form gt gt file zero or more lines to be written to file gt In any case output is diverted or appended if gt gt used to the file If is used the diversion is silent i e it is written only to the file If is omitted output is written both to the file and to the standard output The trailing gt terminates the diversion The use of put requires stty and cat on
97. processor intended as a front end for Ratfor C and other languages Each of the argu ment files is processed in order if there are no arguments or if an argument is the standard input is read The processed text is written on the standard output Macro calls have the form name argl arg2 argn The must immediately follow the name of the macro If a defined macro name is not followed by a U it is deemed to have no arguments Leading unquoted blanks tabs and newlines are ignored while collecting arguments Potential macro names consist of alphabetic letters digits and underscore where the first character is not a digit Left and right single quotes C are used to quote strings The value of a quoted string is the string stripped of the quotes When a macro name is recognized its arguments are collected by searching for a matching right parenthesis Macro evaluation proceeds normally during the collection of the arguments and any com mas or right parentheses which happen to turn up within the value of a nested call are as effective as those in the original input text After argument collection the value of the macro is pushed back onto the input stream and rescanned M4 makes available the following built in macros They may be redefined but once this is done the ori ginal meaning is lost Their values are null unless otherwise stated define The second argument is installed as the value of the ma
98. rename dumpdir print the names of VOUM Annyian 26 Sol a RL Age tO R ae a oe td plot graphics documents Sogn A refer lookbib find look ttyname isatty ttyslot lorder spell spellin spellout dbminit fetch store delete hs RH11 RS03 RS04 rf RF11 RS11 filsys TUTEHONSS T Z 6 Aor E ek Sh dl Font SH ay Aya aes fabs fclose fflush close or ar archive library file arcv convert archives to new file determine filetype file comparator o o o a file comparison file creation mode mask file descriptor A getgrent getgrgid MA A Baek he ee Se pee Re getpwent getpwuid file for pattern file format aye 0 Sd ee a a RRS filesInto pieces sAirr a e Rah eh ee Se y dE MAME ts e ed file status filesystem gt a zi eis sara a TN LRR amp WIS MESS Se ine dns gs oe an ase sees ea Ie ees ee Y A A R Ra TR a Ee KRA file system directory consistency check file System dump e ici file system hierarchy file system ownership filesystem restore so io a ee Ea H file system storage consistency check file system table s e R o E a R AN o K file system volume sic e ee we es MEMES as a MOS Oe A A filetype o e aa at a E a filename affixes fileno stream status inquiries TIGR E ts sd Sa te BR Pada o E A files and directories files on a dump tape ooa a filsys flblk ino format
99. results of a personal divination using for example coins To do this cast the change and then type the resulting line values as an argument The impatient modern may prefer to settle for Chinese cookies try fortune SEE ALSO It furthers one to see the great man DIAGNOSTICS BUGS The great prince issues commands Founds states vests families with fiefs Inferior people should not be employed Waiting in the mud Brings about the arrival of the enemy If one is not extremely careful Somebody may come up from behind and strike him Misfortune 7th Edition 1 MAZE 6 UNIX Programmer s Manual NAME maze generate a maze problem SYNOPSIS usr games maze DESCRIPTION Maze asks a few questions and then prints a maze BUGS Some mazes especially small ones have no solutions 7th Edition MAZE 6 MOO 6 UNIX Programmer s Manual MOO 6 NAME moo guessing game SYNOPSIS usr games moo DESCRIPTION Moo is a guessing game imported from England The computer picks a number consisting of four dis tinct decimal digits The player guesses four distinct digits being scored on each guess A cow is a correct digit in an incorrect position A bull is a correct digit in a correct position The game contin ues until the player guesses the number a score of four bulls 7th Edition 1 QUIZ 6 UNIX Programmer s Manual QUIZ 6 NAME quiz test your knowledge SYNOPSIS usr games qu
100. set user id on execution define S_ISGID 02000 set group id on execution define S ISVTX 01000 save swapped text even after use define S IREAD 00400 read permission owner define S_IWRITE 00200 write permission owner define S IEXEC 00100 execute search permission owner The mode bits 0000070 and 0000007 encode group and others permissions see chmod 2 The defined types ino_t off t time_t name various width integer values dev_t encodes major and minor device numbers their exact definitions are in the include file lt sys types h gt see types 5 7th Edition 1 STAT 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual STAT 2 When fildes is associated with a pipe fstat reports an ordinary file with restricted permissions The size 1s the number of bytes queued in the pipe st_atime is the file was last read For reasons of efficiency it is not set when a directory is searched although this would be more logical st_mtime is the time the file was last written or created It is not set by changes of owner group link count or mode st_ctime is set both both by writing and changing the i node SEE ALSO Is 1 filsys 5 DIAGNOSTICS Zero is returned if a status is available 1 1f the file cannot be found ASSEMBLER stat 18 sys stat name buf fstat 28 file descriptor in r0 sys fstat buf 7th Edition 2 STIME 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual STIME 2 NAME stime set time SYNOPSIS st
101. stack frame corresponding to routine exp The value of the expression exp Monadic operators xexp The contents of the location addressed by exp in corfil exp The contents of the location addressed by exp in objfil exp Integer negation exp Bitwise complement Dyadic operators are left associative and are less binding than monadic operators el e2 Integer addition el e2 Integer subtraction elxe2 Integer multiplication el e2 Integer division el 8te2 Bitwise conjunction el le2 Bitwise disjunction el e2 El rounded up to the next multiple of e2 COMMANDS Most commands consist of a verb followed by a modifier or list of modifiers The following verbs are available The commands and may be followed by see ADDRESSES for further details of Locations starting at address in objfil are printed according to the format f If Locations starting at address in corfil are printed according to the format f f The value of address itself is printed in the styles indicated by the format f For i format is printed for the parts of the instruction that reference subsequent words A format consists of one or more characters that specify a style of printing Each format character may be preceded by a decimal integer that is a repeat count for the format character While stepping through a format dot is incremented temporarily by the amount given for each format letter If no format is given then the l
102. stream FILE stream DESCRIPTION The arguments to popen are pointers to null terminated strings containing respectively a shell command line and an I O mode either r for reading or w for writing It creates a pipe between the calling process and the command to be executed The value returned is a stream pointer that can be used as appropriate to write to the standard input of the command or read from its standard output A stream opened by popen should be closed by pclose which waits for the associated process to ter minate and returns the exit status of the command Wo Because open files are shared a type r command may be used as an input filter and a type Ww as an output filter SEE ALSO pipe 2 fopen 3 fclose 3 system 3 wait 2 DIAGNOSTICS Popen returns a null pointer if files or processes cannot be created or the Shell cannot be accessed Pclose returns 1 if stream is not associated with a popened command BUGS Buffered reading before opening an input filter may leave the standard input of that filter mispositioned Similar problems with an output filter may be forestalled by careful buffer flushing e g with fflush see fclose 3 7th Edition 1 PRINTF 35 UNIX Programmer s Manual PRINTF 35 NAME printf fprintf sprintf formatted output conversion SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt printf format arg char format fprintf stream format arg FILE strea
103. stream It is measured in bytes on UNIX on some other systems it is a magic cookie and the only foolproof way to obtain an offset for fseek Rewind stream is equivalent to fseek stream OL 0 SEE ALSO Iseek 2 fopen 3 DIAGNOSTICS F seek returns 1 for improper seeks 7th Edition 1 GETC 3S UNIX Programmer s Manual GETC 3S NAME getc getchar fgetc getw get character or word from stream SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt int getc stream FILE stream int getchar int fgetc stream FILE stream int getw stream FILE stream DESCRIPTION Getc returns the next character from the named input stream Getchar is identical to getc stdin Fgetc behaves like getc but is a genuine function not a macro it may be used to save object text Getw returns the next word from the named input stream It returns the constant EOF upon end of file or error but since that is a good integer value feof and ferror 3 should be used to check the success of getw Getw assumes no special alignment in the file SEE ALSO fopen 3 putc 3 gets 3 scanf 3 fread 3 ungetc 3 DIAGNOSTICS These functions return the integer constant EOF at end of file or upon read error A stop with message Reading bad file means an attempt has been made to read from a stream that has not been opened for reading by fopen BUGS The end of file return from getchar is incompatible with that in UNIX editions 1 6 Bec
104. terminals Such terminals include the GE Terminet 300 and most display terminals run with popular modems These terminals generally have a speed switch which should be set at 300 or 30 for 30 characters per second and a half full duplex switch which should be set at full duplex This switch will often have to be changed since many other systems require half duplex When a connection is established the system types login you type your user name followed by the return key If you have a password the system asks for it and turns off the printer on the terminal so the password will not SY appear After you have logged in the return new line or linefeed keys will give exactly the same results 1200 and 150 baud terminals If there is a half full duplex switch set it at full duplex When you have established a data connection the system types out a few garbage characters the login message at the wrong speed Depress the break or interrupt key this is a speed independent signal to UNIX that a different speed terminal is in use The system then will type login this time at another speed Continue depressing the break key until login appears in clear then respond with your user name From the TTY 37 terminal and any other which has the newline function combined carriage return and linefeed terminate each line you type with the new line key otherwise use the
105. termination A special status 0177 is returned for a stopped process which has not terminated and can be restarted See ptrace 2 If the 0200 bit of the termination status is set a core image of the process was produced by the system If the parent process terminates without waiting on its children the initialization process process ID 1 inherits the children SEE ALSO exit 2 fork 2 signal 2 DIAGNOSTICS Returns 1 if there are no children not previously waited for ASSEMBLER wait 7 sys wait process ID in r0 status in r1 The high byte of the status is the low byte of rO in the child at termination 7th Edition 1 WRITE 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual WRITE 2 NAME write write on a file SYNOPSIS write fildes buffer nbytes char buffer DESCRIPTION A file descriptor is a word returned from a successful open creat dup or pipe 2 call Buffer is the address of nbytes contiguous bytes which are written on the output file The number of characters actually written is returned It should be regarded as an error if this is not the same as requested Writes which are multiples of 512 characters long and begin on a 512 byte boundary in the file are more efficient than any others SEE ALSO creat 2 open 2 pipe 2 DIAGNOSTICS Returns 1 on error bad descriptor buffer address or count physical I O errors ASSEMBLER write 4 file descriptor in r0 sys write buffer nbytes by
106. text consists of one or more lines all but the last of which end with Y to hide the newline Backslashes in text are treated like backslashes in the replacement string of an s command and may be used to protect initial blanks and tabs against the stripping that is done on every script line An argument denoted rfile or wfile must terminate the command line and must be preceded by exactly one blank Each wfile is created before processing begins There can be at most 10 distinct wfile argu ments Ga text Append Place text on the output before reading the next input line 2 b label Branch to the command bearing the label If label is empty branch to the end of the script 2 c text Change Delete the pattern space With 0 or address or at the end of a 2 address range place text on the output Start the next cycle 2 d Delete the pattern space Start the next cycle on 1 SED 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SED 1 2 D Delete the initial segment of the pattern space through the first newline Start the next cycle 2 g Replace the contents of the pattern space by the contents of the hold space 2 G Append the contents of the hold space to the pattern space 2 h Replace the contents of the hold space by the contents of the pattern space 2 H Append the contents of the pattern space to the hold space 1 i text Insert Place text on the standard output 2 1 List the pattern space on the standard output in
107. the default FILES default tape unit varies with installation rst SEE ALSO dump 1 restor 1 DIAGNOSTICS If the dump extends over more than one tape it may ask you to change tapes Reply with a new line when the next tape has been mounted BUGS There is redundant information on the tape that could be used in case of tape reading problems Unfor tunately dumpdir doesn t use it 7th Edition 1 ECHO 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual ECHO 1 NAME echo echo arguments SYNOPSIS echo n arg DESCRIPTION Echo writes its arguments separated by blanks and terminated by a newline on the standard output If the flag n is used no newline is added to the output Echo is useful for producing diagnostics in shell programs and for writing constant data on pipes To send diagnostics to the standard error file do echo 1 gt amp 2 7th Edition 1 ED 1 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual ED 1 ed text editor SYNOPSIS ed x name DESCRIPTION Ed is the standard text editor If a name argument is given ed simulates an e command see below on the named file that is to say the file is read into ed s buffer so that it can be edited If x is present an x command is simulated first to handle an encrypted file The optional suppresses the printing of character counts by e 7 and w commands Ed operates on a copy of any file it is editing changes made in the copy have n
108. the point it was interrupted Except as indicated a signal is reset to SIG_DFL after being caught Thus if it is desired to catch every such signal the catching routine must issue another signal call When a caught signal occurs during certain system calls the call terminates prematurely In particular this can occur during a read or write 2 on a slow device like a typewriter but not a file and during pause or wait 2 When such a signal occurs the saved user status is arranged in such a way that when return from the signal catching takes place it will appear that the system call returned an error status The user s program may then if it wishes re execute the call The value of signal is the previous or initial value of func for the particular signal After a fork 2 the child inherits all signals Exec 2 resets all caught signals to default action SEE ALSO kill 1 kill 2 ptrace 2 setjmp 3 DIAGNOSTICS The value int 1 is returned if the given signal is out of range BUGS If a repeated signal arrives before the last one can be reset there is no chance to catch it 7th Edition 1 SIGNAL 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual SIGNAL 2 The type specification of the routine and its func argument are problematical ASSEMBLER signal 48 sys signal sig label old label in r0 If label is 0 default action is reinstated If label is odd the signal is ignored Any other even label specifies an address in the proce
109. to that file At that point removing the old entry will destroy the new file The new entry will again point to an unallocated i node so the whole cycle is likely to be repeated again and again SEE ALSO icheck 1 BUGS If the file is open clri is likely to be ineffective 7th Edition 1 CMP 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual CMP 1 NAME cmp compare two files SYNOPSIS cmp l1 s filel file2 DESCRIPTION The two files are compared If file is the standard input is used Under default options cmp makes no comment if the files are the same if they differ it announces the byte and line number at which the difference occurred If one file is an initial subsequence of the other that fact is noted Options l1 Print the byte number decimal and the differing bytes octal for each difference s Print nothing for differing files return codes only SEE ALSO diff 1 comm 1 DIAGNOSTICS Exit code 0 is returned for identical files 1 for different files and 2 for an inaccessible or missing argu ment 7th Edition 1 COL 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual COL 1 NAME col filter reverse line feeds SYNOPSIS col bfx DESCRIPTION Col reads the standard input and writes the standard output It performs the line overlays implied by reverse line feeds ESC 7 in ASCII and by forward and reverse half line feeds ESC 9 and ESC 8 Col is particularly useful for filtering multicolumn output made with th
110. unix command acct sleep suspend sleep suspend monitor prepare profil exece environ execute a file execl if while break continue cd eval exec logarithm power square root frexp ldexp modf split into mantissa and exp log log10 pow sqrt while break continue cd eval exec exit ceiling functions o factor primes true abort generate IOT ecvt fopen freopen Status inquiries a a a SE ace Ue ee Ces data base subroutines dbminit fclose SICA di Ae W N BO ee ae ae S getc getchar gets grep egrep access determine accessibility of acct execution accounting chmod change mode of chown change owner and group of a close close a core format of core image creat create a new xii ed text editor o 4 o is a ee edata last locations in program edilon e e anaa a doe as Pere A AEE R editoi a E a eerop a a Uh bee a BOR Bh aE A editor output 2 A A E ERT A ee egrep fgrep search a file for a pattern noa encod decode ans a ad encrypt DES encryption ENCIYpti0N KEY o AKR T T R ar R end etext edata last locationsin endgrent get group fileentry endpwent get password fileentry enroll secret mail entries from name list 1 aa 2 eee ently 44 86 4k
111. will be asked at appropriate times Each question is answered by y followed by a new line for yes or just new line for no means do you want a hit Insurance Double down Every time the deck is shuffled the dealer so states and the action total bet and standing total won or lost is printed To exit hit the interrupt key DEL and the action and standing will be printed 7th Edition CHECKERS 6 NAME checkers game SYNOPSIS usr games checkers DESCRIPTION Checkers uses standard notation for the board UNIX Programmer s Manual BLACK 1111 11 11 2 Ml 3 Mil 4 1111 Mit 1111 Mil 5 Mi 6 1 7 Ml 8 Mil 1111 Mit 1111 Mit 1111 91 11 10 Mi 11 1 12 1111 1111 1111 Ml 13 14 M 15 M 16 Mt 1111 Mit 1111 Mit Mt 17 Wi 18 Mit 19 1111 20 1111 Mit 1111 1111 21 1 1 22 My 23 Mi 24 Mi 1111 Mit 1111 Mit Ml 25 Mi 26 Mit 27 MH 28 1111 Mit 1111 Mi 29 HU 30 M 31 H 32 JT 1111 Mit 1111 Mit WHITE CHECKERS 6 Black plays first The program normally plays white To specify a move name the square moved from and the square moved to For multiple jumps name all the squares touched Certain commands may be given instead of moves reverse Reverse roles the program takes over your pieces backup Undo the last move for each player list Print the record
112. with extreme prejudice processing language processor prof display profile data profil execution time profile A ied te a ge eS ee ae a ee Se DOIIE ms cet Faas Sh ce a SAE Daan el eS E og ees Sy SEY profile data sys aes she whe Bae ee RS IE E Program se yee Godot BAS Oe he ee ee PTO STAN daa 0 10 ap Wie TEH A Boyles ee L program beautifier o program groups program priority o program verification o oo o a program verifier na enyan CR 5 Pee ees Ae tai PEOPTAS Cari a a A a protocol apr e R Be eae a a a provide drill in number facts provide truth values 2 o pstat print system facts o pltace proc ss TACE ois Z X e ee al e e e E ptx permuted index push character back into input stream put a string on a stream put character or word on a stream puts fputs put a string onastreaam putw put character or word on a stream pwd working directory name o qsort quicker sort nos d E R o 0004 quiz test your knowledge quot summarize file system ownership rand srand random number generator ratfor rational Fortran dialect rc process control initialization read read from file o read a password oi ee pe e ao
113. with size n or size n roman italic bold and font n Size and fonts can be changed globally in a document by gsize n and gfont n or by the command line arguments sn and fn Normally subscripts and superscripts are reduced by 3 point sizes from the previous size this may be changed by the command line argument pn Successive display arguments can be lined up Place mark before the desired lineup point in the first equation place lineup at the place that is to line up vertically in subsequent equations Shorthands may be defined or existing keywords redefined with define define thing replacement defines a new token called thing which will be replaced by replacement whenever it appears thereafter The may be any character that does not occur in replacement Keywords like sum int J inf and shorthands like gt 2 gt gt and are recognized Greek letters are spelled out in the desired case as in alpha or GAMMA Mathematical words like sin cos log are made Roman automatically Troff 1 four character escapes like bs can be used any where Strings enclosed in double quotes are passed through untouched this permits keywords to be entered as text and can be used to communicate with troff when all else fails SEE ALSO BUGS troff 1 tb1 1 ms 7 eqnchar 7 B W Kernighan and L L Cherry Typesetting Mathematics User s Guide J F Ossanna NROFF TROFF User s Manual To embol
114. yes _ Print Attached and turn off line filling AUxy no yes Author s name follows x is location and y is extension ignored except in TM Bx no no Print x in boldface if no argument switch to boldface B1 no yes Begin text to be enclosed in a box B2 no yes End text to be boxed amp print it BT date no Bottom title automatically invoked at foot of page May be redefined BX x no no Print x in a box CS x yes Cover sheet info if TM format suppressed otherwise Arguments are number of text pages other pages total pages figures tables references CT no yes Print Copies to and enter no fill mode DA x nroff no Date line at bottom of page is x Default is today DE yes End displayed text Implies KE DS x no yes Start of displayed text to appear verbatim line by line x I for indented display default x L for left justified on the page x C for centered x B for make left justified block then center whole block Implies KS EG no Print document in BTL format for Engineer s Notes Must be first EN yes Space after equation produced by eqn or neqn EQ xy yes Precede equation break out and add space Equation number is y The optional argu ment x may be to indent equation default L to left adjust the equation or C to center the equation 7th Edition 1 MS 7 FE FS HO Ix IH IM IP x y KS LG LP MF MH MR ND date NH n NL OK PP PT PY QE QP
115. 0 EVENP 0000200 Even parity allowed on input most terminals ODDP 0000100 Odd parity allowed on input RAW 0000040 Raw mode wake up on all characters 8 bit interface CRMOD 0000020 Map CR into LF echo LF or CR as CR LF ECHO 0000010 Echo full duplex LCASE 0000004 Map upper case to lower on input CBREAK 0000002 Return each character as soon as typed TANDEM 0000001 Automatic flow control The delay bits specify how long transmission stops to allow for mechanical or other movement when certain characters are sent to the terminal In all cases a value of O indicates no delay Backspace delays are currently ignored but might be used for Terminet 300 s If a form feed vertical tab delay is specified it lasts for about 2 seconds Carriage return delay type 1 lasts about 08 seconds and is suitable for the Terminet 300 Delay type 2 lasts about 16 seconds and is suitable for the VTO5 and the TI 700 Delay type 3 is unimplemented and is 0 7th Edition 3 TTY 4 UNIX Programmer s Manual TTY 4 New line delay type 1 is dependent on the current column and is tuned for Teletype model 37 s Type 2 is useful for the VTOS and is about 10 seconds Type 3 is unimplemented and is 0 Tab delay type 1 is dependent on the amount of movement and is tuned to the Teletype model 37 Type 3 called XTABS is not a delay at all but causes tabs to be replaced by the appropriate number of spaces on output Characters with the wrong parity as determi
116. 0 and others using HyType Il 1620 12 300 300 12 300s 300s 12 33 37 40 2 43 450 450 12 450 12 8 735 745 dumb hp 4014 tn1200 tn300 vt05 same in 12 pitch mode DASI DTC GSI 300 and others using HyType I same in 12 pitch mode DASI DTC 300 S same in 12 pitch mode TELETYPE Model 33 TELETYPE Model 37 TELETYPE Model 40 2 TELETYPE Model 43 DASI 450 same as Diablo 1620 same in 12 pitch mode same in 12 pitch 8 lines inch mode Texas Instruments TI735 and TI725 Texas Instruments TI745 terminals with no special features Hewlett Packard HP264 series terminals Tektronix 4014 General Electric TermiNet 1200 General Electric TermiNet 300 Digital Equipment Corp VTOS Commands whose behavior may depend on the terminal accept arguments of the form Tterm where term is one of the names given above If no such argument is present a command may consult the shell environment for the terminal type SEE ALSO stty 1 tabs 1 plot 1 sh 1 environ 5 troff 1 for nroff BUGS The programs that ought to adhere to this nomenclature do so only fitfully 7th Edition BOOT 8 UNIX Programmer s Manual BOOT 8 NAME boot startup procedures DESCRIPTION A PDP11 45 and PDP11 70 UNIX system is started by a two stage process The first is a primary bootstrap which is able to read in relatively small stand alone programs the second called boot is used to read in the system itself The
117. 1 ptx permuted index IS ptx option input output DESCRIPTION FILES BUGS 7th Editi Ptx generates a permuted index to file input on file output standard input and output default It has three phases the first does the permutation generating one line for each keyword in an input line The keyword is rotated to the front The permuted file is then sorted Finally the sorted lines are rotated so the keyword comes at the middle of the page Ptx produces output in the form Xx tail before keyword keyword and after head where xx may be an nroff or troff 1 macro for user defined formatting The before keyword and key word and after fields incorporate as much of the line as will fit around the keyword when it is printed at the middle of the page Tail and head at least one of which is an empty string are wrapped around pieces small enough to fit in the unused space at the opposite end of the line When original text must be discarded marks the spot The following options can be applied f Fold upper and lower case letters for sorting t Prepare the output for the phototypesetter the default line length is 100 characters wn Use the next argument n as the width of the output line The default line length is 72 charac ters gn Use the next argument n as the number of characters to allow for each gap among the four parts of the line as finally printed The default gap is 3 characters
118. 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TAIL 1 NAME tail deliver the last part of a file SYNOPSIS tail number lbe file DESCRIPTION Tail copies the named file to the standard output beginning at a designated place If no file is named the standard input is used Copying begins at distance number from the beginning or number from the end of the input Number is counted in units of lines blocks or characters according to the appended option I b or c When no units are specified counting is by lines SEE ALSO dd 1 BUGS Tails relative to the end of the file are treasured up in a buffer and thus are limited in length Various kinds of anomalous behavior may happen with character special files 7th Edition 1 TAR 1 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual TAR 1 tar tape archiver SYNOPSIS tar key name DESCRIPTION Tar saves and restores files on magtape Its actions are controlled by the key argument The key is a string of characters containing at most one function letter and possibly one or more function modifiers Other arguments to the command are file or directory names specifying which files are to be dumped or restored In all cases appearance of a directory name refers to the files and recursively subdirectories of that directory The function portion of the key is specified by one of the following letters r x The named files are written on the end of the tape The e fun
119. 5 and a flag that is nonzero if daylight saving time is in effect When local time is called for the program consults the system to determine the time zone and whether the standard U S A daylight saving time adjustment is appropriate The program knows about the pecu liarities of this conversion in 1974 and 1975 if necessary a table for these years can be extended Timezone returns the name of the time zone associated with its first argument which is measured in minutes westward from Greenwich If the second argument is 0 the standard name is used otherwise the Daylight Saving version If the required name does not appear in a table built into the routine the difference from GMT is produced e g in Afghanistan timezone 60 4 30 0 is appropriate because it is 4 30 ahead of GMT and the string GMT 4 30 is produced SEE ALSO time 2 7th Edition 1 CTIME 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual CTIME 3 BUGS The return values point to static data whose content is overwritten by each call 7th Edition 2 CTYPE 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual CTYPE 3 NAME isalpha isupper islower isdigit isalnum isspace ispunct isprint iscntrl isascii character classification SYNOPSIS include lt ctype h gt isalpha c DESCRIPTION These macros classify ASCII coded integer values by table lookup Each is a predicate returning nonzero for true zero for false Jsascii is defined on all integer values the rest are defined only where
120. A cd 1 command to the current directory is inserted at the beginning followed by assignments to all environment variables When the script is run it uses the user and group ID of the creator of the copy file The time is 1 to 4 digits with an optional following A P N or M for AM PM noon or mid night One and two digit numbers are taken to be hours three and four digits to be hours and minutes If no letters follow the digits a 24 hour clock time is understood The optional day is either 1 a month name followed by a day number or 2 a day of the week if the word week follows invocation is moved seven days further off Names of months and days may be recognizably truncated Examples of legitimate commands are at 8am jan 24 at 1530 fr week At programs are executed by periodic execution of the command usr lib atrun from cron 8 The granularity of at depends upon how often atrun is executed Standard output or error output is lost unless redirected FILES usr spool at yy ddd hhhh uu activity to be performed at hour Ahhh of year day ddd of year yy uu is a unique number usr spool at lasttimedone contains hhhh for last hour of activity usr spool at past directory of activities now in progress asr lib atrun program that executes activities that are due pwd 1 SEE ALSO calendar 1 cron 8 DIAGNOSTICS Complains about various syntax errors and times out of range BUGS Due to the granularity
121. A command is simply an executable program The Shell looks first in your current directory see below for a program with the given name and if none is there then in a system directory There is nothing special about system provided commands except that they are kept in a directory where the Shell can find them The command name is always the first word on an input line it and its arguments are separated from one another by spaces When a program terminates the Shell will ordinarily regain control and type a at you to indicate that 1t is ready for another command The Shell has many other capabilities which are described in detail in section sh 1 The current directory UNIX has a file system arranged in a hierarchy of directories When the system administrator gave you a user name he also created a directory for you ordinarily with the same name as your user name When you log in any file name you type is by default in this directory Since you are the owner of this directory you have full permission to read write alter or destroy its contents Permissions to have your will with other directories and files will have been granted or denied to you by their owners As a matter of observed fact few UNIX users protect their files from destruction let alone perusal by other users To change the current directory but not the set of permissions you were endowed with at login use cd 1 Path names To refer to files not in the
122. AL 2 NAME signal catch or ignore signals SYNOPSIS include lt signal h gt signal sig func func DESCRIPTION A signal is generated by some abnormal event initiated either by user at a typewriter quit interrupt by a program error bus error etc or by request of another program kill Normally all signals cause ter mination of the receiving process but a signal call allows them either to be ignored or to cause an inter rupt to a specified location Here is the list of signals with names as in the include file SIGHUP 1 hangup SIGINT 2 interrupt SIGQUIT 3 quit SIGILL 4 illegal instruction not reset when caught SIGTRAP 5 trace trap not reset when caught SIGIOT 6 IOT instruction SIGEMT 7 EMT instruction SIGFPE 8 floating point exception SIGKILL 9 kill cannot be caught or ignored SIGBUS 10 bus error SIGSEGV 11 segmentation violation SIGSYS 12 bad argument to system call SIGPIPE 13 write on a pipe or link with no one to read it SIGALRM 14 alarm clock SIGTERM 15 software termination signal 16 unassigned The starred signals in the list above cause a core image if not caught or ignored If func is SIG_DFL the default action for signal sig is reinstated this default is termination sometimes with a core image If func is SIG_IGN the signal is ignored Otherwise when the signal occurs func will be called with the signal number as argument A return from the function will continue the process at
123. BUGS There is redundant information on the tape that could be used in case of tape reading problems Unfor tunately restor doesn t use it 7th Edition 2 REV 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual REV 1 NAME rev reverse lines of a file SYNOPSIS rev file DESCRIPTION Rev copies the named files to the standard output reversing the order of characters in every line If no file is specified the standard input is copied 7th Edition 1 RM 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual RM 1 NAME rm rmdir remove unlink files SYNOPSIS rm fri file rmdir dir DESCRIPTION Rm removes the entries for one or more files from a directory If an entry was the last link to the file the file is destroyed Removal of a file requires write permission in its directory but neither read nor write permission on the file itself If a file has no write permission and the standard input is a terminal its permissions are printed and a line is read from the standard input If that line begins with y the file is deleted otherwise the file remains No questions are asked when the f force option is given If a designated file is a directory an error comment is printed unless the optional argument r has been used In that case rm recursively deletes the entire contents of the specified directory and the directory itself If the i interactive option is in effect rm asks whether to delete each file and under r whet
124. CII string in buf and returns a pointer to buf It attempts to produce ndigit significant digits in Fortran F format if possible otherwise E format ready for print ing Trailing zeros may be suppressed SEE ALSO printf 3 BUGS The return values point to static data whose content is overwritten by each call 7th Edition 1 END 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual END 3 NAME end etext edata last locations in program SYNOPSIS extern end extern etext extern edata DESCRIPTION These names refer neither to routines nor to locations with interesting contents The address of etext is the first address above the program text edata above the initialized data region and end above the unin itialized data region When execution begins the program break coincides with end but many functions reset the program break among them the routines of brk 2 malloc 3 standard input output stdio 3 the profile p option of cc 1 etc The current value of the program break is reliably returned by sbrk 0 see brk 2 SEE ALSO brk 2 malloc 3 7th Edition 1 EXP 3M UNIX Programmer s Manual EXP 3M NAME exp log log10 pow sqrt exponential logarithm power square root SYNOPSIS include lt math h gt double exp x double x double log x double x double log10 x double x double pow x y double x y double sqrt x double x DESCRIPTION Exp returns the exponential function of x Log
125. CLOTIES sor Z 9 E een SPB BI Gd GirectOny a eee oe oe Rae R ita D hoy ed CirectOry ERE Sod ae ee elas E Be WAR Gee aS directory eu se vee eel Steck Se ae 4 RT T ditectoiy i veg daw fe AS Be ie wee a o E directory consistency check directory entry A TR 6 ene ea a aS directory hame sos oe ia ee RS directory or a special Hie disko ideada bine He ROE A anc Meee Res disk file eue ge ae E E ca ISK Ss oo s TT he neds eA ant ASO Sg 8 disk 6 cee eb oe He Bod SE A a Ree ae a a disk usages ey eee a ee ae ee ee ee fg dismount file system 200 display profile data a distanci a eh Boe Gree ah AO a dn DN 11 ACU interface documents refer lookbib dp DU 11 201 data phone interface dramatic reversals a s s s so aed ee KR RN diawagraph lt s ooe e eale Gane ia mie e eye SS drill in number acts 2 A iae TR teks aE iaei RE SN riranin eE ah ements alai 9 driver simulator du summarize disk usage du dp DU 11 201 data phone interface dump incremental file system dump dump ddate incremental dump format UMP tapes hal ae o dion Se ete AH Ta ans Se 9 dup dup2 duplicate an open file echo echo arguments 44 ecvt fevt gcvt output conversion null 4 types 5 join 1 du 4 date 1 time 2 ctime 3 touch 1 dbm 3 de 1 dcheck 1 dd 1 dump 5 adb 1 tp 5 crypt 1 te 4 chdir 2
126. CRIPTION Wc counts lines words and characters in the named files or in the standard input if no name appears A word is a maximal string of characters delimited by spaces tabs or newlines If the optional argument is present just the specified counts lines words or characters are selected by the letters l w or c 7th Edition 1 WHO 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual WHO 1 NAME who who is on the system SYNOPSIS who who file am I DESCRIPTION Who without an argument lists the login name terminal name and login time for each current UNIX user Without an argument who examines the etc utmp file to obtain its information If a file is given that file is examined Typically the given file will be usr adm wtmp which contains a record of all the logins since it was created Then who lists logins logouts and crashes since the creation of the wtmp file Each login is listed with user name terminal name with dev suppressed and date and time When an argument is given logouts produce a similar line without a user name Reboots produce a line with x in the place of the device name and a fossil time indicative of when the system went down With two arguments as in who am I and also who are you who tells who you are logged in as FILES etc utmp SEE ALSO getuid 2 utmp 5 7th Edition 1 WRITE 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual WRITE 1 NAME write write to another user SYNOPS
127. Cycles through 300 1200 150 110 baud Useful as a default for dialup lines accessed by a variety of terminals Intended for an on line Teletype model 33 for example an operator s console 1 Optimized for a 150 baud Teletype model 37 2 Intended for an on line 9600 baud terminal for example the Textronix 4104 3 Starts at 1200 baud cycles to 300 and back Useful with 212 datasets where most terminals run at 1200 speed 5 Same as 3 but starts at 300 4 Useful for on line console DECwriter LA36 SEE ALSO init 8 login 1 ioctl 2 ttys 5 7th Edition 1 INIT 8 UNIX Programmer s Manual INIT 8 NAME init rc process control initialization SYNOPSIS etc init ete re DESCRIPTION FILES Init is invoked as the last step of the boot procedure see boot 8 Generally its role is to create a pro cess for each typewriter on which a user may log in When init first is executed the console typewriter dev console is opened for reading and writing and the shell is invoked immediately This feature is used to bring up a single user system If the shell ter minates init comes up multi user and the process described below is started When init comes up multiuser it invokes a shell with input taken from the file etc rc This command file performs housekeeping like removing temporary files mounting file systems and starting daemons Then init reads the file etc ttys and forks several times to create a proce
128. IS write user ttyname DESCRIPTION Write copies lines from your terminal to that of another user When first called it sends the message Message from yourname yourttyname The recipient of the message should write back at this point Communication continues until an end of file is read from the terminal or an interrupt is sent At that point write writes EOT on the other termi nal and exits If you want to write to a user who is logged in more than once the ttyname argument may be used to indicate the appropriate terminal name Permission to write may be denied or granted by use of the mesg command At the outset writing is allowed Certain commands in particular nroff and pr 1 disallow messages in order to prevent messy output If the character is found at the beginning of a line write calls the shell to execute the rest of the line as a command The following protocol is suggested for using write when you first write to another user wait for him to write back before starting to send Each party should end each message with a distinctive signal 0 for over is conventional that the other may reply 00 for over and out is suggested when conver sation is about to be terminated FILES etc utmp to find user bin sh to execute l SEE ALSO mesg 1 who 1 mail 1 7th Edition 1 XSEND XGET ENROLL 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual XSEND XGET ENROLL 1 NAME xsend xget enroll secret mail
129. IX Programmer s Manual RESTOR 1M restor incremental file system restore SYNOPSIS restor key argument DESCRIPTION Restor is used to read magtapes dumped with the dump command The key specifies what is to be done Key is one of the characters rRxt optionally combined with f f rorR t Use the first argument as the name of the tape instead of the default The tape is read and loaded into the file system specified in argument This should not be done lightly see below If the key is R restor asks which tape of a multi volume set to start on This allows restor to be interrupted and then restarted an icheck s must be done before Each file on the tape named by an argument is extracted The file name has all mount prefixes removed for example usr bin lpr is named bin Ipr on the tape The file extracted is placed in a file with a numeric name supplied by restor actually the inode number In order to keep the amount of tape read to a minimum the following procedure is recommended Mount volume 1 of the set of dump tapes Type the restor command Restor will announce whether or not it found the files give the number it will name the file and rewind the tape It then asks you to mount the desired tape volume Type the number of the volume you choose On a multivolume dump the recommended procedure is to mount the last through the first volume in that order Restor checks to see if any of the f
130. M NAME dump incremental file system dump SYNOPSIS dump key argument filesystem DESCRIPTION Dump copies to magnetic tape all files changed after a certain date in the filesystem The key specifies the date and other options about the dump Key consists of characters from the set 0123456789fusd f Place the dump on the next argument file instead of the tape u If the dump completes successfully write the date of the beginning of the dump on file letc ddate This file records a separate date for each filesystem and each dump level 0 9 This number is the dump level All files modified since the last date stored in the file etc ddate for the same filesystem at lesser levels will be dumped If no date is determined by the level the beginning of time is assumed thus the option 0 causes the entire filesystem to be dumped s The size of the dump tape is specified in feet The number of feet is taken from the next argu ment When the specified size is reached the dump will wait for reels to be changed The default size is 2300 feet d The density of the tape expressed in BPI is taken from the next argument This is used in calcu lating the amount of tape used per write The default is 1600 If no arguments are given the key is assumed to be 9u and a default file system is dumped to the default tape Now a short suggestion on how perform dumps Start with a full level 0 dump dump Ou Next p
131. Mode obio a ee ee a we ER UD ea Mos Big aA AO ae eect te umask set file creation mode mask umask wait command language newgrp umount mount and dismount file system umount mount or remove file system ungetc push character back into input uniq report repeated lines in a file unique file name ooa a a units conversion program UNI trial a a ean ka an E Aa r E aire cto te unix command execution ooo UX COPY vele gigia se oe Ri eae pop ela a a unix to unix command execution unix to Unix COPY unlink remove directory entry ITA MR a E te LET E update periodically update the super block update date last modified of a file update super block 2 a o update the super block 2 20 update the super block 2 20 usage USED E Ne mA ce ind Ay Dt gee Ui Ne Glow Bom 9 user and group ID 200 user and group identity 0 userenvironment 2 0 008 USES o ahd soo ad Se aise Soa eran Tite ennai ee Bees utime set file times utmp wtmp login records uucp uulog unix to unix copy uux unix to unix command execution value Valles id T ar yi RNS isco a Beit K ani verica s aten Se o a e ee oP Veo DT adh SE ds Sirs Hos Versatec printer plotter 2 o o
132. ONnversion Z T a td E e EE ok awk pattern alarm grep egrep fgrep xsend xget enroll man print files e a A GS ee Se comm mail kill ascii map of ASCII character umask utime nice exit export login newgrp read readonly stty tabs date print and stime getty setuid setgid setuid getgrent getgrgid getgrnam XX read readonly set shift times trap reading or writing iy s o oe scare avi s ae ea 0 000 readonly set shift times trap umask read write pointer ooo o a realloc calloc main memory allocator receive mail among users o o a TECOS ii a a he hoe ete SE refer lookbib find and insert literature reject lines common to two sorted files relation for an object library o oo aaa relational database operator 0 relocation bils eana te na a ae Be A a a REA Feminder service 4 ra See e remove directory entry o remove file system o o 000004 remove nroff troff tbl and eqn constructs repeated lines in a file o a a a report I O statistics o ee ee report repeated lines inafile TEpOSIti0N A SEAN restor incremental file system restore rev reverse lines of a file reversals visas ye eh pe ee a B
133. PTRACE 2 To forestall possible fraud ptrace inhibits the set user id facility on subsequent exec 2 calls If a traced process calls exec it will stop before executing the first instruction of the new image showing signal SIGTRAP On the Interdata 8 32 word means a 32 bit word and even means 0 mod 4 SEE ALSO wait 2 signal 2 adb 1 DIAGNOSTICS The value 1 is returned if request is invalid pid is not a traceable process addr is out of bounds or data specifies an illegal signal number BUGS On the Interdata 8 32 as soon as possible request 7 means as soon as a store instruction has been executed The request 0 call should be able to specify signals which are to be treated normally and not cause a stop In this way for example programs with simulated floating point which use illegal instruction signals at a very high rate could be efficiently debugged The error indication 1 is a legitimate function value errno see intro 2 can be used to disambiguate It should be possible to stop a process on occurrence of a system call in this way a completely con trolled environment could be provided ASSEMBLER ptrace 26 data in r0 sys ptrace pid addr request value in r0 7th Edition 2 READ 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual READ 2 NAME read read from file SYNOPSIS read fildes buffer nbytes char buffer DESCRIPTION A file descriptor is a word returned f
134. QS RE RP RS SG x SH SM LA Mie TE TH TL TM x TR x TS x UL x UX WH no no no no no no no no yes troff 7th Edition yes no no no no no yes yes yes no yes no UNIX Programmer s Manual MS 7 End footnote Start footnote The note will be moved to the bottom of the page Bell Laboratories Holmdel New Jersey 07733 Italicize x if x missing italic text follows Bell Laboratories Naperville Illinois 60540 Print document in BTL format for an internal memorandum Must be first Start indented paragraph with hanging tag x Indentation is y ens default 5 End keep Put kept text on next page if not enough room Start floating keep If the kept text must be moved to the next page float later text back to this page Start keeping following text Make letters larger Start left blocked paragraph Print document in BTL format for Memorandum for File Must be first Bell Laboratories Murray Hill New Jersey 07974 Print document in BTL format for Memorandum for Record Must be first Use date supplied if any only in special BTL format positions omit from page footer Same as SH with section number supplied automatically Numbers are multilevel like 1 2 3 where n tells what level is wanted default is 1 Make letters normal size Other keywords for TM cover sheet follow Begin paragraph First line indented Page
135. RIPTION Deroff reads each file in sequence and removes all nroff and troff command lines backslash construc tions macro definitions eqn constructs between EQ and EN lines or between delimiters and table descriptions and writes the remainder on the standard output Deroff follows chains of included files so and nx commands if a file has already been included a so is ignored and a nx terminates execution If no input file is given deroff reads from the standard input file If the w flag is given the output is a word list one word string of letters digits and apostrophes beginning with a letter apostrophes are removed per line and all other characters ignored Otherwise the output follows the original with the deletions mentioned above SEE ALSO troff 1 eqn 1 tbl 1 BUGS Deroff is not a complete troff interpreter so it can be confused by subtle constructs Most errors result in too much rather than too little output 7th Edition 1 DF 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual DF 1M NAME df disk free SYNOPSIS df filesystem DESCRIPTION Df prints out the number of free blocks available on the filesystems If no file system is specified the free space on all of the normally mounted file systems is printed FILES Default file systems vary with installation SEE ALSO icheck 1 7th Edition 1 DIFF 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual DIFF 1 NAME diff
136. RK 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual BRK 2 NAME brk sbrk break change core allocation SYNOPSIS char brk addr char sbrk incr DESCRIPTION Brk sets the system s idea of the lowest location not used by the program called the break to addr rounded up to the next multiple of 64 bytes on the PDP11 256 bytes on the Interdata 8 32 512 bytes on the VAX 11 780 Locations not less than addr and below the stack pointer are not in the address space and will thus cause a memory violation if accessed In the alternate function sbrk incr more bytes are added to the program s data space and a pointer to the start of the new area is returned When a program begins execution via exec the break is set at the highest location defined by the pro gram and data storage areas Ordinarily therefore only programs with growing data areas need to use break SEE ALSO exec 2 malloc 3 end 3 DIAGNOSTICS BUGS Zero is returned if the break could be set 1 if the program requests more memory than the system limit or if too many segmentation registers would be required to implement the break Setting the break in the range 0177701 to 0177777 on the PDP11 is the same as setting it to zero ASSEMBLER 7th Edition break 17 sys break addr Break performs the function of brk The name of the routine differs from that in C for historical rea sons CHDIR 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual CHDIR 2 NAME chdir chroot
137. SSEMBLER unlink 10 sys unlink name 7th Edition 1 UTIME 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual UTIME 2 NAME utime set file times SYNOPSIS include lt sys types h gt utime file timep char file time_t timep 2 DESCRIPTION The utime call uses the accessed and updated times in that order from the timep vector to set the corresponding recorded times for file The caller must be the owner of the file or the super user The inode changed time of the file is set to the current time SEE ALSO stat 2 ASSEMBLER utime 30 sys utime file timep 7th Edition 1 WAIT UNIX Programmer s Manual WAIT 2 NAME wait wait for process to terminate SYNOPSIS wait status int status wait 0 DESCRIPTION Wait causes its caller to delay until a signal is received or one of its child processes terminates If any child has died since the last wait return is immediate if there are no children return is immediate with the error bit set resp with a value of 1 returned The normal return yields the process ID of the ter minated child In the case of several children several wait calls are needed to learn of all the deaths If int status is nonzero the high byte of the word pointed to receives the low byte of the argument of exit when the child terminated The low byte receives the termination status of the process See sig nal 2 for a list of termination statuses signals 0 status indicates normal
138. UNIX M TIME SHARING SYSTEM UNIX PROGRAMMERS MANUAL Seventh Edition Volume 1 January 1979 Bell Telephone Laboratories Incorporated Murray Hill New Jersey PREFACE Although this Seventh Edition no longer bears their byline Ken Thompson and Dennis Ritchie remain the fathers and preceptors of the UNIX time sharing system Many of the improvements here described bear their mark Among many many other people who have contributed to the further flowering of UNIX we wish especially to acknowledge the contributions of A V Aho S R Bourne L L Cherry G L Chesson S I Feldman C B Haley R C Haight S C Johnson M E Lesk T L Lyon L E McMahon R Morris R Muha D A Nowitz L Wehr and P J Weinberger We appreciate also the effective advice and criticism of T A Dolotta A G Fraser J F Maranzano and J R Mashey and we remember the important work of the late Joseph F Ossanna W Kernighan D B M D Mcllroy t UNIX is a Trademark of Bell Laboratories INTRODUCTION TO VOLUME 1 This volume gives descriptions of the publicly available features of the UNIX system It does not attempt to provide perspective or tutorial information upon the UNIX operating system its facilities or its implementation Various documents on those topics are contained in Volume 2 In particular for an overview see The UNIX Time Sharing System by Ritchie and Thompson for a tutorial see UNIX for Beginners b
139. UNIX Programmer s Manual TROFF 1 FILES asr lib suftab suffix hyphenation tables tmp ta temporary file usr lib tmac tmac standard macro files asr lib term terminal driving tables for nroff asr lib font font width tables for troff dev cat phototypesetter asr adm tracct accounting statistics for dev cat SEE ALSO J F Ossanna Nroff Troff user s manual B W Kernighan A TROFF Tutorial eqn 1 tbl 1 col 1 tk 1 nroff only tc 1 gcat 1 troff only 7th Edition 2 TRUE 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TRUE 1 NAME true false provide truth values SYNOPSIS true false DESCRIPTION True does nothing successfully False does nothing unsuccessfully They are typically used in input to sh 1 such as while true do command done SEE ALSO sh 1 DIAGNOSTICS True has exit status zero false nonzero 7th Edition 1 TSORT 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TSORT 1 NAME tsort topological sort SYNOPSIS tsort file DESCRIPTION Tsort produces on the standard output a totally ordered list of items consistent with a partial ordering of items mentioned in the input file If no file is specified the standard input is understood The input consists of pairs of items nonempty strings separated by blanks Pairs of different items indicate ordering Pairs of identical items indicate presence but not ordering SEE ALSO lorder 1 DIAGNOSTICS Odd data there is an odd number of fields in the i
140. a char pw_age char pw_comment char pw_gecos char pw_dir char pw_shell 5 The fields pw_quota and pw_comment are unused the others have meanings described in passwd 5 Getpwent reads the next line opening the file if necessary setpwent rewinds the file endpwent closes it Getpwuid and getpwnam search from the beginning until a matching uid or name is found or until EOF is encountered etc passwd SEE ALSO getlogin 3 getgrent 3 passwd 5 DIAGNOSTICS BUGS Null pointer 0 returned on EOF or error All information is contained in a static area so it must be copied if it is to be saved 7th Edition 1 GETS 3S UNIX Programmer s Manual GETS 35 NAME gets fgets get a string from a stream SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt char gets s char s char fgets s n stream char s FILE stream DESCRIPTION Gets reads a string into s from the standard input stream stdin The string is terminated by a newline character which is replaced in s by a null character Gets returns its argument Fgets reads n 1 characters or up to a newline character whichever comes first from the stream into the string s The last character read into s is followed by a null character Fgets returns its first argu ment SEE ALSO puts 3 getc 3 scanf 3 fread 3 ferror 3 DIAGNOSTICS Gets and fgets return the constant pointer NULL upon end of file or error BUGS Gets deletes a newline
141. a Pee Oe read from file pr 1 be 1 mp 3 monitor 3 lock 2 factor 1 types 5 cat 1 date 1 cal 1 pr 1 nm 1 man 1 pstat 1 dumpdir 1 vp 4 printf 3 nice 1 nice 2 boot 8 exit 2 fork 2 kill 2 popen 3 wait 1 init 8 getpid 2 lock 2 ps 1 times 2 phys 2 wait 2 ptrace 2 kill 1 awk 1 m4 1 prof 1 profil 2 monitor 3 profil 2 prof 1 end 3 units 1 cb 1 make 1 nice 2 assert 3 lint 1 lex 1 struct 1 pkon 2 arithmetic 6 true 1 ps 1 pstat 1 ptrace 2 ptx 1 ungetc 3 puts 3 putc 3 puts 3 putc 3 pwd 1 qsort 3 quiz 6 quot 1 rand 3 ratfor 1 init 8 read 2 getpass 3 read 2 cd eval exec exit export login newgrp open open for exec exit export login newgrp read lseek tell move malloc free mail send or utmp wtmp login references in documents comm select or lorder find ordering join strip remove symbols and calendar unlink mount umount mount or deroff strip rm rmdir mv move or uniq report iostat uniq fseek ftell rewind reversi a game of dramatic col filter rev fseek ftell hp hs ht strncmp strcpy strncpy strlen index sqrt exponential logarithm power square hp RH 11 rp madd msub mult mdiv min mout pow gcd hs RH11 rf RF11 nice nohup C
142. a Supply abscissas automatically they are missing from the input spacing is given by the next argument default 1 A second optional argument is the starting point for automatic abscissas default O or lower limit given by x b Break disconnect the graph after each label in the input c Character string given by next argument is default label for each point g Next argument is grid style O no grid 1 frame with ticks 2 full grid default l Next argument is label for graph m Next argument is mode style of connecting lines 0 disconnected 1 connected default Some devices give distinguishable line styles for other small integers S Save screen don t erase before plotting x 1 If l is present x axis is logarithmic Next 1 or 2 arguments are lower and upper x limits Third argument if present is grid spacing on x axis Normally these quantities are determined automatically y 1 Similarly for y h Next argument is fraction of space for height W Similarly for width r Next argument is fraction of space to move right before plotting u Similarly to move up before plotting t Transpose horizontal and vertical axes Option x now applies to the vertical axis A legend indicating grid range is produced with a grid unless the s option is present If a specified lower limit exceeds the upper limit the axis is reversed SEE ALSO spline 1 plot 1 BUGS Graph stores all points internally and dro
143. a eee edd getgrent getgrgid getgrnam A Ahn Geese getpwent getpwuid getpwnam OMY on E BR avs Aa environ executeafile execl execv environ user environment environment name 000 008 4 O Hh es Se he AG att Con wie EME Geant oO At EEE EQOCONSTTUC S 9 ee R R aE ae ee ee Me ae TR Te eqn neqn checked typeset mathematics eqnchar special character definitions for errno introduction to system calls and ELLOL MESSALES 4 io a ta Be a des Oe error numbers 0 02 0 0008008 intro CLOIS si a O a ta TAR E establish packet protocol o etext edata last locations in program euclidean distance o 0005 eval exec exit export login newgrp evaluate arguments as an expression exec exece environ executeafile exec exit export login newgrp read exece environ execute a file execl execute commands ata latertime execution execution accounting fle execution for an interval ooa a a execution for interval o oo a execution profile s y esoe ee RR RRR g a Y execution time profile ooa aa a execv execle execve execlp execvp exec exit terminate process a exit export login newgrp read readonly exp log log10 pow sqrt exponential
144. a scale factor consisting of an e followed by a possibly signed exponent expression Parentheses are used to alter normal order of evaluation _ expression The result is the negation of the expression expression operator expression Common functions of two arguments are abbreviated by the two arguments separated by an opera tor denoting the function A complete list of operators is given below expression expression expression Functions of an arbitrary number of arguments can be called by an expression followed by the arguments in parentheses separated by commas The expression evaluates to the line number of the entry of the function in the internally stored statements This causes the internal statements to be compiled If the expression evaluates negative a builtin function is called The list of builtin functions appears below name expression expression Each expression is truncated to an integer and used as a specifier for the name The result is syn tactically identical to a name a 1 2 is the same as a 1 2 The truncated expressions are res tricted to values between O and 32767 The following is the list of operators is the assignment operator The left operand must be a name or an array element The result is the right operand Assignment binds right to left amp amp logical and has result zero if either of its arguments are zero It has result one if both its arguments are no
145. according to the printf 3 format given by fmt and returns the resulting string Patterns are arbitrary Boolean combinations 1 Il amp amp and parentheses of regular expressions and rela tional expressions Regular expressions must be surrounded by slashes and are as in egrep Isolated regular expressions in a pattern apply to the entire line Regular expressions may also occur in rela tional expressions 7th Edition 1 AWK 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual AWK 1 A pattern may consist of two patterns separated by a comma in this case the action is performed for all lines between an occurrence of the first pattern and the next occurrence of the second A relational expression is one of the following expression matchop regular expression expression relop expression where a relop is any of the six relational operators in C and a matchop is either for contains or for does not contain A conditional is an arithmetic expression a relational expression or a Boolean combination of these The special patterns BEGIN and END may be used to capture control before the first input line is read and after the last BEGIN must be the first pattern END the last A single character c may be used to separate the fields by starting the program with BEGIN FS c L or by using the Fc option Other variable names with special meanings include NF the number of fields in the current record NR the ordinal number of the current rec
146. addresses driver simulator packet driver simulator vp Versatec printer lseek tell move read write A eae nds 9 banner make long itom madd msub mult mdiv min mout square root 0 exp log log10 bcd XVI nm print name list 2 22 000 Hoden discs eta ls be te a de nohup run a command at low priority non local goto 2 o e o nroff text formatting and typesetting DO OLE a AA nroff troff tbl and eqn constructs null data sink number facts con o aid ah a og Fee SG A wi number generate large primes number generator DUMDEES a a A ad ra POINTS Sud a we WO ar aed e intro errno MUMDETS R a Sy a cal 20 rs object file Object library oi A e octal TTT iis avy ee ae Bk es eke We ak a Be 8 open open for reading or writing open a stream open file descriptor 2 2 022 0005 open for reading or writing 0 openpl et al graphics interface operations strncat stremp strncmp strcpy OPETA O gt lt vo al 0 ee a I Me RE K A options ordering relation for an object library QU PUE pie eet ge ates Bo BN ik ey a PS A ES OORE Zaz Z 0 e TEZ Aber dg ial er eee Sa ay te ad output conversion output conversion output package s aR R ee ee owner and group of a file owner or group Ownership lt e S 218 e Sadie ee ewe Kd a packetdriver oh
147. again but some of the registers will be lost See below for what to do with the tape In restarting after a crash always bring up the system single user This is accomplished by following the directions in boot 8 as modified for your particular installation a single user system is indicated by having a particular value in the switches 173030 unless you ve changed init as the system starts exe cuting When it is running perform a dcheck and icheck 1 on all file systems which could have been in use at the time of the crash If any serious file system problems are found they should be repaired When you are satisfied with the health of your disks check and set the date if necessary then come up multi user This is most easily accomplished by changing the single user value in the switches to some thing else then logging out by typing an EOT To even boot UNIX at all three files and the directories leading to them must be intact First the ini tialization program etc init must be present and executable If it is not the CPU will loop in user mode at location 6 For init to work correctly dev tty8 and bin sh must be present If either does not exist the symptom is best described as thrashing Init will go into a fork exec loop trying to create a Shell with proper standard input and output If you cannot get the system to boot a runnable system must be obtained from a backup medium The root file system may then be doctored as a moun
148. age width for output to address default 80 Set the limit for symbol matches to address default 255 All integers input are regarded as octal Reset integer input as described in EXPRESSIONS Exit from adb Print all non zero variables in octal Print the address map a subprocess Available modifiers are Set breakpoint at address The breakpoint is executed count 1 times before causing a stop Each time the breakpoint is encountered the command c is executed If this command sets dot to zero then the breakpoint causes a stop Delete breakpoint at address Run objfil as a subprocess If address is given explicitly then the program is entered at this point otherwise the program is entered at its standard entry point count specifies how many breakpoints are to be ignored before stopping Arguments to the subprocess may be supplied on the same line as the command An argument starting with lt or gt causes the standard input or output to be established for the command All signals are turned on on entry to the subprocess The subprocess is continued with signal s c s see signal 2 If address is given then the subprocess is continued at this address If no signal is specified then the signal that caused the subprocess to stop is sent Breakpoint skipping is the same as for r As for e except that the subprocess is single stepped count times If there is no current subprocess then objfil is run as a subprocess as for r In this
149. agic number is 0405 the text segment is overlaid on an existing 0411 or 0405 text segment and the existing data segment is preserved The stack will occupy the highest possible locations in the core image from 0177776 8 and growing downwards The stack is automatically extended as required The data segment is only extended as requested by brk 2 The start of the text segment in the file is 020 8 the start of the data segment is 020 S the size of the text the start of the relocation information is 020 S S the start of the symbol table is 020 2 S S if the relocation information is present 020 S S if not The layout of a symbol table entry and the principal flag values that distinguish symbol types are given in the include file Other flag values may occur if an assembly language program defines machine instructions If a symbol s type is undefined external and the value field is non zero the symbol is interpreted by the loader ld as the name of a common region whose size is indicated by the value of the symbol The value of a word in the text or data portions which is not a reference to an undefined external sym bol is exactly that value which will appear in core when the file is executed If a word in the text or data portion involves a reference to an undefined external symbol as indicated by the relocation infor mation for that word then the value of the word as stored in the file is an offset from the associated externa
150. al number giving the owner group and other read write execute permissions see chmod 1 Two decimal number tokens come after the mode they specify the user and group ID s of the owner of the file If the file is a regular file the next token is a pathname whence the contents and size are copied If the file is a block or character special file two decimal number tokens follow which give the major and minor device numbers If the file is a directory mkfs makes the entries and and then reads a list of names and recursively file specifications for the entries in the directory The scan is terminated with the token If the prototype file cannot be opened and its name consists of a string of digits mkfs builds a file sys tem with a single empty directory on it The size of the file system is the value of proto interpreted as a decimal number The number of i nodes is calculated as a function of the filsystem size The boot pro gram is left uninitialized A sample prototype specification follows usr mdec uboot 4872 55 d 777 3 1 usr d 777 3 1 sh 755 3 1 bin sh ken d 755 6 1 bU b 6443100 c0 c 6443100 SEE ALSO BUGS filsys 5 dir 5 bproc 8 There should be some way to specify links 7th Edition 1 MKNOD 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual MKNOD 1M NAME mknod build special file SYNOPSIS etc mknod name e b major minor DESCRIPTION Mknod makes a special file The f
151. all numbers less than or equal to range are equally likely to appear If the respondent makes a mistake the numbers in the problem which was missed become more likely to reappear As a matter of educational philosophy the program will not give correct answers since the learner should in principle be able to calculate them Thus the program is intended to provide drill for some one just past the first learning stage not to teach number facts de novo For almost all users the relevant statistic should be time per problem not percent correct 7th Edition 1 BACKGAMMON 6 UNIX Programmer s Manual BACKGAMMON 6 NAME backgammon the game SYNOPSIS usr games backgammon DESCRIPTION This program does what you expect It will ask whether you need instructions 7th Edition 1 BANNER 6 UNIX Programmer s Manual BANNER 6 NAME banner make long posters SYNOPSIS usr games banner DESCRIPTION Banner reads the standard input and prints it sideways in huge built up letters on the standard output 7th Edition 1 BCD 6 UNIX Programmer s Manual NAME bcd ppt convert to antique media SYNOPSIS usr games bcd text usr games ppt DESCRIPTION Bcd converts the literal text into a form familiar to old timers Ppt converts the standard input into yet another form SEE ALSO dd 1 7th Edition BCD 6 BJ 6 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual BJ 6 bj the game of black jack SYNOPSIS usr games bj
152. always deletes NUL from input 7th Edition 1 TROFF 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TROFF 1 NAME troff nroff text formatting and typesetting SYNOPSIS troff option file nroff option file DESCRIPTION Troff formats text in the named files for printing on a Graphic Systems C A T phototypesetter nroff for typewriter like devices Their capabilities are described in the Nroff Troff user s manual If no file argument is present the standard input is read An argument consisting of a single minus is taken to be a file name corresponding to the standard input The options which may appear in any order so long as they appear before the files are olist Print only pages whose page numbers appear in the comma separated list of numbers and ranges A range N M means pages N through M an initial N means from the beginning to page N and a final N means from N to the end nN Number first generated page N sN Stop every N pages Nroff will halt prior to every N pages default N 1 to allow paper load ing or changing and will resume upon receipt of a newline Troff will stop the phototypesetter every N pages produce a trailer to allow changing cassettes and resume when the typesetter s start button is pressed mname Prepend the macro file usr lib tmac tmac name to the input files raN Set register a one character to N i Read standard input after the input files are ex
153. an unambiguous form Non printing characters are spelled in two digit ascii and long lines are folded 2 n Copy the pattern space to the standard output Replace the pattern space with the next line of input 2 N Append the next line of input to the pattern space with an embedded newline The current line number changes 2 p Print Copy the pattern space to the standard output 2 P Copy the initial segment of the pattern space through the first newline to the standard output Da Quit Branch to the end of the script Do not start a new cycle 2 r rfile Read the contents of rfile Place them on the output before reading the next input line 2 s regular expression replacement flags Substitute the replacement string for instances of the regular expression in the pattern space Any character may be used instead of For a fuller description see ed 1 Flags is zero or more of g Global Substitute for all nonoverlapping instances of the regular expression rather than just the first one p Print the pattern space if a replacement was made w wfile Write Append the pattern space to wfile if a replacement was made 2 t label Test Branch to the command bearing the label if any substitutions have been made since the most recent reading of an input line or execution of a t If label is empty branch to the end of the script 2 w wfile Write Append the pattern space to wfile 2 x Exchange the contents of th
154. an underscore where the parse failed All other diagnostics are self explanatory BUGS Has been known to give core images Catches interrupts even when they are turned off 7th Edition BASENAME 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual BASENAME 1 NAME basename strip filename affixes SYNOPSIS basename string suffix DESCRIPTION Basename deletes any prefix ending in and the suffix if present in string from string and prints the result on the standard output It is normally used inside substitution marks in shell procedures This shell procedure invoked with the argument usr src cmd cat c compiles the named file and moves the output to cat in the current directory cc 1 mv a out basename 1 c SEE ALSO sh 1 7th Edition 1 BC 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual BC 1 NAME be arbitrary precision arithmetic language SYNOPSIS be c 1 file DESCRIPTION Bc is an interactive processor for a language which resembles C but provides unlimited precision arith metic It takes input from any files given then reads the standard input The 1 argument stands for the name of an arbitrary precision math library The syntax for bc programs is as follows L means letter a z E means expression S means statement Comments are enclosed in and Names simple variables L array elements L E The words ibase obase and scale Other operands arbitrarily long numbers with opti
155. and execution a command language newgrp read readonly Commands R om sete ees ae dn Oe eek Ga E Se Ee commands atalatertime 04 common to two sorted files 00 COMIPALA OL 62 5 seve a TE Oe ede a he Be oe compare two files 0220005 COMPALISOD iii Hee eS Ere A A HOA OR ae aes eT 1 gih reg ay ene Pash ee ada p ah BES Bee Compiler tose whe E ies A Compiler ide betes eee Dae BE OA a it completion of process 0 0200 condition command ooo a a configuration tables o consistency check a a E 0 o consistency check o 0000074 construct a filesystem o o CONSTHUCS 0 50 We AN ds ts Se ae Bee es contents of directory o o continue cd eval exec exit export control device ico ae eg aa ed control initialization 2 2000 conventional names 0 0004 CONVETSION e a VEe 27 1 A E TR E A 9 CONVERSION Za rie aa ote Re R aras conversion s ei K K dR R K E R R C conversion program 2 2 ee ee ee convert and copy a file a a convert archives to new format convert ASCII to numbers convert between 3 byte integers andlong convert date and time to ASCH ctime convert to antique media o oo oa a a COOKIES nas oa o R e le ie tt A E ei ching core format of
156. and is Commands returning nonzero status see intro 1 cause make to terminate unless the special target IGNORE is in makefile or the command begins with lt tab gt lt hyphen gt Interrupt and quit cause the target to be deleted unless the target depends on the special name PRE CIOUS Other options i Equivalent to the special entry IGNORE k When a command returns nonzero status abandon work on the current entry but continue on branches that do not depend on the current entry n Trace and print but do not execute the commands needed to update the targets t Touch i e update the modified date of targets without executing any commands r Equivalent to an initial special entry SUFFIXES with no list s Equivalent to the special entry SILENT FILES makefile Makefile SEE ALSO sh 1 touch 1 S I Feldman Make A Program for Maintaining Computer Programs BUGS Some commands return nonzero status inappropriately Use i to overcome the difficulty Commands that are directly executed by the shell notably cd 1 are ineffectual across newlines in make 7th Edition 2 MAN 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual MAN 1 NAME man print sections of this manual SYNOPSIS man option chapter title DESCRIPTION Man locates and prints the section of this manual named title in the specified chapter In this context the word page is often used as a synonym for
157. and writes on the standard output The password is a key that selects a particular transformation If no password is given crypt demands a key from the terminal and turns off printing while the key is being typed in Crypt encrypts and decrypts with the same key crypt key lt clear gt cypher crypt key lt cypher pr will print the clear Files encrypted by crypt are compatible with those treated by the editor ed in encryption mode The security of encrypted files depends on three factors the fundamental method must be hard to solve direct search of the key space must be infeasible sneak paths by which keys or cleartext can become visible must be minimized Crypt implements a one rotor machine designed along the lines of the German Enigma but with a 256 element rotor Methods of attack on such machines are known but not widely moreover the amount of work required is likely to be large The transformation of a key into the internal settings of the machine is deliberately designed to be expensive i e to take a substantial fraction of a second to compute However if keys are restricted to say three lower case letters then encrypted files can be read by expending only a substantial fraction of five minutes of machine time Since the key is an argument to the crypt command it is potentially visible to users executing ps 1 or a derivative To minimize this possibility crypt takes care to destroy any record of the key immediatel
158. appropriate ROM some programs suitable for manual use are given below 2 Type boot 3 When the prompt is given type hp 0 0 unix or rp 0 0 unix depending on whether you are loading from an RP04 5 6 or an RPO3 respectively The first 0 indicates the physical unit number the second indicates the block number of the beginning of the logical file system to be searched See below When the system is running it types a prompt After doing any file system checks and setting the date date 8 a multi user system is brought up by typing an EOT control d in response to the TT prompt Device specifications A device specification has the following form device unit offset where device is the type of the device to be searched unit is the unit number of the device and offset is the block offset of the file system on the device Device is one of the following rp RPO3 hp RP04 5 6 rk RK05 For example the specification hp 1 7000 indicates an RPO3 disk unit 1 and the file system found starting at block 7000 cylinder 35 7th Edition 1 BOOT 8 UNIX Programmer s Manual BOOT 8 ROM programs The following programs to call the primary bootstrap may be installed in read only memories or manually keyed into main memory Each program is position independent but should be placed well above location 0 so it will not be overwritten Each reads a block from the beginning of a device into core location zero The octal w
159. appropriately indented The following options may occur in any order s Input is accepted in standard format i e comments are specified by a c C or in column 1 and continuation lines are specified by a nonzero nonblank character in column 6 Normally a statement whose first nonblank character is not alphanumeric is treated as a continuation i Do not turn computed goto statements into switches Ratfor does not turn switches back into computed goto statements a Turn sequences of else ifs into a non Ratfor switch of the form switch case predl code case pred2 code case pred3 code default code T The case predicates are tested in order the code appropriate to only one case is executed This generalized form of switch statement does not occur in Ratfor b Generate goto s instead of multilevel break statements n Generate goto s instead of multilevel next statements en If n is O default place code within a loop only if it can lead to an iteration of the loop If n is nonzero admit code segments with fewer than n statements to a loop if otherwise the loop would have exits to several places including the segment and the segment can be reached only from the loop FILES tmp struct usr lib struct SEE ALSO f77 1 BUGS Struct knows Fortran 66 syntax but not full Fortran 77 alternate returns IF THEN ELSE etc If an input Fortran program contains identifiers which are reserved words in Ratfo
160. are printed until a null character or until the number of characters indicated by the precision specification is reached however if the precision is O or missing all characters up to a null are printed u The unsigned integer arg is converted to decimal and printed the result will be in the range 0 to 65535 Print a no argument is converted In no case does a non existent or small field width cause truncation of a field padding takes place only if the specified field width exceeds the actual width Characters generated by printf are printed by putc 3 Examples To print a date and time in the form Sunday July 3 10 02 where weekday and month are pointers to null terminated strings printf s s d 02d 02d weekday month day hour min To print a to 5 decimals printf pi 5f 4 atan 1 0 SEE ALSO putc 3 scanf 3 ecvt 3 BUGS Very wide fields gt 128 characters fail 7th Edition 2 PUTC 3S UNIX Programmer s Manual PUTC 3S NAME putc putchar fputc putw put character or word on a stream SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt int putc c stream char c FILE stream putchar c fputc c stream FILE stream putw w stream FILE stream DESCRIPTION Putc appends the character c to the named output stream It returns the character written Putchar c is defined as putc c stdout Fputc behaves like putc but is a genuine function rather than a macro It may be u
161. are the times of last access and modification of the file contents read write or create see times 2 Di_ctime records the time of last modification to the inode or to the file and is used to determine whether it should be dumped 7th Edition 2 FILSYS 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual FILSYS 5 Special files are recognized by their modes and not by i number A block type special file is one which can potentially be mounted as a file system a character type special file cannot though it is not neces sarily character oriented For special files the di_addr field is occupied by the device code see types 5 The device codes of block and character special files overlap Disk addresses of plain files and directories are kept in the array di_addr packed into 3 bytes each The first 10 addresses specify device blocks directly The last 3 addresses are singly doubly and triply indirect and point to blocks of 128 block pointers Pointers in indirect blocks have the type daddr_t see types 5 For block b in a file to exist it is not necessary that all blocks less than b exist A zero block number either in the address words of the i node or in an indirect block indicates that the corresponding block has never been allocated Such a missing block reads as if it contained all zero words SEE ALSO icheck 1 dcheck 1 dir 5 mount 1 stat 2 types 5 7th Edition 3 GROUP 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual GROUP 5 NAME group group fi
162. arlier run or perhaps libraries of F77 compatible routines These programs together with the results of any compilations specified are loaded in the order given to produce an executable program with name a out FILES file fresc input file file o object file 7th Edition 1 F77 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual F77 1 a out loaded output usr lib f77pass compiler Nib c1 pass 2 Nib c2 optional optimizer asr lib libF77 a intrinsic function library asr lib libI77 a Fortran I O library Mlib libc a C library see section 3 SEE ALSO S I Feldman P J Weinberger A Portable Fortran 77 Compiler prof 1 cc 1 Id 1 DIAGNOSTICS The diagnostics produced by f77 itself are intended to be self explanatory Occasional messages may be produced by the loader BUGS The Fortran 66 subset of the language has been exercised extensively the newer features have not 7th Edition FACTOR 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual FACTOR 1 NAME factor primes factor a number generate large primes SYNOPSIS factor number primes DESCRIPTION When factor is invoked without an argument it waits for a number to be typed in If you type in a positive number less than a about 7 2x10 it will factor the number and print its prime factors each one is printed the proper number of times Then it waits for another number It exits if it encounters a zero or any non numeric character If factor is invoked with an argument it factors th
163. ast The priority of a process is passed to a child process by fork 2 For a privileged process to return to normal priority from an unknown state nice should be called successively with arguments 40 goes to priority 20 because of truncation 20 to get to 0 then 0 to maintain compatibility with previous ver sions of this call SEE ALSO nice 1 ASSEMBLER nice 34 priority in r0 sys nice 7th Edition 1 OPEN 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual OPEN 2 NAME open open for reading or writing SYNOPSIS open name mode char name DESCRIPTION Open opens the file name for reading if mode is 0 writing if mode is 1 or for both reading and writ ing if mode is 2 Name is the address of a string of ASCII characters representing a path name ter minated by a null character The file is positioned at the beginning byte 0 The returned file descriptor must be used for subsequent calls for other input output functions on the file SEE ALSO creat 2 read 2 write 2 dup 2 close 2 DIAGNOSTICS The value 1 is returned if the file does not exist if one of the necessary directories does not exist or is unreadable if the file is not readable resp writable or if too many files are open ASSEMBLER open 5 sys open name mode file descriptor in r0 7th Edition 1 PAUSE 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual PAUSE 2 NAME pause stop until signal SYNOPSIS pause DESCRIPTION Pause never
164. ast format is used The format letters available are as follows o 2 Print 2 bytes in octal All octal numbers output by adb are preceded by 0 O 4 Print 4 bytes in octal q 2 Print in signed octal Q 4 Print long signed octal d 2 Print in decimal D4 Print long decimal Xx 2 Print 2 bytes in hexadecimal X 4 Print 4 bytes in hexadecimal u 2 Print as an unsigned decimal number U 4 Print long unsigned decimal f 4 Print the 32 bit value as a floating point number F 8 Print double floating point b 1 Print the addressed byte in octal ed Print the addressed character C1 Print the addressed character using the following escape convention Character values 000 to 040 are printed as followed by the corresponding character in the range 0100 to 0140 The character is printed as 7th Edition 2 ADB 1 newline UNIX Programmer s Manual ADB 17 Print the addressed characters until a zero character is reached Sn Print a string using the escape convention n is the length of the string including its zero terminator Y 4 Print 4 bytes in date format see ctime 3 Print as PDP11 instructions n is the number of bytes occupied by the instruction This style of printing causes variables 1 and 2 to be set to the offset parts of the source and destination respectively a 0 Print the value of dot in symbolic form Symbols are checked to ensure that they have an appropriate type as indicated below wn 3 5
165. at executes the sync 2 primitive every 30 seconds This insures that the file sys tem is fairly up to date in case of a crash This command should not be executed directly but should be executed out of the initialization shell command file SEE ALSO sync 2 sync 1 init 8 BUGS With update running if the CPU is halted just as the sync is executed a file system can be damaged This is partially due to DEC hardware that writes zeros when NPR requests fail A fix would be to have sync 1 temporarily increment the system time by at least 30 seconds to trigger the execution of update This would give 30 seconds grace to halt the CPU 7th Edition 1
166. ause it is implemented as a macro getc treats a stream argument with side effects incorrectly In particular getc f doesn t work sensibly 7th Edition 1 GETENV 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual GETENV 3 NAME getenv value for environment name SYNOPSIS char getenv name char name DESCRIPTION Getenv searches the environment list see environ 5 for a string of the form name value and returns value if such a string is present otherwise 0 NULL SEE ALSO environ 5 exec 2 7th Edition 1 GETGRENT 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual GETGRENT 3 NAME getgrent getgrgid geternam setgrent endgrent get group file entry SYNOPSIS include lt grp h gt struct group getgrent struct group getgrgid gid int gid struct group getgrnam name char name int setgrent int endgrent DESCRIPTION FILES Getgrent getgrgid and getgrnam each return pointers to an object with the following structure contain ing the broken out fields of a line in the group file struct group see getgrent 3 char or name char or passwd int gr_gid char or mem T The members of this structure are gr name The name of the group gr passwd The encrypted password of the group gr gid The numerical group ID gr mem Null terminated vector of pointers to the individual member names Getgrent simply reads the next line while getgrgid and getgrnam search until a matching gid or name is found
167. ber command arguments nohup command arguments DESCRIPTION Nice executes command with low scheduling priority If the number argument is present the priority is incremented higher numbers mean lower priorities by that amount up to a limit of 20 The default number is 10 The super user may run commands with priority higher than normal by using a negative priority e g 10 Nohup executes command immune to hangup and terminate signals from the controlling terminal The priority is incremented by 5 Nohup should be invoked from the shell with amp in order to prevent it from responding to interrupts by or stealing the input from the next person who logs in on the same ter minal FILES nohup out standard output and standard error file under nohup SEE ALSO nice 2 DIAGNOSTICS Nice returns the exit status of the subject command 7th Edition 1 NM 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual NM 1 NAME nm print name list SYNOPSIS nm gnopru file DESCRIPTION Nm prints the name list symbol table of each object file in the argument list If an argument is an archive a listing for each object file in the archive will be produced If no file is given the symbols in a out are listed Each symbol name is preceded by its value blanks if undefined and one of the letters U undefined A absolute T text segment symbol D data segment symbol B bss segment symbol or C common symbol I
168. bering references use labels as specified in a reference data line beginning x by default x is L Im n Instead of numbering references use labels made from the senior author s last name and the year of publication Only the first m letters of the last name and the last n digits of the date are used If either m or n is omitted the entire name or date respectively is used p Take the next argument as a file of references to be searched The default file is searched last n Do not search the default file Sort references by fields whose key letters are in the keys string permute reference numbers in text accordingly Implies e The key letters in keys may be followed by a number to indicate how many such fields are used with taken as a very large number The default is AD which sorts on the senior author and then date to sort for example on all authors and then title use sA T To use your own references put them in the format described in pubindex 1 They can be searched more rapidly by running pubindex 1 on them before using refer failure to index results in a linear search 7th Edition 1 REFER 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual REFER 1 When refer is used with eqn neqn or tbl refer should be first to minimize the volume of data passed through pipes FILES usr dict papers directory of default publication lists and indexes usr lib refer directory of programs SEE ALSO 7th Edition RESTOR 1M NAME UN
169. blocks and directory blocks The number of free blocks The number of blocks missing i e not in any file nor in the free list The s option causes icheck to ignore the actual free list and reconstruct a new one by rewriting the super block of the file system The file system should be dismounted while this is done if this is not possible for example if the root file system has to be salvaged care should be taken that the system is quiescent and that it is rebooted immediately afterwards so that the old bad in core copy of the super block will not continue to be used Notice also that the words in the super block which indicate the size of the free list and of the i list are believed If the super block has been curdled these words will have to be patched The s option causes the normal output reports to be suppressed Following the b option is a list of block numbers whenever any of the named blocks turns up in a file a diagnostic is produced Icheck is faster if the raw version of the special file is used since it reads the i list many blocks at a time FILES Default file systems vary with installation SEE ALSO dcheck 1 ncheck 1 filsys 5 clri 1 DIAGNOSTICS For duplicate blocks and bad blocks which lie outside the file system icheck announces the difficulty the i number and the kind of block involved If a read error is encountered the block number of the bad block is printed and icheck considers it to contain 0
170. c back on an input stream That character will be returned by the next getc call on that stream Ungetc returns c One character of pushback is guaranteed provided something has been read from the stream and the stream is actually buffered Attempts to push EOF are rejected Fseek 3 erases all memory of pushed back characters SEE ALSO getc 3 setbuf 3 fseek 3 DIAGNOSTICS Ungetc returns EOF if it can t push a character back 7th Edition 1 CAT 4 UNIX Programmer s Manual CAT 4 NAME cat phototypesetter interface DESCRIPTION Cat provides the interface to a Graphic Systems C A T phototypesetter Bytes written on the file specify font size and other control information as well as the characters to be flashed The coding will not be described here Only one process may have this file open at a time It is write only FILES dev cat SEE ALSO troff 1 Phototypesetter interface specification 7th Edition 1 DN 4 UNIX Programmer s Manual DN 4 NAME dn DN 11 ACU interface DESCRIPTION The dn files are write only The permissible codes are 0 9 dial 0 9 G dial J dial 4 second delay for second dial tone lt end of number The entire telephone number must be presented in a single write system call It is recommended that an end of number code be given even though not all ACU s actually require it FILES dev dnOconnected to 801 with dpO dev dn1 not currently connected dev dn2not cu
171. ch move to start it up again to print the board regardless to quit without dishonor a 2 B Oo to print the score Reversi also recognizes several commands which are valid only at the start of the game before any moves have been made They are f to let the machine go first hn to ask for a handicap of from one to four corner squares If you re good you can give the machine a handicap by typing a negative number In to set the amount of lookahead used by the machine in searching for moves Zero means none at all Four is the default Greater than six means you may fall asleep waiting for the machine to move tn to tell reversi that you will only need n seconds to consider each move If you fail to respond in the alloted time you forfeit your turn If reversi is given a file name as an argument it will checkpoint the game move by move by dumping the board onto file The r option will cause reversi to restart the game from file and continue logging 7th Edition 1 TTT 6 UNIX Programmer s Manual TTT 6 NAME ttt cubic tic tac toe SYNOPSIS usr games ttt usr games cubic DESCRIPTION Ttt is the X and O game popular in the first grade This is a learning program that never makes the same mistake twice Although it learns it learns slowly It must lose nearly 80 games to completely know the game Cubic plays three dimensional tic tac toe on a 4x4x4 board Moves are specified as a sequence of thr
172. cial read and write routines and in not being inheritable across calls of exec 2 Its prime use is on systems that lack pk These functions use alarm 2 simultaneous use of alarm for other puposes may cause trouble 7th Edition deprecated 1 PLOT 3X UNIX Programmer s Manual PLOT 3X NAME plot openpl et al graphics interface SYNOPSIS openpl erase label s char sl line x1 yl x2 y2 circle x y r arc x y x0 y0 x1 y1 move x y cont x y point x y linemod s char sl l space x0 y0 x1 y1 closepl DESCRIPTION These subroutines generate graphic output in a relatively device independent manner See plot 5 for a description of their effect Openpl must be used before any of the others to open the device for writing Closepl flushes the output String arguments to label and linemod are null terminated and do not contain newlines Various flavors of these functions exist for different output devices They are obtained by the following Id 1 options Iplot device independent graphics stream on standard output for plot 1 filters 1300 GSI 300 terminal 1300s GSI 300S terminal 1450 DASI 450 terminal 14014 Tektronix 4014 terminal SEE ALSO plot 5 plot 1 graph 1 7th Edition 1 POPEN 35 UNIX Programmer s Manual POPEN 35 NAME popen pclose initiate I O to from a process SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt FILE popen command type char command type pclose
173. ciates a stream with it Fopen returns a pointer to be used to identify the stream in subsequent operations Type is a character string having one of the following values Wa r open for reading w create for writing a append open for writing at end of file or create for writing Freopen substitutes the named file in place of the open stream It returns the original value of stream The original stream is closed Freopen is typically used to attach the preopened constant names stdin stdout stderr to specified files Fdopen associates a stream with a file descriptor obtained from open dup creat or pipe 2 The type of the stream must agree with the mode of the open file SEE ALSO open fclose 3 DIAGNOSTICS Fopen and freopen return the pointer NULL if filename cannot be accessed BUGS Fdopen is not portable to systems other than UNIX 7th Edition 1 FREAD 3S UNIX Programmer s Manual FREAD 3S NAME fread fwrite buffered binary input output SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt fread ptr sizeof ptr nitems stream FILE stream fwrite ptr sizeof ptr nitems stream FILE stream DESCRIPTION Fread reads into a block beginning at ptr nitems of data of the type of ptr from the named input stream It returns the number of items actually read Fwrite appends at most nitems of data of the type of ptr beginning at ptr to the named output stream It returns the number of items actually writ
174. cks long The hs files access the disk via the system s normal buffering mechanism and may be read and written without regard to physical disk records There is also a raw inteface which provides for direct transmission between the disk and the user s read or write buffer A single read or write call results in exactly one I O operation and therefore raw I O is considerably more efficient when many words are transmitted The names of the raw HS files begin with rhs The same minor device considerations hold for the raw interface as for the normal interface In raw I O the buffer must begin on a word boundary and counts should be a multiple of 512 bytes a disk block Likewise seek calls should specify a multiple of 512 bytes FILES dev hs dev rhs 7th Edition 1 HT 4 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual HT 4 ht RH 11 TU 16 magtape interface DESCRIPTION The files mt0 mtl refer to the DEC RH TM TU16 magtape When opened for reading or writing the tape is not rewound When closed it is rewound unless the 0200 bit is on see below If the tape was open for writing a double end of file is written If the tape is not to be rewound the tape is back spaced to just between the two tapemarks A standard tape consists of a series of 512 byte records terminated by a double end of file To the extent possible the system makes it possible if inefficient to treat the tape like any other file Seeks have their usual
175. compares the link count in each i node with the number of directory entries by which it is referenced If the file system is not specified a set of default file sys tems is checked The i flag is followed by a list of i numbers when one of those i numbers turns up in a directory the number the i number of the directory and the name of the entry are reported The program is fastest if the raw version of the special file is used since the i list is read in large chunks FILES Default file systems vary with installation SEE ALSO icheck 1 filsys 5 clri 1 ncheck 1 DIAGNOSTICS When a file turns up for which the link count and the number of directory entries disagree the relevant facts are reported Allocated files which have 0 link count and no entries are also listed The only dangerous situation occurs when there are more entries than links if entries are removed so the link count drops to 0 the remaining entries point to thin air They should be removed When there are more links than entries or there is an allocated file with neither links nor entries some disk space may be lost but the situation will not degenerate BUGS Since dcheck is inherently two pass in nature extraneous diagnostics may be produced if applied to active file systems 7th Edition 1 DD 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual DD 1 NAME dd convert and copy a file SYNOPSIS dd option value DESCRIPTION Dd copies the specified input file to t
176. connect primitive inverse of connect is not provided A non blocking flow control strategy based on messages defined in mpxio 5 should not be attempted by novices the enabling ioctl command should be protected The join operation could be subsumed by connect A mechanism is needed for moving a channel from one location in an mpx tree to another 7th Edition 3 MPXCALL 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual MPXCALL 2 NAME mpxcall multiplexor and channel interface SYNOPSIS mpxcall arg1 arg2 arg3 cmd DESCRIPTION Mpxcall supplies a primitive interface to the kernel used by the routines listed below Each routine that uses mpxcall passes an integer cmd as the fourth argument These are defined in usr include mx h Mpxcall always returns an integer which is to be interpreted in accordance with the definition of cmd SEE ALSO group 2 join 2 extract 2 connect 2 chan 2 attach 2 detach 2 DIAGNOSTICS The value 1 is returned on error 7th Edition 1 NICE 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual NICE 2 NAME nice set program priority SYNOPSIS nice incr DESCRIPTION The scheduling priority of the process is augmented by incr Positive priorities get less service than normal Priority 10 is recommended to users who wish to execute long running programs without flak from the administration Negative increments are ignored except on behalf of the super user The priority is limited to the range 20 most urgent to 20 le
177. control X set kill character to c X works here also cr0 cr1 cr2 cr3 select style of delay for carriage return see ioctl 2 nl0 nli nl2 nl3 select style of delay for linefeed tab0 tab1 tab2 tab3 HU ff1 bs0 hs tty33 tty37 vt05 tn300 ti700 tek hup hup 0 select style of delay for tab select style of delay for form feed select style of delay for backspace set all modes suitable for the Teletype Corporation Model 33 terminal set all modes suitable for the Teletype Corporation Model 37 terminal set all modes suitable for Digital Equipment Corp VTOS terminal set all modes suitable for a General Electric TermiNet 300 set all modes suitable for Texas Instruments 700 series terminal set all modes suitable for Tektronix 4014 terminal hang up dataphone on last close do not hang up dataphone on last close hang up phone line immediately 50 75 110 134 150 200 300 600 1200 1800 2400 4800 9600 exta extb SEE ALSO Set terminal baud rate to the number given if possible These are the speeds supported by the DH 11 interface ioctl 2 tabs 1 7th Edition SU 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SU 1 NAME su substitute user id temporarily SYNOPSIS su userid DESCRIPTION Su demands the password of the specified userid and if it is given changes to that userid and invokes the Shell sh 1 without changing the current directory or the user environment see environ 5 The new user ID stays i
178. copies in the files Option i ignores interrupts option a causes the output to be appended to the files rather than overwriting them 7th Edition 1 TEST 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TEST 1 NAME test condition command SYNOPSIS test expr DESCRIPTION test evaluates the expression expr and if its value is true then returns zero exit status otherwise a non zero exit status is returned test returns a non zero exit if there are no arguments The following primitives are used to construct expr r file true if the file exists and is readable w file true if the file exists and is writable f file true if the file exists and is not a directory d file true if the file exists and is a directory s file true if the file exists and has a size greater than zero t fildes true if the open file whose file descriptor number is fildes 1 by default is associated with a terminal device z sl true if the length of string s is zero n sl true if the length of the string s is nonzero sl s2 true if the strings s and s2 are equal sl s2 true if the strings s and s2 are not equal sl true if s is not the null string nl eq n2 true if the integers n7 and n2 are algebraically equal Any of the comparisons ne gt ge It or le may be used in place of eq These primaries may be combined with the following operators unary negation operator a binary and operator 0 binary o
179. cords a group of records describing directories a group of records describing files The format of the header record and of the first record of each description as given in the include file lt dumprestor h gt is define NTREC 20 define MLEN 16 define MSIZ 4096 define TS_TAPE 1 define TS_INODE 2 define TS BITS 3 define TS ADDR 4 define TS END 5 define TS CLRI 6 define MAGIC int 60011 define CHECKSUM int 84446 struct spel int c_type time_t C date time_t c_ddate int c_volume daddr t c taped ino t c_inumber int c_magic int c_checksum struct dinodec_dinode int C count char c_addr BSIZE spel struct idates char id_name 16 char id_incno time_t 1d_ddate T NTREC is the number of 512 byte records in a physical tape block MLEN is the number of bits in a bit map word MSIZ is the number of bit map words 7th Edition 1 DUMP 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual DUMP 5 FILES The TS entries are used in the c_type field to indicate what sort of header this is The types and their meanings are as follows TS TAPE Tape volume label TS_INODE A file or directory follows The c_dinode field is a copy of the disk inode and contains bits telling what sort of file this is TS_BITS A bit map follows This bit map has a one bit for each inode that was dumped TS_ADDR A subrecord of a file description See c_addr below TS_END End of tape record TS_CLRI A bit map follows This bit map c
180. core image file G re allocation sels K sor a ee we ewe core damage file T iaa Se Ree a COPE MEMO ba a add Bee dea oh ek GEES cos tan asin acos atan atan2 cosh tanh hyperbolic functions CONME as Ves e ta seks A asc abe ae RR KN oe dale SOS count blocks in a Hile CPs COPY ry Ww Bi ce ae Deed tees T ID ay da oie ae crash what to do when the system crashes creat create a new file 4 create an interprocess channel creation mode mask cron clock daemon crypt encode decode o crypt setkey encrypt DES encryption ctime localtime gmtime asctime timezone cu Cal UNIX a i ee ak ee A a we eS CUBIC MC tite ss ai Seah eo os ee ae ee 2 CUVE Z oP se tite Ot nan Ate MG wheat ta da o 16 T aT a ee ee Betcha nets eet Be He Sagal ZO ap eS UA ihe 5 a at eed Sie ee lt Gata A a ter BRS ey eS a eee T data base subroutines 0 00 dbminit cron 8 close 2 fclose 3 clri 1 cmp 1 col 1 comm 1 system 3 test 1 time 1 nice 1 uux 1 sh 1 intro 1 at 1 comm 1 diff 1 cmp 1 diff3 1 cc 1 f77 1 yacc 1 wait 1 test 1 mkconf 1 dcheck 1 icheck 1 mkfs 1 deroff 1 1s 1 sh 1 ioctl 2 init 8 term 7 ecvt 3 printf 3 scanf 3 units 1 dd 1 arcv 1 atof 3 13tol 3 ctime 3 bed 6 ching 6 cp 1
181. cro whose name is the first argu ment Each occurrence of n in the replacement text where n is a digit is replaced by the n th argument Argument 0 is the name of the macro missing arguments are replaced by the null string undefine removes the definition of the macro named in its argument ifdef If the first argument is defined the value is the second argument otherwise the third If there is no third argument the value is null The word unix is predefined on UNIX versions of m4 changequote Change quote characters to the first and second arguments Changequote without arguments restores the original values i e divert M4 maintains 10 output streams numbered 0 9 The final output is the concatenation of the streams in numerical order initially stream O is the current stream The divert macro changes the current output stream to its digit string argument Output diverted to a stream other than 0 through 9 is discarded undivert causes immediate output of text from diversions named as arguments or all diversions if no argument Text may be undiverted into another diversion Undiverting discards the diverted text divnum returns the value of the current output stream dnl reads and discards characters up to and including the next newline ifelse has three or more arguments If the first argument is the same string as the second then the value is the third argument If not and if there are more than four arguments the p
182. ction implies this The named files are extracted from the tape If the named file matches a directory whose con tents had been written onto the tape this directory is recursively extracted The owner modification time and mode are restored if possible If no file argument is given the entire content of the tape is extracted Note that if multiple entries specifying the same file are on the tape the last one overwrites all earlier The names of the specified files are listed each time they occur on the tape If no file argu ment is given all of the names on the tape are listed The named files are added to the tape if either they are not already there or have been modified since last put on the tape Create a new tape writing begins on the beginning of the tape instead of after the last file This command implies r The following characters may be used in addition to the letter which selects the function desired 0 7 Y FILES dev mt tmp tar 7th Edition This modifier selects the drive on which the tape is mounted The default is 1 Normally tar does its work silently The v verbose option causes it to type the name of each file it treats preceded by the function letter With the t function v gives more informa tion about the tape entries than just the name causes far to print the action to be taken followed by file name then wait for user confirmation If a word beginning with y is given the actio
183. current directory you must use a path name Full path names begin with the name of the root directory of the whole file system After the slash comes the name of each directory containing the next sub directory followed by a until finally the file name is reached For example usr lem filex refers to the file filex in the directory lem lem is itself a subdirec tory of usr usr springs directly from the root directory If your current directory has subdirectories the path names of files therein begin with the name of the subdirectory with no prefixed A path name may be used anywhere a file name is required Important commands which modify the contents of files are cp 1 mv 1 and rm 1 which respectively copy move i e rename and remove files To find out the status of files or directories use s 1 See mkdir 1 for making directories and rmdir in rm 1 for destroying them For a fuller discussion of the file system see The UNIX Time Sharing System by Ken Thompson and Dennis Ritchie It may also be useful to glance through section 2 of this manual which discusses sys tem calls even if you don t intend to deal with the system at that level Writing a program To enter the text of a source program into a UNIX file use the editor ed 1 The three principal languages in UNIX are provided by the C compiler cc 1 the Fortran compiler f77 1 and the assembler as 1 After the program text has been ente
184. current location plus offset If whence is 2 the pointer is set to the size of the file plus offset The returned value is the resulting pointer location The obsolete function tell fildes is identical to lseek fildes OL 1 Seeking far beyond the end of a file then writing creates a gap or hole which occupies no physical space and reads as zeros SEE ALSO open 2 creat 2 fseek 3 DIAGNOSTICS 1 is returned for an undefined file descriptor seek on a pipe or seek to a position before the beginning of file BUGS Lseek is a no op on character special files ASSEMBLER Iseek 19 file descriptor in r0 sys Iseek offset1 offset2 whence Offset and offset2 are the high and low words of offset rO and rl contain the pointer upon return 7th Edition 1 MKNOD 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual MKNOD 2 NAME mknod make a directory or a special file SYNOPSIS mknod name mode addr char name DESCRIPTION Mknod creates a new file whose name is the null terminated string pointed to by name The mode of the new file including directory and special file bits is initialized from mode The protection part of the mode is modified by the process s mode mask see umask 2 The first block pointer of the i node is initialized from addr For ordinary files and directories addr is normally zero In the case of a spe cial file addr specifies which special file Mknod may be invoked only by the super user SEE ALSO
185. d E filename This command is the same as e except that no diagnostic results when no w has been given since the last buffer alteration f filename The filename command prints the currently remembered file name If filename is given the currently remembered file name is changed to filename 1 g regular expression command list In the global command the first step is to mark every line which matches the given regular expression Then for every such line the given command list is executed with initially set to that line A single command or the first of multiple commands appears on the same line with the global command All lines of a multi line list except the last line must be ended with VW A i and c commands and associated input are permitted the terminating input mode may be omit ted if it would be on the last line of the command list The commands g and v are not permitted in the command list i lt text gt This command inserts the given text before the addressed line is left at the last line input or 1f there were none at the line before the addressed line This command differs from the a com mand only in the placement of the text 1 j This command joins the addressed lines into a single line intermediate newlines simply disappear is left at the resulting line kx The mark command marks the addressed line with name x which must be a lower case letter The address f
186. d watch out for P and perm onum True if the file permission flags exactly match the octal number onum see chmod 1 If onum is prefixed by a minus sign more flag bits 017777 see stat 2 become significant and the flags are compared flags amp onum onum type c True if the type of the file is c where c is b e d or f for block special file character spe cial file directory or plain file links n True if the file has n links user uname True if the file belongs to the user uname login name or numeric user ID group gname True if the file belongs to group gname group name or numeric group ID size n True if the file is n blocks long 512 bytes per block inum n True if the file has inode number n atime n True if the file has been accessed in n days mtime n True if the file has been modified in n days exec command True if the executed command returns a zero value as exit status The end of the command must be punctuated by an escaped semicolon A command argument is replaced by the current pathname ok command Like exec except that the generated command is written on the standard output then the standard input is read and the command executed only upon response y print Always true causes the current pathname to be printed newer file True if the current file has been modified more recently than the argument file The primaries may be comb
187. d by the numbers 0 through 14 An index i and file descriptor xd for the root of an mpx tree are required as arguments to most of the commands described below Indices also serve as channel identifiers in the record formats given in mpxio 5 Since 1 is not a valid index it can be returned as a error indication by subroutines that nor mally return indices The operating system informs the process managing an mpx file of changes in the status of channels attached to the file by generating messages that are read along with data from the channels The form and content of these messages is described in mpxio 5 join fd xd establishes a connection channel between an mpx file and another object Fd is an open file descriptor for a character device or an mpx file and xd is the file descriptor of an mpx file Join returns the index for the new channel if the operation succeeds and 1 if it does not Following join fd may still be used in any system call that would have been meaningful before the join operation Thus a process can read and write directly to fd as well as access it via xd If the number of channels required for a tree of mpx files exceeds the number of open files permitted a process by the operating system some of the file descriptors can be released using the standard close 2 call Follow ing a close on an active file descriptor for a channel or internal mpx node that object may still be accessed through the root of the tree c
188. d is useful then use c ri on its inode and remove any directory entries that do exist Finally there may be inodes reported by dcheck that have O links and O entries These occur on the root device when the system is stopped with pipes open and on other file systems when the system stops with files that have been deleted while still open A clri will free the inode and an icheck s will recover any missing blocks 7th Edition 1 CRASH 8 UNIX Programmer s Manual CRASH 8 Why did it crash UNIX types a message on the console typewriter when it voluntarily crashes Here is the current list of such messages with enough information to provide a hope at least of the remedy The message has the form panic possibly accompanied by other information Left unstated in all cases is the possibility that hardware or software error produced the message in some unexpected way blkdev The getblk routine was called with a nonexistent major device as argument Definitely hardware or software error devtab Null device table entry for the major device used as argument to getblk Definitely hardware or software error iinit An I O error reading the super block for the root file system during initialization out of inodes A mounted file system has no more i nodes when creating a file Sorry the device isn t available the icheck should tell you no fs A device has disappeared from the mounted device table Definitely hardware or softwa
189. den digits parens etc it is necessary to quote them as in bold 12 3 7th Edition 2 22 74 2 EXPR 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual EXPR 1 NAME expr evaluate arguments as an expression SYNOPSIS expr arg DESCRIPTION The arguments are taken as an expression After evaluation the result is written on the standard output Each token of the expression is a separate argument The operators and keywords are listed below The list is in order of increasing precedence with equal precedence operators grouped expr expr yields the first expr if it is neither null nor 0 otherwise yields the second expr expr amp expr yields the first expr if neither expr is null or 0 otherwise yields 0 expr relop expr where relop is one of lt lt gt gt yields 1 if the indicated comparison is true 0 if false The comparison is numeric if both expr are integers otherwise lexicographic expr expr expr expr addition or subtraction of the arguments expr expr expr expr expr expr multiplication division or remainder of the arguments expr expr The matching operator compares the string first argument with the regular expression second argument regular expression syntax is the same as that of ed 1 The pattern symbols can be used to select a portion of the first argument Otherwise the matching operator yields the number of characters matched 0 on failure
190. des calls for monitor with default parame ters monitor needn t be called explicitly except to gain fine control over profiling Monitor is an interface to profil 2 Lowpc and highpc are the addresses of two functions buffer is the address of a user supplied array of bufsize short integers Monitor arranges to record a histogram of periodically sampled values of the program counter and of counts of calls of certain functions in the buffer The lowest address sampled is that of lowpc and the highest is just below highpc At most nfunc call counts can be kept only calls of functions compiled with the profiling option p of cc 1 are recorded For the results to be significant especially where there are small heavily used routines it is suggested that the buffer be no more than a few times smaller than the range of locations sampled To profile the entire program it is sufficient to use extern etext monitor int 2 etext buf bufsize nfunc Etext lies just above all the program text see end 3 To stop execution monitoring and write the results on the file mon out use monitor 0 then prof 1 can be used to examine the results FILES mon out SEE ALSO prof 1 profil 2 cc 1 7th Edition 1 MP 3X NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual MP 3X itom madd msub mult mdiv min mout pow gcd rpow multiple precision integer arithmetic SYNOPSIS typedef struct int len short val mint madd a b c
191. differential file comparator SYNOPSIS diff efbh file file2 DESCRIPTION Diff tells what lines must be changed in two files to bring them into agreement If filel file2 is the standard input is used If file file2 is a directory then a file in that directory whose file name is the same as the file name of file2 file is used The normal output contains lines of these forms nl an3 n4 nl n2 d n3 nl n2 c n3 n4 These lines resemble ed commands to convert file into file2 The numbers after the letters pertain to file2 In fact by exchanging a for d and reading backward one may ascertain equally how to convert file2 into file As in ed identical pairs where n n2 or n3 n4 are abbreviated as a single number Following each of these lines come all the lines that are affected in the first file flagged by lt then all the lines that are affected in the second file flagged by gt The b option causes trailing blanks spaces and tabs to be ignored and other strings of blanks to com pare equal The e option produces a script of a c and d commands for the editor ed which will recreate file2 from filel The f option produces a similar script not useful with ed in the opposite order In connection with e the following shell program may help maintain multiple versions of a file Only an ancestral file 1 and a chain of version to version ed scripts 2 3 made by diff need
192. e FILES dev mt dev rmt SEE ALSO tp 1 BUGS The magtape system is supposed to be able to take 64 drives Such addressing has never been tried Taking a drive off line or running off the end of tape while writing have been known to hang the sys tem If any non data error is encountered it refuses to do anything more until closed In raw I O there should be a way to perform forward and backward record and file spacing and to write an EOF mark explicitly 7th Edition 1 MEM 4 UNIX Programmer s Manual MEM 4 NAME mem kmem core memory DESCRIPTION Mem is a special file that is an image of the core memory of the computer It may be used for exam ple to examine and even to patch the system Kmem is the same as mem except that kernel virtual memory rather than physical memory is accessed Byte addresses are interpreted as memory addresses References to non existent locations return errors Examining and patching device registers is likely to lead to unexpected results when read only or write only bits are present On PDP11 s the I O page begins at location 0160000 of kmem and per process data for the current pro cess begins at 0140000 FILES dev mem dev kmem BUGS On PDP11 s memory files are accessed one byte at a time an inapproriate method for some device registers 7th Edition 1 NULL 4 UNIX Programmer s Manual NULL 4 NAME null data sink DESCRIPTION Data written on a nu
193. e rt command of nroff and out put resulting from use of the tbl 1 preprocessor Although col accepts half line motions in its input it normally does not emit them on output Instead text that would appear between lines is moved to the next lower full line boundary This treatment can be suppressed by the f fine option in this case the output from col may contain forward half line feeds ESC 9 but will still never contain either kind of reverse line motion If the b option is given col assumes that the output device in use is not capable of backspacing In this case if several characters are to appear in the same place only the last one read will be taken The control characters SO ASCII code 017 and SI 016 are assumed to start and end text in an alter nate character set The character set primary or alternate associated with each printing character read is remembered on output SO and SI characters are generated where necessary to maintain the correct treatment of each character Col normally converts white space to tabs to shorten printing time If the x option is given this conversion is suppressed All control characters are removed from the input except space backspace tab return newline ESC 033 followed by one of 789 SI SO and VT 013 This last character is an alternate form of full reverse line feed for compatibility with some other hardware conventions All other non printing char acters ar
194. e write to another user write on a file write pointer soam oit aa an write toallusers write to another user WHINE e e ae a a wtmp login records word from stream Word gam s ies tr Bk eae eS R word on a stream words word games wump the game of hunt the wumpus xget enroll secret mail y0 yl yn bessel functions yacc yet another compiler compiler wc 1 getc 3 words 6 putc 3 words 6 cd 1 pwd 1 write 2 write 1 write 2 lseek 2 wall 1 write 1 open 2 utmp 5 wump 6 xsend 1 j0 3 yacc 1 INTRO 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual INTRO 1 NAME intro introduction to commands DESCRIPTION This section describes publicly accessible commands in alphabetic order Certain distinctions of purpose are made in the headings 1 Commands of general utility 1C Commands for communication with other systems 1G Commands used primarily for graphics and computer aided design 1M Commands used primarily for system maintenance The word local at the foot of a page means that the command is not intended for general distribution SEE ALSO DIAGNOSTICS Section 6 for computer games How to get started in the Introduction DIAGNOSTICS Upon termination each command returns two bytes of status one supplied by the system giving the cause for termination and in the cas
195. e a aS reverse line feeds reverse lines fanle reversi a game of dramatic reversals rewind reposition astreaam rf RF11 RS11 fixed head disk file RH 11 RP04 RPOS RPO6 moving head disk RH11 RS03 RS04 fixed head disk file RH 11 TU 16 magtape interface rindex string operations strncat stremp rk RK 11 RK03 or RKOS disk rm rmdir remove unlink files roff format text Ss o ei a eA a we a rp RP 11 RP03 moving head disk RP04 RPOS RPO6 moving head disk RP 11 RP03 moving head disk rpow multiple precision integer arithmetic RSO03 RS04 fixed head disk file RS11 fixed head disk file run a command at low priority sa accton system accounting sbrk break change core allocation scanf fscanf sscanf formatted input scanning and processing language schedule signal after specified time search a file for a pattern o Secret Malls a es R it A Bt edn tl Aas ed sections of this manual sed stream editor o o select or reject lines common to two sorted send or receive mail among users send signal to a process o SED Z K A A a A hes Sa ee Sh eG
196. e accessibility of file SYNOPSIS access name mode char name DESCRIPTION Access checks the given file name for accessibility according to mode which is 4 read 2 write or 1 execute or a combination thereof Specifying mode O tests whether the directories leading to the file can be searched and the file exists An appropriate error indication is returned if name cannot be found or if any of the desired access modes would not be granted On disallowed accesses 1 is returned and the error code is in errno 0 is returned from successful tests The user and group IDs with respect to which permission is checked are the real UID and GID of the process so this call is useful to set UID programs Notice that it is only access bits that are checked A directory may be announced as writable by access but an attempt to open it for writing will fail although files may be created there a file may look exe cutable but exec will fail unless it is in proper format SEE ALSO stat 2 ASSEMBLER access 33 sys access name mode 7th Edition 1 ACCT 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual ACCT 2 NAME acct turn accounting on or off SYNOPSIS acct file char file DESCRIPTION The system is prepared to write a record in an accounting file for each process as it terminates This call with a null terminated string naming an existing file as argument turns on accounting records for each terminating process are appended to file
197. e carried out Except for the special com mands listed below a new process is created and an attempt is made to execute the command via an exec 2 The shell parameter PATH defines the search path for the directory containing the command Each alternative directory name is separated by a colon The default path is bin usr bin If the com mand name contains a then the search path is not used Otherwise each directory in the path is searched for an executable file If the file has execute permission but is not an a out file it is assumed to be a file containing shell commands A subshell i e a separate process is spawned to read it A parenthesized command is also executed in a subshell Special commands The following commands are executed in the shell process and except where specified no input output redirection is permitted for such commands No effect the command does nothing file Read and execute commands from file and return The search path PATH is used to find the directory containing file break 7 Exit from the enclosing for or while loop if any If n is specified then break n levels continue 7 Resume the next iteration of the enclosing for or while loop If n is specified then resume at the n th enclosing loop ed arg Change the current directory to arg The shell parameter HOME is the default arg 7th Edition 4 SH 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SH 1 eval arg The arguments are read as i
198. e command as standard input Crontab is examined by cron every minute FILES usr lib crontab 7th Edition 1 GETTY 8 UNIX Programmer s Manual GETTY 8 NAME getty set typewriter mode SYNOPSIS etc getty char DESCRIPTION Getty is invoked by init 8 immediately after a typewriter is opened following a dial up It reads the user s login name and calls login 1 with the name as argument While reading the name getty attempts to adapt the system to the speed and type of terminal being used Init calls getty with a single character argument taken from the ttys 5 file entry for the terminal line This argument determines a sequence of line speeds through which getty cycles and also the login greeting message which can contain character sequences to put various kinds of terminals in useful states The user s name is terminated by a new line or carriage return character In the second case CRMOD mode is set see ioctl 2 The name is scanned to see if it contains any lower case alphabetic characters if not and if the name is nonempty the system is told to map any future upper case characters into the corresponding lower case characters If the terminal s break key is depressed getty cycles to the next speed appropriate to the type of line and prints the greeting message again Finally login is called with the user s name as argument The following arguments from the ttys file are understood 0
199. e descriptor in r0 new file descriptor in r1 sys dup file descriptor in r0 The dup2 entry is implemented by adding 0100 to fildes 7th Edition 1 EXEC 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual EXEC 2 NAME execl execv execle execve execlp execvp exec exece environ execute a file SYNOPSIS execl name arg0 arg argn 0 char name arg0 argl argn execv name argv char name argv execle name arg0 arg argn 0 envp char name arg0 argl argn envp execve name argv envp char name argv envp extern char environ DESCRIPTION Exec in all its forms overlays the calling process with the named file then transfers to the entry point of the core image of the file There can be no return from a successful exec the calling core image is lost Files remain open across exec unless explicit arrangement has been made see ioctl 2 Ignored signals remain ignored across these calls but signals that are caught see signal 2 are reset to their default values Each user has a real user ID and group ID and an effective user ID and group ID The real ID identifies the person using the system the effective ID determines his access privileges Exec changes the effec tive user and group ID to the owner of the executed file if the file has the set user ID or set group ID modes The real user ID is not affected The name argument is a pointer to the name of the file to b
200. e executed The pointers arg 0 arg 1 address null terminated strings Conventionally arg 0 is the name of the file From C two interfaces are available Execl is useful when a known file with known arguments is being called the arguments to execl are the character strings constituting the file and the arguments the first argument is conventionally the same as the file name or its last component A 0 argument must end the argument list The execv version is useful when the number of arguments is unknown in advance the arguments to execv are the name of the file to be executed and a vector of strings containing the arguments The last argument string must be followed by a O pointer When a C program is executed it is called as follows main argc argv envp int argc char argv envp where argc is the argument count and argv is an array of character pointers to the arguments them selves As indicated argc is conventionally at least one and the first member of the array points to a string containing the name of the file Argv is directly usable in another execv because argv argc is 0 Envp is a pointer to an array of strings that constitute the environment of the process Each string con sists of a name an and a null terminated value The array of pointers is terminated by a null pointer The shell sh 1 passes an environment entry for each global shell variable defined when the program is called See envi
201. e frequently exported by profile files MAIL PS1 PS2 IFS SEE ALSO exec 2 sh 1 term 7 login 1 7th Edition 1 FILSYS 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual FILSYS 5 NAME filsys flblk ino format of file system volume SYNOPSIS include lt sys types h gt include lt sys flbk h gt include lt sys filsys h gt include lt sys ino h gt DESCRIPTION Every file system storage volume e g RF disk RK disk RP disk DECtape reel has a common format for certain vital information Every such volume is divided into a certain number of 512 byte blocks Block 0 is unused and is available to contain a bootstrap program pack label or other information Block 1 is the super block The layout of the super block as defined by the include file lt sys filsys h gt is Structure of the super block struct filsys unsigned short s_isize size in blocks of i list daddr t s fsize size in blocks of entire volume short 5 nfree number of addresses in s free daddr t s free NICFREE free block list short s ninode number of i nodes in s_inode ino t S inode NICINOD free i node list char s_flock lock during free list manipulation char s_ilock lock during i list manipulation char s_fmod super block modified flag char s_ronly mounted read only flag time t s time last super block update remainder not maintained by this version of the system daddr t
202. e g 5 is understood to mean 53 9 If an address ends with or then 1 is added resp subtracted As a consequence of this rule and rule 8 the address refers to the line before the current line Moreover trailing and characters have cumulative effect so refers to the current line less 2 ao 10 To maintain compatibility with earlier versions of the editor the character in addresses is equivalent to Commands may require zero one or two addresses Commands which require no addresses regard the presence of an address as an error Commands which accept one or two addresses assume default addresses when insufficient are given If more addresses are given than such a command requires the last one or two depending on what is accepted are used Addresses are separated from each other typically by a comma They may also be separated by a semicolon In this case the current line is set to the previous address before the next address is interpreted This feature can be used to determine the starting line for forward and backward searches EP P The second address of any two address sequence must correspond to a line following the line corresponding to the first address In the following list of ed commands the default addresses are shown in parentheses The parentheses are not part of the address but are used to show that the given addr
203. e ignored SEE ALSO troff 1 tbl 1 greek 1 BUGS Can t back up more than 128 lines No more than 800 characters including backspaces on a line 7th Edition 1 COMM 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual COMM 1 NAME comm select or reject lines common to two sorted files SYNOPSIS comm L 123 filel file2 DESCRIPTION Comm reads file and file2 which should be ordered in ASCII collating sequence and produces a three column output lines only in file lines only in file2 and lines in both files The filename means the standard input Flags 1 2 or 3 suppress printing of the corresponding column Thus comm 12 prints only the lines common to the two files comm 23 prints only lines in the first file but not in the second comm 123 is a no op SEE ALSO cmp 1 diff 1 uniq 1 7th Edition 1 CP 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual CP 1 NAME cp copy SYNOPSIS ep niel file2 cp file directory DESCRIPTION Filel is copied onto file2 The mode and owner of file2 are preserved if it already existed the mode of the source file is used otherwise In the second form one or more files are copied into the directory with their original file names Cp refuses to copy a file onto itself SEE ALSO cat 1 pr 1 mv 1 7th Edition 1 CRYPT 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual CRYPT 1 NAME crypt encode decode SYNOPSIS crypt password DESCRIPTION Crypt reads from the standard input
204. e is called also if loading takes place replace the standard startup routine by one which automati cally calls monitor 3 at the start and arranges to write out a mon out file at normal termination of execution of the object program An execution profile can then be generated by use of prof 1 f In systems without hardware floating point use a version of the C compiler which handles floating point constants and loads the object program with the floating point interpreter Do not use if the hardware is present 0 Invoke an object code optimizer S Compile the named C programs and leave the assembler language output on corresponding files suffixed s P Run only the macro preprocessor and place the result for each c file in a corresponding i file and has no lines in it E Run only the macro preprocessor and send the result to the standard output The output is intended for compiler debugging it is unacceptable as input to cc 0 output Name the final output file output If this option is used the file a out will be left undisturbed Dname def Dname Define the name to the preprocessor as if by define If no definition is given the name is defined as 1 Uname Remove any initial definition of name Idir include files whose names do not begin with are always sought first in the directory of the file argument then in directories named in I options then in directories
205. e number as above and then exits Maximum time to factor is proportional to Vn and occurs when n is prime or the square of a prime It takes 1 minute to factor a prime near 10 on a PDP11 When primes is invoked it waits for a number to be typed in If you type in a positive number less than 2 it will print all primes greater than or equal to this number DIAGNOSTICS Ouch for input out of range or for garbage input 7th Edition 1 FILE 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual FILE 1 NAME file determine file type SYNOPSIS file file DESCRIPTION File performs a series of tests on each argument in an attempt to classify it If an argument appears to be ascii file examines the first 512 bytes and tries to guess its language BUGS It often makes mistakes In particular it often suggests that command files are C programs 7th Edition 1 FIND 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual FIND 1 NAME find find files SYNOPSIS find pathname list expression DESCRIPTION Find recursively descends the directory hierarchy for each pathname in the pathname list i e one or more pathnames seeking files that match a boolean expression written in the primaries given below In the descriptions the argument n is used as a decimal integer where n means more than n n means less than n and n means exactly n name filename True if the filename argument matches the current file name Normal Shell argument syntax may be used if escape
206. e of normal termination one supplied by the program see wait and exit 2 The former byte is O for normal termination the latter is customarily O for successful exe cution nonzero to indicate troubles such as erroneous parameters bad or inaccessible data or other ina bility to cope with the task at hand It is called variously exit code exit status or return code and is described only where special conventions are involved 7th Edition 1 AC 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual AC 1M NAME ac login accounting SYNOPSIS ac L w wtmp l p d people DESCRIPTION Ac produces a printout giving connect time for each user who has logged in during the life of the current wtmp file A total is also produced w is used to specify an alternate wtmp file p prints individual totals without this option only totals are printed d causes a printout for each midnight to midnight period Any people will limit the printout to only the specified login names If no wtmp file is given usr adm wtmp is used The accounting file usr adm wtmp is maintained by init and login Neither of these programs creates the file so if it does not exist no connect time accounting is done To start accounting it should be created with length 0 On the other hand if the file is left undisturbed it will grow without bound so periodi cally any information desired should be collected and the file truncated FILES usr ad
207. e optional interval argument causes iostat to report once each interval seconds The first report is for all time since a reboot and each subsequent report is for the last interval only The optional count argument restricts the number of reports With no option argument iostat reports for each disk the number of transfers per minute the mil liseconds per average seek and the milliseconds per data transfer exclusive of seek time It also gives the percentage of time the system has spend in each of the four categories mentioned above The following options are available t Report the number of characters of terminal IO per second as well i Report the percentage of time spend in each of the four categories mentioned above the percen tage of time each disk was active seeking or transferring the percentage of time any disk was active and the percentage of time spent in IO wait idle but with a disk active s Report the raw timing information 32 numbers indicating the percentage of time spent in each of the possible configurations of 4 system states and 8 IO states 3 disks each active or not b Report on the usage of IO buffers dev mem unix 7th Edition 1 JOIN 1 7 UNIX Programmer s Manual JOIN 1 NAME join relational database operator SYNOPSIS join options filel file2 DESCRIPTION Join forms on the standard output a join of the two relations specified by the lines of file and file2 If filel is
208. e pattern and hold spaces 2 y string I string2 Transform Replace all occurrences of characters in string with the corresponding character in string2 The lengths of string and string2 must be equal 2 function Don t Apply the function or group if function is only to lines not selected by the address es 0 label This command does nothing it bears a label for b and Y commands to branch to l Place the current line number on the standard output as a line 2 Execute the following commands through a matching only when the pattern space is 7th Edition 2 SED 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SED 1 selected 0 An empty command is ignored SEE ALSO ed 1 grep 1 awk 1 7th Edition 3 SH 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SH 1 NAME sh for case if while break continue cd eval exec exit export login newgrp read readonly set shift times trap umask wait command language SYNOPSIS sh ceiknrstuvx arg DESCRIPTION Sh is a command programming language that executes commands read from a terminal or a file See invocation for the meaning of arguments to the shell Commands A simple command is a sequence of non blank words separated by blanks a blank is a tab or a space The first word specifies the name of the command to be executed Except as specified below the remaining words are passed as arguments to the invoked command The command name is
209. e returned by the last executed command in decimal The process number of this shell The process number of the last background command invoked The following parameters are used but not set by the shell HOME The default argument home directory for the cd command PATH The search path for commands see execution MAIL If this variable is set to the name of a mail file then the shell informs the user of the arrival of mail in the specified file PS1 Primary prompt string by default PS2 Secondary prompt string by default gt IFS Internal field separators normally space tab and newline Blank interpretation After parameter and command substitution any results of substitution are scanned for internal field separator characters those found in IFS and split into distinct arguments where such characters are found Explicit null arguments or are retained Implicit null arguments those resulting from parameters that have no values are removed 7th Edition 2 SH 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SH 1 File name generation Following substitution each command word is scanned for the characters and If one of these characters appears then the word is regarded as a pattern The word is replaced with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pattern If no file name is found that matches the pattern then the word is left unchanged The character at the start of a file name or immediately fol
210. e super user and you try to change the date bad conversion if the date set is syntactically incorrect 7th Edition 1 DC 1 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual DC 1 dc desk calculator SYNOPSIS de file DESCRIPTION De is an arbitrary precision arithmetic package Ordinarily it operates on decimal integers but one may specify an input base output base and a number of fractional digits to be maintained The overall structure of dc is a stacking reverse Polish calculator If an argument is given input is taken from that file until its end then from the standard input The following constructions are recognized number Sx lt x gt x 7th Edition The value of the number is pushed on the stack A number is an unbroken string of the digits 0 9 It may be preceded by an underscore _ to input a negative number Numbers may contain decimal points a The top two values on the stack are added subtracted multiplied divided remain dered or exponentiated The two entries are popped off the stack the result is pushed on the stack in their place Any fractional part of an exponent is ignored The top of the stack is popped and stored into a register named x where x may be any character If the s is capitalized x is treated as a stack and the value is pushed on it The value in register x is pushed on the stack The register x is not altered All registers start with zero value
211. each page sc Separate columns by the single character c instead of by the appropriate amount of white space A missing c is taken to be a tab m Print all files simultaneously each in one column Inter terminal messages via write 1 are forbidden during a pr FILES dev tty to suspend messages SEE ALSO cat 1 DIAGNOSTICS There are no diagnostics when pr is printing on a terminal 7th Edition 1 PREP 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual PREP 1 NAME prep prepare text for statistical processing SYNOPSIS prep dio file DESCRIPTION Prep reads each file in sequence and writes it on the standard output one word to a line A word is a string of alphabetic characters and imbedded apostrophes delimited by space or punctuation Hyphented words are broken apart hyphens at the end of lines are removed and the hyphenated parts are joined Strings of digits are discarded The following option letters may appear in any order d Print the word number in the input stream with each word i Take the next file as an ignore file These words will not appear in the output They will be counted for purposes of the d count 0 Take the next file as an only file Only these words will appear in the output All other words will also be counted for the d count p Include punctuation marks single nonalphanumeric characters as separate output lines The punctuation marks are not counted for the d cou
212. earches each addressed line for an occurrence of the specified regular expression On each line in which a match is found all matched strings are replaced by the replacement specified if the global replacement indicator g appears after the command If the global indicator does not appear only the first occurrence of the matched string is replaced It is an error for the substitution to fail on all addressed lines Any character other than space or new line may be used instead of to delimit the regular expression and the replacement is left at the last line substituted An ampersand amp appearing in the replacement is replaced by the string matching the regular expression The special meaning of amp in this context may be suppressed by preceding it by V The characters WM where n is a digit are replaced by the text matched by the n th regular subex pression enclosed between WC and When nested parenthesized subexpressions are present n is determined by counting occurrences of starting from the left Lines may be split by substituting new line characters into them The new line in the replacement string must be escaped by preceding it by V ta This command acts just like the m command except that a copy of the addressed lines is placed after address a which may be 0 is left on the last line of the copy Ju The undo command restores the preceding contents of the curren
213. ed The result of an immediate expression statement that does not have as its highest operator is printed Interrupts suspend computation Statements have the following syntax expression The expression is executed for its side effects assignment or function call or for printing as described above comment This statement is ignored It is used to interject commentary in a program done Return to system level dump The name and current value of every variable is printed edit The UNIX editor ed is invoked with the file argument After the editor exits this file is recom piled for name expression expression statement for name expression expression next The for statement repetitively executes a statement first form or a group of statements second form under control of a named variable The variable takes on the value of the first expression then is incremented by one on each loop not to exceed the value of the second expression goto expression The expression is evaluated truncated to an integer and execution goes to the corresponding integer numbered statment If executed from immediate mode the internal statements are com piled first if expression statement if expression else fi The statement first form or group of statements second form is executed if the expression evaluates to non zero In the second form an optional else allows for a group of statements to be executed when the fi
214. ed only those acceptable items with the smallest number of missing keywords are retreived 7th Edition 1 LORDER 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual LORDER 1 NAME lorder find ordering relation for an object library SYNOPSIS lorder file DESCRIPTION The input is one or more object or library archive see ar 1 files The standard output is a list of pairs of object file names meaning that the first file of the pair refers to external identifiers defined in the second The output may be processed by tsort 1 to find an ordering of a library suitable for one pass access by d 1 This brash one liner intends to build a new library from existing o files ar cr library lorder o tsort FILES symref symdef nm 1 sed 1 sort 1 join 1 SEE ALSO tsort 1 1d 1 ar 1 BUGS The names of object files in and out of libraries must end with o nonsense results otherwise 7th Edition 1 LS 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual ES 1 NAME ls list contents of directory SYNOPSIS Is Itasdrucifg name DESCRIPTION For each directory argument ls lists the contents of the directory for each file argument ls repeats its name and any other information requested The output is sorted alphabetically by default When no argument is given the current directory is listed When several arguments are given the arguments are first sorted appropriately but file arguments appear before directories and the
215. ed indirectly it is a no op If the instruction at the indirect location is not a system call indir returns error code EINVAL see intro 2 7th Edition 1 IOCTL 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual IOCTL 2 NAME ioctl stty gtty control device SYNOPSIS include lt sgtty h gt ioctl fildes request argp struct sgttyb argp stty fildes argp struct sgttyb argp gtty fildes argp struct sgttyb argp DESCRIPTION Toctl performs a variety of functions on character special files devices The writeups of various devices in section 4 discuss how ioctl applies to them For certain status setting and status inquiries about terminal devices the functions stty and gtty are equivalent to ioctl fildes TIOCSETP argp ioctl fildes TIOCGETP argp respectively see tty 4 The following two calls however apply to any open file ioctl fildes FIOCLEX NULL ioctl fildes FIONCLEX NULL The first causes the file to be closed automatically during a successful exec operation the second rev erses the effect of the first SEE ALSO stty 1 tty 4 exec 2 DIAGNOSTICS Zero is returned if the call was successful 1 if the file descriptor does not refer to the kind of file for which it was intended BUGS Strictly speaking since ioctl may be extended in different ways to devices with different properties argp should have an open ended declaration like union struct sgttyb argp The important thing is tha
216. ed with the terminal and store in the pointed to structure TIOCSETP Set the parameters according to the pointed to structure The interface delays until output is quiescent then throws away any unread characters before changing the modes TIOCSETN Set the parameters but do not delay or flush input Switching out of RAW or CBREAK mode may cause some garbage input With the following codes the arg is ignored TIOCEXCL Set exclusive use mode no further opens are permitted until the file has been closed TIOCNXCL Turn off exclusive use mode TIOCHPCL When the file is closed for the last time hang up the terminal This is useful when the line is associated with an ACU used to place outgoing calls TIOCFLUSH All characters waiting in input or output queues are flushed 7th Edition 4 TTY 4 UNIX Programmer s Manual TTY 4 The following codes affect characters that are special to the terminal interface The argument is a pointer to the following structure defined in lt sgtty h gt struct tchars char t intre interrupt char t quite quit char t startc start output char L stopc stop output char t eofc end of file char t brkc input delimiter like nl 5 The default values for these characters are DEL FS DC1 DC3 EOT and 1 A character value of 1 eliminates the effect of that character The _brkc character by default 1 acts like a new
217. edef int label t 6 typedef short dev t typedef long off t typedef long paddr t The form daddr t is used for disk addresses except in an i node on disk see filsys 5 Times are encoded in seconds since 00 00 00 GMT January 1 1970 The major and minor parts of a device code specify kind and unit number of a device and are installation dependent Offsets are measured in bytes from the beginning of a file The label t variables are used to save the processor state while another process is running SEE ALSO filsys 5 time 2 Iseek 2 adb 1 7th Edition 1 UTMP 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual UTMP 5 NAME utmp wtmp login records SYNOPSIS include lt utmp h gt DESCRIPTION The utmp file allows one to discover information about who is currently using UNIX The file is a sequence of entries with the following structure declared in the include file struct utmp char ut_line 8 tty name char ut_name 8 user id long ut_time time on 5 This structure gives the name of the special file associated with the user s terminal the user s login name and the time of the login in the form of time 2 The wtmp file records all logins and logouts Its format is exactly like utmp except that a null user name indicates a logout on the associated terminal Furthermore the terminal name indicates that the system was rebooted at the indicated time the adjacent pair of entries with terminal names
218. ee coordinate numbers in the range 1 4 FILES usr games ttt k learning file 7th Edition 1 WORDS 6 UNIX Programmer s Manual WORDS 6 NAME hangman words word games SYNOPSIS usr games hangman dict usr games words DESCRIPTION Hangman chooses a word at least seven letters long from a word list The user is to guess letters one at a time The optional argument names an alternate word list The special name a gets a particular very large word list Words prints all the uncapitalized words in the word list that can be made from letters in string FILES usr dict words the regular word list crp dict web2 the the a word list DIAGNOSTICS After each round hangman reports the average number of guesses per round and the number of rounds BUGS Hyphenated compounds are run together UNIX software is distributed without the a word list 7th Edition 1 WUMP 6 UNIX Programmer s Manual WUMP 6 NAME wump the game of hunt the wumpus SYNOPSIS usr games wump DESCRIPTION Wump plays the game of Hunt the Wumpus A Wumpus is a creature that lives in a cave with several rooms connected by tunnels You wander among the rooms trying to shoot the Wumpus with an arrow meanwhile avoiding being eaten by the Wumpus and falling into Bottomless Pits There are also Super Bats which are likely to pick you up and drop you in some random room The program asks various questions which you answer
219. egin with string It uses binary search The options d and f affect comparisons as in sort 1 d Dictionary order only letters digits tabs and blanks participate in comparisons f Fold Upper case letters compare equal to lower case If no file is specified usr dict words is assumed with collating sequence df FILES usr dict words SEE ALSO sort 1 grep 1 7th Edition 1 LOOKALL 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual LOOKALL 1 NAME lookall look through all text files on UNIX SYNOPSIS lookall Cn DESCRIPTION Lookall accepts keywords from the standard input performs a search similar to that of refer 1 and writes the result on the standard output Lookall consults however an index to all the text files on the system rather than just bibliographies Only the first 50 words of each file roughly were used to make the indexes Blank lines are taken as delimiters between queries The Cn option specifies a coordination level search up to n keywords may be missing from the answers and the answers are listed with those containing the most keywords first The command sequence in usr dict lookall makindex regenerates the index FILES The directory usr dict lookall contains the index files DIAGNOSTICS Warning index precedes file means that a file has been changed since the index was made and it may be retrieved or not retrieved erroneously BUGS Coordination level searching doesn t work as describ
220. ek calls should specify a multiple of 512 bytes dev rf0 dev rrf0 The 512 byte restrictions on the raw device are not physically necessary but are still imposed 7th Edition 1 RK 4 UNIX Programmer s Manual RK 4 NAME rk RK 11 RKO3 or RKOS disk DESCRIPTION Rk refers to an entire disk as a single sequentially addressed file Its 256 word blocks are numbered 0 to 4871 Minor device numbers are drive numbers on one controller The rk files discussed above access the disk via the system s normal buffering mechanism and may be read and written without regard to physical disk records There is also a raw interface which provides for direct transmission between the disk and the user s read or write buffer A single read or write call results in exactly one I O operation and therefore raw I O is considerably more efficient when many words are transmitted The names of the raw RK files begin with rrk and end with a number which selects the same disk as the corresponding rk file In raw I O the buffer must begin on a word boundary and counts should be a multiple of 512 bytes a disk block Likewise seek calls should specify a multiple of 512 bytes FILES dev rk dev rrk BUGS In raw I O read and write 2 truncate file offsets to 512 byte block boundaries and write scribbles on the tail of incomplete blocks Thus in programs that are likely to access raw devices read write and Iseek 2 should always deal in 512 byte mu
221. em is able to supply This is not a temporary condition the maximum core size is a system parameter The error may also occur if the arrangement of text data and stack segments requires too many segmentation registers EACCES Permission denied An attempt was made to access a file in a way forbidden by the protection system EFAULT Bad address The system encountered a hardware fault in attempting to access the arguments of a system call ENOTBLK Block device required A plain file was mentioned where a block device was required e g in mount EBUSY Mount device busy An attempt to mount a device that was already mounted or an attempt was made to dismount a device on which there is an active file open file current directory mounted on file active text segment EEXIST File exists An existing file was mentioned in an inappropriate context e g link EXDEV Cross device link A link to a file on another device was attempted ENODEV No such device An attempt was made to apply an inappropriate system call to a device e g read a write only device ENOTDIR Not a directory A non directory was specified where a directory is required for example in a path name or as an argument to chdir EISDIR Is a directory An attempt to write on a directory EINVAL Invalid argument Some invalid argument dismounting a non mounted device mentioning an unknown signal in signal reading or writing a file for which seek has generated a negative po
222. en 3 ferror 3 dbm 3 fclose 3 getc 3 gets 3 grep 1 access 2 acct 5 chmod 2 chown 2 close 2 core 5 creat 2 dd convert and copy a execvp exec exece environ execute a group group hs RH11 RS03 RS04 fixed head disk link link to a mknod build special mknod make a directory or a special passwd password pr print read read from rev reverse lines of a rf RF11 RS11 fixed head disk size size of an object sum sum and count blocks in a tail deliver the last part of a touch update date last modified of a uniq report repeated lines in a write write on a diff differential diff3 3 way differential umask set dup dup2 duplicate an open getgrnam setgrent endgrent get group getpwnam setpwent endpwent get password grep egrep fgrep search a ar archive library split split a mktemp make a unique stat fstat get mkfs construct a mount umount mount and dismount mount umount mount or remove dcheck dump incremental hier quot summarize restor incremental icheck mtab mounted filsys flblk ino format of utime set file determine basename strip feof ferror clearerr cmp compare two select or reject lines common to two sorted find find rm rmdir remove unlink sort sort or merge mv move or
223. en file F I O on the new channel is I O on F chan creates a new channel extract file descriptor maintenance connect similar to join except that the open file F is connected to an existing channel 7th Edition 1 MPX 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual MPX 2 attach and detach used with call protocol npgrp manipulates process group numbers so that a channel can act as a control terminal see tty 4 ckill send signal see signal 211 to process group through channel A maximum of 15 channels may be connected to an mpx file They are numbered O through 14 Join may be used to make one mpx file appear as a channel on another mpx file A hierarchy or tree of mpx files may be set up in this way In this case one of the mpx files must be the root of a tree where the other mpx files are interior nodes The maximum depth of such a tree is 4 An index is a 16 bit value that denotes a location in an mpx tree other than the root the path through mpx nodes from the root to the location is expressed as a sequence of 4 bit nibbles The branch taken at the root is represented by the low order 4 bits of an index Each succeeding branch is specified by the next higher order nibble If the length of a path to be expressed is less than 4 then the illegal chan nel number 15 must be used to terminate the sequence This is not strictly necessary for the simple case of a tree consisting of only a root node its channels can be expresse
224. encies Occasionally also the sug gested fix is described In section 2 an assembler subsection carries the assembly language system interface At the beginning of the volume is a table of contents organized by section and alphabetically within each section There is also a permuted index derived from the table of contents Within each index entry the title of the writeup to which it refers is followed by the appropriate section number in parentheses This fact is important because there is considerable name duplication among the sections arising principally from commands which exist only to exercise a particular system call HOW TO GET STARTED This section sketches the basic information you need to get started on ie 1 gt 0 UNIX how to log in and log out how to communicate through your terminal and how to run a program See UNIX for Beginners in Volume 2 for a more complete introduction to the system Logging in You must call UNIX from an appropriate terminal UNIX terminals are typified by the TTY 43 the GE Terminet 300 the DASI 300S and 450 and most video terminals such as the Datamedia 5120 or HP 2640 You must also have a valid user name which may be obtained together with the telephone number from the system administrators The same telephone number serves terminals operat ing at all the standard speeds After a data connection is established the login procedure depends on what kind of terminal you are using 300 baud
225. end of lines and replaces multiple blanks by single blanks HGHG A Z putchar yytext 0 1 AT putchar The options have the following meanings t Place the result on the standard output instead of in file lex yy c vV Print a one line summary of statistics of the generated analyzer n Opposite of v n is default f Faster compilation don t bother to pack the resulting tables limited to small programs SEE ALSO yacc 1 M E Lesk and E Schmidt LEX Lexical Analyzer Generator 7th Edition 1 LINT U UNIX Programmer s Manual LINT 1 NAME lint a C program verifier SYNOPSIS lint abchnpuvx file DESCRIPTION FILES Lint attempts to detect features of the C program files which are likely to be bugs or non portable or wasteful It also checks the type usage of the program more strictly than the compilers Among the things which are currently found are unreachable statements loops not entered at the top automatic vari ables declared and not used and logical expressions whose value is constant Moreover the usage of functions is checked to find functions which return values in some places and not in others functions called with varying numbers of arguments and functions whose values are not used By default it is assumed that all the files are to be loaded together they are checked for mutual compa tibility Function definitions for certain libra
226. eqnchar 7 dbm 3 tail 1 mesg 1 deroff 1 crypt 3 dup 2 de 1 access 2 file 1 ioctl 2 df 1 diff 1 diff3 1 diff 1 diff3 1 dir 5 mv 1 cd 1 chdir 2 Is 1 mkdir 1 dcheck 1 unlink 2 pwd 1 mknod 2 hp 4 rk 4 rp 4 hs 4 rf 4 df 1 du 1 mount 1 prof 1 hypot 3 dn 4 refer 1 du 4 reversi 6 graph 1 arithmetic 6 pk 4 pkopen 3 du 1 du 4 dump 1 od 1 dump 1 dump 5 dumpdir 1 dup 2 echo 1 ecvt 3 end etext ed text sed stream a out assembler and link grep crypt crypt setkey makekey generate PLOBLAM hera aa a ak cs getgrent getgrgid getgrnam setgrent getpwent getpwuid getpwnam setpwent xsend xget nlist get setgrent endgrent get group file setpwent endpwent get password file unlink remove directory execle execve execlp execvp exec exece getenv value for eqnchar special character definitions for deroff remove nroff troff tbl and CGI a Lee AA o de error numbers 0 08 080004 intro perror sys_errlist sys_nerr system errno introduction to system calls and spell spellin spellout find spelling pkon pkoff end hypot cabs for case if while break continue cd expr execl execv execle execve execlp execvp case if while break continue cd eval execv execle execve execlp execvp exec at uux unix to
227. er lookbib find and insert convert date and time to ASCH ctime end etext edata last newgrp logarithm power square root ac getlogin get continue cd eval exec exit export passwd change utmp wtmp setjmp references in documents refer object library long integers ir da BU A 13tol rpow multiple precision integer itom tp DEC ht RH 11 TU 16 tm TM 11 TU 10 xsend xget enroll secret malloc free realloc calloc make ar archive and library mkdir mknod In mktemp banner AllOCALOL olaa al Bo OS ae he ees a XVI join relational database operator Key 4 4 a gis whe ee eet Beh De be wees amp HS kill send signal to a process kill terminate a process with extreme kmem core Memory 0004 13tol ltol3 convert between 3 byte language bs 9 R o a Me ew N LAS aei tee EO cae e T language login newgrp read readonly set Id loade y a aTe ic ee ig Se ldexp modf split into mantissa and lex generator of lexical analysis programs BG RE Mista A PO aa ge 0 Chat HL Us cen ET lorder library file format ao library functions 2 2 2 0 20 020004 library maintainer line feeds lines common to two sorted files Finest ma ile is a da lines in a sorted
228. er and writes the result on the standard output The name 6 means the standard input If no input files are named the standard input is sorted The default sort key is an entire line Default ordering is lexicographic by bytes in machine collating sequence The ordering is affected globally by the following options one or more of which may appear b Ignore leading blanks spaces and tabs in field comparisons d Dictionary order only letters digits and blanks are significant in comparisons f Fold upper case letters onto lower case i Ignore characters outside the ASCII range 040 0176 in nonnumeric comparisons n An initial numeric string consisting of optional blanks optional minus sign and zero or more digits with optional decimal point is sorted by arithmetic value Option n implies option b r Reverse the sense of comparisons tx Tab character separating fields is x The notation pos pos2 restricts a sort key to a field beginning at pos and ending just before pos2 Posl and pos2 each have the form m n optionally followed by one or more of the flags bdfinr where m tells a number of fields to skip from the beginning of the line and n tells a number of characters to skip further If any flags are present they override all the global ordering options for this key If the b option is in effect n is counted from the first nonblank in the field b is attached independently to pos2 A missing n means 0 a mi
229. er initially signs on or it may be used at any time to change from one user to another The latter case is the one summarized above and described here See How to Get Started for how to dial up initially If login is invoked without an argument it asks for a user name and if appropriate a password Echo ing is turned off if possible during the typing of the password so it will not appear on the written record of the session After a successful login accounting files are updated and the user is informed of the existence of mail and message of the day files Login initializes the user and group IDs and the working directory then executes a command interpreter usually sh 1 according to specifications found in a password file Argument 0 of the command interpreter is sh Login is recognized by sh 1 and executed directly without forking FILES etc utmp accounting usr adm wtmp accounting asr mail mail etc motd message of the day etc passwd password file SEE ALSO init 8 newgrp 1 getty 8 mail 1 passwd 1 passwd 5 DIAGNOSTICS Login incorrect if the name or the password is bad No Shell cannot open password file no directory consult a programming counselor 7th Edition 1 LOOK 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual LOOK 1 NAME look find lines in a sorted list SYNOPSIS look df string file DESCRIPTION Look consults a sorted file and prints all lines that b
230. eriodic level 9 dumps should be made on an exponential progression of tapes Sometimes called Tower of Hanoi 121312414 tape 1 used every other time tape 2 used every fourth tape 3 used every eighth etc dump 9u When the level 9 incremental approaches a full tape about 78000 blocks at 1600 BPI blocked 20 a level 1 dump should be made dump lu After this the exponential series should progress as uninterrupted These level 9 dumps are based on the level 1 dump which is based on the level 0 full dump This progression of levels of dump can be carried as far as desired FILES default filesystem and tape vary with installation etc ddate record dump dates of filesystem level SEE ALSO restor 1 dump 5 dumpdir 1 DIAGNOSTICS If the dump requires more than one tape it will ask you to change tapes Reply with a new line when this has been done BUGS Sizes are based on 1600 BPI blocked tape The raw magtape device has to be used to approach these densities Read errors on the filesystem are ignored Write errors on the magtape are usually fatal 7th Edition 1 DUMPDIR 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual DUMPDIR 1M NAME dumpdir print the names of files on a dump tape SYNOPSIS dumpdir f filename DESCRIPTION Dumpdir is used to read magtapes dumped with the dump command and list the names and inode numbers of all the files and directories on the tape The f option causes filename as the name of the tape instead of
231. error handling routine These routines must be supplied by the user Lex 1 is useful for creating lexical analyzers usable by yacc If the v flag is given the file y output is prepared which contains a description of the parsing tables and a report on conflicts generated by ambiguities in the grammar If the d flag is used the file y tab h is generated with the define statements that associate the yacc assigned token codes with the user declared token names This allows source files other than y tab c to access the token codes FILES y output y tab c y tab h defines for token names yacc tmp yacc acts temporary files asr lib yaccpar parser prototype for C programs Nib liby a library with default main and yyerror SEE ALSO lex 1 LR Parsing by A V Aho and S C Johnson Computing Surveys June 1974 YACC Yet Another Compiler Compiler by S C Johnson DIAGNOSTICS The number of reduce reduce and shift reduce conflicts is reported on the standard output a more detailed report is found in the y output file Similarly if some rules are not reachable from the start symbol this is also reported BUGS Because file names are fixed at most one yacc process can be active in a given directory at a time 7th Edition 1 INTRO 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual INTRO 2 NAME intro errno introduction to system calls and error numbers SYNOPSIS include lt errno h gt DESCRIPTION Section 2 o
232. erse line sequences are interpreted and plotted At the end of each page tk waits for a newline empty line from the keyboard before continuing on to the next page In this wait state the command command will send the command to the shell The command line options are t Don t wait between pages for directing output into a file N Divide the screen into N columns and wait after the last column pL Set page length to L lines SEE ALSO pr 1 7th Edition 1 TOUCH 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TOUCH 1 NAME touch update date last modified of a file SYNOPSIS touch c file DESCRIPTION Touch attempts to set the modified date of each file This is done by reading a character from the file and writing it back If a file does not exist an attempt will be made to create it unless the e option is specified 7th Edition 1 TP 1 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual TP 1 tp manipulate tape archive SYNOPSIS tp key name DESCRIPTION Tp saves and restores files on DECtape or magtape Its actions are controlled by the key argument The key is a string of characters containing at most one function letter and possibly one or more function modifiers Other arguments to the command are file or directory names specifying which files are to be dumped restored or listed In all cases appearance of a directory name refers to the files and recur sively subdirectories of that directory The f
233. esses are the default As mentioned it is generally illegal for more than one command to appear on a line However most commands may be suffixed by p or by T in which case the current line is either printed or listed respectively in the way discussed below a lt text gt 6 The append command reads the given text and appends it after the addressed line is left on 7th Edition 2 ED 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual ED 1 the last line input if there were any otherwise at the addressed line Address 0 is legal for this command text is placed at the beginning of the buffer Je lt text gt The change command deletes the addressed lines then accepts input text which replaces these lines is left at the last line input if there were none it is left at the line preceding the deleted lines d The delete command deletes the addressed lines from the buffer The line originally after the last line deleted becomes the current line if the lines deleted were originally at the end the new last line becomes the current line e filename The edit command causes the entire contents of the buffer to be deleted and then the named file to be read in is set to the last line of the buffer The number of characters read is typed filename is remembered for possible use as a default file name in a subsequent r or w command If filename is missing the remembered name is use
234. ete list of units cat usr lib units FILES asr lib units BUGS Don t base your financial plans on the currency conversions 7th Edition 1 UUCP 1C UNIX Programmer s Manual UUCP 1C NAME uucp uulog unix to unix copy SYNOPSIS uucp option source file destination file uulog option DESCRIPTION Uucp copies files named by the source file arguments to the destination file argument A file name may be a path name on your machine or may have the form system name pathname where system name is taken from a list of system names which uucp knows about Shell metacharac ters appearing in the pathname part will be expanded on the appropriate system Pathnames may be one of 1 a full pathname 2 a pathname preceded by user where user is a userid on the specified system and is replaced by that user s login directory 3 anything else is prefixed by the current directory If the result is an erroneous pathname for the remote system the copy will fail If the destination file is a directory the last part of the source file name is used Uucp preserves execute permissions across the transmission and gives 0666 read and write permissions see chmod 2 The following options are interpreted by uucp d Make all necessary directories for the file copy c Use the source file when copying out rather than copying the file to the spool directory m Send mail to the requeste
235. etpid DESCRIPTION Getpid returns the process ID of the current process Most often it is used to generate uniquely named temporary files SEE ALSO mktemp 3 ASSEMBLER getpid 20 sys getpid pid in r0 7th Edition 1 GETUID 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual GETUID 2 NAME getuid getgid geteuid getegid get user and group identity SYNOPSIS getuid geteuid getgid getegid DESCRIPTION Getuid returns the real user ID of the current process geteuid the effective user ID The real user ID identifies the person who is logged in in contradistinction to the effective user ID which determines his access permission at the moment It is thus useful to programs which operate using the set user ID mode to find out who invoked them Getgid returns the real group ID getegid the effective group ID SEE ALSO setuid 2 ASSEMBLER getuid 24 sys getuid real user ID in r0 effective user ID in r1 getgid 47 sys getgid real group ID in r0 effective group ID in rl 7th Edition 1 INDIR 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual INDIR 2 NAME indir indirect system call ASSEMBLER indir 0 sys indir call The system call at the location call is executed Execution resumes after the indir call The main purpose of indir is to allow a program to store arguments in system calls and execute them out of line in the data segment This preserves the purity of the text segment If indir is execut
236. expr parentheses for grouping Examples To add 1 to the Shell variable a a expr a T To find the filename part least significant part of the pathname stored in variable a which may or may not contain expr a FACHA 717 a Note the quoted Shell metacharacters SEE ALSO ed 1 sh 1 test 1 DIAGNOSTICS Expr returns the following exit codes 0 if the expression is neither null nor 0 1 if the expression is null or 0 2 for invalid expressions 7th Edition 1 F77 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual F77 1 NAME 77 Fortran 77 compiler SYNOPSIS 77 option file DESCRIPTION F77 is the UNIX Fortran 77 compiler It accepts several types of arguments Arguments whose names end with f are taken to be Fortran 77 source programs they are compiled and each object program is left on the file in the current directory whose name is that of the source with o substituted for f Arguments whose names end with 1 or e are taken to be Ratfor or EFL source programs respec tively these are first transformed by the appropriate preprocessor then compiled by f77 In the same way arguments whose names end with c or s are taken to be C or assembly source pro grams and are compiled or assembled producing a o file The following options have the same meaning as in cc 1 See d 1 for load time options c Suppress loading and produce o f
237. f while break continue cd eval cat catenate and DHL cat phototypesetter interface catch or ignore signals a catenate and pri sr o rl eae ee 8 cb C program beautifier cc pec C complet cd change working directory cd eval exec exit export login newgrp ceil absolute value floor ceiling change core allocation o change default directory o a change login password o change Moderar ta S R ati ART da a change mode of file count a change owner and group of afile change owner or group o change working directory changes and other cookies 20 Chanel eg bee i ee eee bide a Oe eee eG character back into input stream character classification isalnum isspace character definitions for eqn osoo a character or word from stream o oo o character or word on a stream o oo a character Sete Hua ll cde Se NE N a id chatacters awe A s BP snd a en a oe ag Senta NE de a chdir change default directory CHECK eioi II Boe a e CHECK S adet e Oa an Dees a ss TR ale gee ee T checked typeset mathematics o o e checkers games oe m eina dida OS CHESS LA a as la gT L r Sg chgrp change owner or group ching fortune the book o
238. f another process is executing the same file 6 The process s system data is written as it is read with request 3 Only a few locations can be writ ten in this way the general registers the floating point status and registers and certain bits of the processor status word 7 The data argument is taken as a signal number and the child s execution continues at location addr as if it had incurred that signal Normally the signal number will be either 0 to indicate that the signal that caused the stop should be ignored or that value fetched out of the process s image indi cating which signal caused the stop If addr is int 1 then execution continues from where it stopped 8 The traced process terminates 9 Execution continues as in request 7 however as soon as possible after execution of at least one instruction execution stops again The signal number from the stop is SIGTRAP On the PDP 11 the T bit is used and just one instruction is executed on the Interdata the stop does not take place until a store instruction is executed This is part of the mechanism for implementing breakpoints As indicated these calls except for request 0 can be used only when the subject process has stopped The wait call is used to determine when a process stops in such a case the termination status returned by wait has the value 0177 to indicate stoppage rather than genuine termination 7th Edition 1 PTRACE 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual
239. f changes and chmod change mode ooo aa a chmod change mode of file chown change owner and group of afile chown chgrp change owner or group classification jou 2 4 ew vaca isalnum isspace ispunct cl ari nodes y mira ten e yeas A ae a eh clearerr fileno stream status inquiries jOG fread 3 bj 6 sync 1 sync 2 update 8 sum 1 ching 6 boot 8 brk 2 sh 1 brk 2 fread 3 stdio 3 setbuf 3 mknod 1 13tol 3 swab 3 cc 1 cb 1 lint 1 hypot 3 cal 1 de 1 cal 1 calendar 1 indir 2 cu 1 malloc 3 intro 2 sh 1 cat 1 cat 4 signal 2 cat 1 cb 1 cc 1 cd 1 sh 1 floor 3 brk 2 chdir 2 passwd 1 chmod 1 chmod 2 chown 2 chown 1 cd 1 ching 6 pipe 2 ungetc 3 ctype 3 eqnchar 7 getc 3 putc 3 ascii 7 tr 1 chdir 2 dcheck 1 icheck 1 eqn 1 checkers 6 chess 6 chown 1 ching 6 chmod 1 chmod 2 chown 2 chown 1 ctype 3 clri 1 ferror 3 cron fclose fflush Sorted files ua dat a system issue a shell test condition time time a nice nohup run a uux unix to unix set shift times trap umask wait intro introduction to at execute comm select or reject lines diff differential file cmp diff3 3 way differential file cc pec C f77 Fortran 77 yacc yet another compiler wait await test mkconf generate dcheck
240. f file is given the tables are sought there other wise in dev mem The required namelist is taken from unix Options are CNT DEV INO MODE NLK UID SIZ DEV LOC FLAGS DADDR CADDR SIZE IPTR CNT CCNT LOC 7th Edition Under p describe all process slots rather than just active ones Print the inode table with the these headings The core location of this table entry Miscellaneous state variables encoded thus locked update time filsys 5 must be corrected access time must be corrected file system is mounted here wanted by another process L flag is on contains a text file changed time must be corrected Number of open file table entries for this inode Major and minor device number of file system in which this inode resides I number within the device Mode bits see chmod 2 Number of links to this inode User ID of owner QAszrpar Number of bytes in an ordinary file or major and minor device of special file Print the text table with these headings The core location of this table entry Miscellaneous state variables encoded thus ptrace 2 in effect text not yet written on swap device loading in progress locked wanted L flag is on AUS Disk address in swap measured in multiples of 512 bytes Core address measured in multiples of 64 bytes Size of text segment measured in multiples of 64 bytes Core location of corresponding inode Number of processes using this text segment
241. f the symbol is local non external the type letter is in lower case The output is sorted alphabetically Options are g Print only global external symbols n Sort numerically rather than alphabetically 0 Prepend file or archive element name to each output line rather than only once p Don t sort print in symbol table order r Sort in reverse order u Print only undefined symbols SEE ALSO ar 1 ar 5 a out 5 7th Edition 1 OD 1 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual OD 1 od octal dump SYNOPSIS od bedox file Joffset b DESCRIPTION Od dumps file in one or more formats as selected by the first argument If the first argument is missing o is default The meanings of the format argument characters are b c x Interpret bytes in octal Interpret bytes in ASCII Certain non graphic characters appear as C escapes null 0 backspace b formfeed f newline n return r tab t others appear as 3 digit octal numbers Interpret words in decimal Interpret words in octal Interpret words in hex The file argument specifies which file is to be dumped If no file argument is specified the standard input is used The offset argument specifies the offset in the file where dumping is to commence This argument is normally interpreted as octal bytes If is appended the offset is interpreted in decimal If b is appended the offset is interpreted in bloc
242. f this manual lists all the entries into the system Most of these calls have an error return An error condition is indicated by an otherwise impossible returned value Almost always this is 1 the individual sections specify the details An error number is also made available in the external variable errno Errno is not cleared on successful calls so it should be tested only after an error has occurred There is a table of messages associated with each error and a routine for printing the message See per ror 3 The possible error numbers are not recited with each writeup in section 2 since many errors are possible for most of the calls Here is a list of the error numbers their names as defined in lt errno h gt and the messages available using perror 0 Error 0 Unused 1 EPERM Not owner Typically this error indicates an attempt to modify a file in some way forbidden except to its owner or super user It is also returned for attempts by ordinary users to do things allowed only to the super user 2 ENOENT No such file or directory This error occurs when a file name is specified and the file should exist but doesn t or when one of the directories in a path name does not exist 3 ESRCH No such process The process whose number was given to signal and ptrace does not exist or is already dead 4 EINTR Interrupted system call An asynchronous signal such as interrupt or quit which the user has elected to catch occurred during a sys
243. file system directory icheck file system storage mkfs deroff remove nroff troff tbl and eqn Is list logins cuicos sh for case if while break ioctl stty gtty init rc process terminals ecvt fevt gcvt output printf fprintf sprintf formatted output scanf fscanf sscanf formatted input units dd arcv atof atoi atol iNteSeT wa sg dee aed ea aR Sas 13tol lto13 localtime gmtime asctime timezone bed ppt fortune the book of changes and other cp uucp uulog unix to unix dd convert and brk sbrk break change core format of mem kmem trigonometric functions sin sinh we word sum sum and pipe umask set file convert date and time to ASCH ttt spline interpolate smooth cron clock prof display profile ttys terminal initialization fetch store delete firstkey nextkey clock daemon 2 2 2 e clos close a file o guna we eS close or flush a stream 200 clri clear i node o cmp compare two files col filter reverse line feeds o n a a aaa comm select or reject lines common to two command ir a a a e E a y a e command a eai whe ds ee E ie Ts aa command e ws a E iea he a ae a e a e Y command at low priority o oo comm
244. ful for file system maintenance disk addresses are three bytes long SEE ALSO filsys 5 7th Edition 1 MALLOC 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual MALLOC 3 NAME malloc free realloc calloc main memory allocator SYNOPSIS char malloc size unsigned size free ptr char ptr char realloc ptr size char ptr unsigned size char calloc nelem elsize unsigned nelem elsize DESCRIPTION Malloc and free provide a simple general purpose memory allocation package Malloc returns a pointer to a block of at least size bytes beginning on a word boundary The argument to free is a pointer to a block previously allocated by malloc this space is made available for further allocation but its contents are left undisturbed Needless to say grave disorder will result if the space assigned by malloc is overrun or if some random number is handed to free Malloc allocates the first big enough contiguous reach of free space found in a circular search from the last block allocated or freed coalescing adjacent free blocks as it searches It calls sbrk see break 2 to get more memory from the system when there is no suitable space already free Realloc changes the size of the block pointed to by ptr to size bytes and returns a pointer to the possi bly moved block The contents will be unchanged up to the lesser of the new and old sizes Realloc also works if ptr points to a block freed since the last call of malloc realloc o
245. graph and after processing font and size setting macros These strings are predefined by man VR 0 Reg in nroff WS Change to default type size FILES asr lib tmac tmac an asr man man0 xx SEE ALSO troff 1 man 1 BUGS Relative indents don t nest REQUESTS Request Cause If no Explanation Break Argument Bt no t n t 1 Text tis bold BI t no t n t l Join words of r alternating bold and italic BR no t n t l Join words of alternating bold and Roman DT no 51 li Restore default tabs HP i yes i p i Set prevailing indent to i Begin paragraph with hanging indent It no t n t l Text r is italic IB t no t n t l Join words of alternating italic and bold AP xi yes x Same as TP with tag x IR t no t n t l Join words of alternating italic and Roman LP yes Same as PP PD d no d 4v Interparagraph distance is d PP yes Begin paragraph Set prevailing indent to 5i RE yes End of relative indent Set prevailing indent to amount of starting RS RB t no t n t l Join words of t alternating Roman and bold RI t no t n t l Join words of r alternating Roman and italic RS i yes i p i Start relative indent move left margin in distance i Set prevailing indent to 5i for nested indents SH t yes t n t l Subhead SM t no t n t l Text is small 7th Edition 1 MAN 7 UNIX Programmer s Manual MAN 7 THncx yes Begin page named n of chapter c x is extra commentary e g
246. h Edition TP 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual TP 5 NAME tp DEC mag tape formats DESCRIPTION The command tp dumps files to and extracts files from DECtape and magtape The formats of these tapes are the same except that magtapes have larger directories Block zero contains a copy of a stand alone bootstrap program See bproc 8 Blocks 1 through 24 for DECtape 1 through 62 for magtape contain a directory of the tape There are 192 resp 496 entries in the directory 8 entries per block 64 bytes per entry Each entry has the fol lowing format struct char pathname 32 int mode char uid char gid char unused 1 char size 3 long modtime int tapeaddr char unused2 16 int checksum 5 The path name entry is the path name of the file when put on the tape If the pathname starts with a zero word the entry is empty It is at most 32 bytes long and ends in a null byte Mode uid gid size and time modified are the same as described under i nodes see file system filsys 5 The tape address is the tape block number of the start of the contents of the file Every file starts on a block boundary The file occupies size 511 512 blocks of continuous tape The checksum entry has a value such that the sum of the 32 words of the directory entry is zero Blocks above 25 resp 63 are available for file storage A fake entry has a size of zero SEE ALSO filsys 5 tp 1 BUGS The pathname uid gid and size fields
247. han xd allocates a channel and connects one end of it to the mpx file represented by file descriptor xd Chan returns the index of the new channel or a 1 indicating failure The extract primitive can be used to get a non multiplexed file descriptor for the free end of a channel created by chan Both chan and join operate on the mpx file specified by xd File descriptors for interior nodes of an mpx tree must be preserved or reconstructed with extract for use with join or chan For the remaining commands described here xd denotes the file descriptor for the root of an mpx tree Extract i xd returns a file descriptor for the object with index i on the mpx tree with root file descrip tor xd A 1 is returned by extract if a file descriptor is not available or if the arguments do not refer to an existing channel and mpx file attach i xd detach i xd If a process A has created an mpx file represented by file descriptor xd then a process B can open see open 2 the mpx file The purpose is to establish a channel between A and B through the mpx file Attach and Detach are used by A to respond to such opens An open request by B fails immediately if a new channel cannot be allocated on the mpx file if the mpx file does not exist or if it does exist but there is no process A with a multiplexed file descriptor for the mpx file i e xd as returned by mpx 2 Otherwise a channel with index number i is allocated The next time A reads on fi
248. hannel again M IOCTL can also be sent through a channel The for mat is identical to that described above 7th Edition 2 MTAB 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual MTAB 5 NAME mtab mounted file system table DESCRIPTION Mtab resides in directory etc and contains a table of devices mounted by the mount command Umount removes entries Each entry is 64 bytes long the first 32 are the null padded name of the place where the special file is mounted the second 32 are the null padded name of the special file The special file has all its direc tories stripped away that is everything through the last is thrown away This table is present only so people can look at it It does not matter to mount if there are duplicated entries nor to umount if a name cannot be found FILES etc mtab SEE ALSO mount 1 7th Edition 1 PASSWD 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual PASSWD 5 NAME passwd password file DESCRIPTION Passwd contains for each user the following information name login name contains no upper case encrypted password numerical user ID numerical group ID GCOS job number box number optional GCOS user id initial working directory program to use as Shell This is an ASCII file Each field within each user s entry is separated from the next by a colon The GCOS field is used only when communicating with that system and in other installations can contain any desired information Each user is separated from
249. hausted q Invoke the simultaneous input output mode of the rd request Nroff only Tname Prepare output for specified terminal Known names are 37 for the default Teletype Corpora tion Model 37 terminal tn300 for the GE TermiNet 300 or any terminal without half line capability 300S for the DASI 300S 300 for the DASI 300 and 450 for the DASI 450 Diablo Hyterm e Produce equally spaced words in adjusted lines using full terminal resolution h Use output tabs during horizontal spacing to speed output and reduce output character count Tab settings are assumed to be every 8 nominal character widths Troff only t Direct output to the standard output instead of the phototypesetter f Refrain from feeding out paper and stopping phototypesetter at the end of the run W Wait until phototypesetter is available if currently busy b Report whether the phototypesetter is busy or available No text processing is done a Send a printable ASCII approximation of the results to the standard output pN Print all characters in point size N while retaining all prescribed spacings and motions to reduce phototypesetter elasped time g Prepare output for a GCOS phototypesetter and direct it to the standard output see gcat 1 If the file usr adm tracct is writable troff keeps phototypesetter accounting records there The integrity of that file may be secured by making troff a set user id program 7th Edition 1 TROFF 1
250. he corresponding fields are Author name Title of book containing article referenced City Date Alternate date Editor of book containing article referenced Government CFSTI order number Issuer publisher Journal Other keywords to use in locating reference Technical memorandum number Issue number within volume Other commentary to be printed at end of reference Page numbers Report number Alternate report number Title of article book etc Volume number Commentary unused by pubindex A each field should only be given once Only relevant fields should be supplied An T 5 by 5 Palindromic Word Squares A M D Mcllroy J Word Ways PV 9 P 199 202 D 1976 x ia x ib x ic where x is the first argument SEE ALSO refer 1 7th Edition local 1 PWD 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual PWD 1 NAME pwd working directory name SYNOPSIS pwd DESCRIPTION Pwd prints the pathname of the working current directory SEE ALSO cd 1 7th Edition 1 QUOT 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual QUOT 1M NAME quot summarize file system ownership SYNOPSIS quot option filesystem DESCRIPTION Quot prints the number of blocks in the named filesystem currently owned by each user If no filesystem is named a default name is assumed The following options are available n Cause the pipeline ncheck filesystem sort 0n quot n filesystem to produce a list of all files and their owners
251. he first n arguments are checked a missing n is taken to be 0 NOSTRICT shuts off strict type checking in the next expression ARGSUSED turns on the v option for the next function LINTLIBRARY at the beginning of a file shuts off complaints about unused functions in this file asr lib lint 12 programs lasr lib llib lc declarations for standard functions asr lib llib port declarations for portable functions 7th Edition 1 LINT U UNIX Programmer s Manual LINT 1 SEE ALSO cc 1 S C Johnson Lint a C Program Checker 7th Edition 2 LN 11 UNIX Programmer s Manual LN 1 NAME In make a link SYNOPSIS In namel name2 DESCRIPTION A link is a directory entry referring to a file the same file together with its size all its protection infor mation etc may have several links to it There is no way to distinguish a link to a file from its origi nal directory entry any changes in the file are effective independently of the name by which the file is known Ln creates a link to an existing file namel If name2 is given the link has that name otherwise it is placed in the current directory and its name is the last component of namel It is forbidden to link to a directory or to link across file systems SEE ALSO rm 1 7th Edition 1 LOGIN 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual LOGIN 1 NAME login sign on SYNOPSIS login username DESCRIPTION The login command is used when a us
252. he kernel when internal queues become full This is done on a per channel basis the parameter is a count of the number of characters not transferred to the channel on which M BLK is received M_UBLK is generated for a channel after M BLK when the internal queues have drained below a threshold MPXIO 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual MPXIO 5 Two other messages may be generated by the kernel As with other messages the first 16 bit quantity is the message code M_OPEN is generated in conjunction with listener mode see mpx 2 The uid of the cal ling process follows the message code as with M_WATCH This is followed by a null terminated string which is the name of the file being opened M_IOCTL is generated for a channel connected to a process when that process executes the ioctl fd cmd amp vec call on the channel file descriptor The M_IOCTL code is fol lowed by the cmd argument given to ioctl followed by the contents of the structure vec It is assumed not needing a better compromise at this time that the length of vec is determined by sizeof struct sgttyb as declared in lt sgtty h gt Two control messages are understood by the operating system M EOT may be sent through an mpx file to a channel It is equivalent to propagating a zero length record through the channel i e the chan nel is allowed to drain and the process or device at the other end receives a zero length transfer before data starts flowing through the c
253. he low speed asynchronous communications ports use the same gen eral interface no matter what hardware is involved The remainder of this section discusses the com mon features of the interface When a terminal file is opened it causes the process to wait until a connection is established In prac tice user s programs seldom open these files they are opened by init and become a user s input and out put file The very first terminal file open in a process becomes the control terminal for that process The control terminal plays a special role in handling quit or interrupt signals as discussed below The control terminal is inherited by a child process during a fork even if the control terminal is closed The set of processes that thus share a control terminal is called a process group all members of a process group receive certain signals together see DEL below and kill 2 A terminal associated with one of these files ordinarily operates in full duplex mode Characters may be typed at any time even while output is occurring and are only lost when the system s character input buffers become completely choked which is rare or when the user has accumulated the maximum allowed number of input characters that have not yet been read by some program Currently this limit is 256 characters When the input limit is reached all the saved characters are thrown away without notice Normally terminal input is processed in units of lines This mea
254. he only difference between this option and n is that here the data starts at location 0 0 The name argument after o is used as the name of the d output file instead of a out 7th Edition 1 LD 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual LD 1 The following argument is taken to be the name of the entry point of the loaded program loca tion O is the default This is an overlay file only the text segment will be replaced by exec 2 Shared data must have the same layout as in the program overlaid The next argument is a decimal number that sets the size of the data segment lib lib a libraries usr lib lib a more libraries output file as 1 ar 1 cc 1 ranlib 1 e O D FILES a out SEE ALSO BUGS 7th Edition LEX 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual LEX 1 NAME lex generator of lexical analysis programs SYNOPSIS lex tvfn file DESCRIPTION Lex generates programs to be used in simple lexical analyis of text The input files standard input default contain regular expressions to be searched for and actions written in C to be executed when expressions are found A C source program lex yy c is generated to be compiled thus cc lex yy c 11 This program when run copies unrecognized portions of the input to the output and executes the asso ciated C action for each regular expression that is recognized The following lex program converts upper case to lower removes blanks at the
255. he specified output with possible conversions The standard input and output are used by default The input and output block size may be specified to take advantage of raw physical I O option values if input file name standard input is default of output file name standard output is default ibs n input block size n bytes default 512 obs n output block size default 512 bs n set both input and output block size superseding ibs and obs also if no conversion is specified it is particularly efficient since no copy need be done cbs n conversion buffer size skip n skip n input records before starting copy files n copy n files from tape input seek n seek n records from beginning of output file before copying count n copy only n input records conv ascii convert EBCDIC to ASCII ebcdic convert ASCII to EBCDIC ibm slightly different map of ASCII to EBCDIC Icase map alphabetics to lower case ucase map alphabetics to upper case swab swap every pair of bytes noerror do not stop processing on an error sync pad every input record to ibs ec Be several comma separated conversions Where sizes are specified a number of bytes is expected A number may end with k b or w to specify multiplication by 1024 512 or 2 respectively a pair of numbers may be separated by x to indicate a product Cbs is used only if ascii or ebcdic conversion is specified In the former case cbs characters are placed into the conversion buffer converted to ASCII and
256. her to examine each directory Rmdir removes entries for the named directories which must be empty SEE ALSO unlink 2 DIAGNOSTICS Generally self explanatory It is forbidden to remove the file merely to avoid the antisocial conse quences of inadvertently doing something like rm r 7th Edition 1 ROFF 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual ROFF 1 NAME roff format text SYNOPSIS roff n n s h file nroff mr option file troff mr option file DESCRIPTION FILES BUGS Roff formats text according to control lines embedded in the text in the given files Encountering a nonexistent file terminates printing Incoming inter terminal messages are turned off during printing The optional flag arguments mean n Start printing at the first page with number n n Stop printing at the first page numbered higher than n s Stop before each page including the first to allow paper manipulation resume on receipt of an interrupt signal h Insert tabs in the output stream to replace spaces whenever appropriate Input consists of intermixed text lines which contain information to be formatted and request lines which contain instructions about how to format it Request lines begin with a distinguished control character normally a period Output lines may be filled as nearly as possible with words without regard to input lineation Line breaks may be caused a
257. hus the preceding example can be done more briefly pgm a o b o cc a o b o lm o pgm a o b o incl Prerequisites are inferred according to selected suffixes listed as the prerequisites for the special name SUFFIXES multiple lists accumulate an empty list clears what came before Order is significant the first possible name for which both a file and a rule as described in the next paragraph exist is inferred The default list is SUFFIXES out o c e F f y l s The rule to create a file with suffix s2 that depends on a similarly named file with suffix s is specified as an entry for the target s s2 In such an entry the special macro stands for the target name with suffix deleted for the full target name lt for the complete list of prerequisites and for the list of prerequisites that are out of date For example a rule for making optimized o files from c files is c 0 cc c O 0 c Certain macros are used by the default inference rules to communicate optional arguments to any result ing compilations In particular CFLAGS is used for cc and f77 1 options LFLAGS and YFLAGS for lex and yacc 1 options 7th Edition 1 MAKE 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual MAKE 1 Command lines are executed one at a time each by its own shell A line is printed when it is executed unless the special target SILENT is in makefile or the first character of the comm
258. ibliographic data base for references that contain those keywords anywhere in title author journal name etc Matching references are printed on the standard output Blank lines are taken as delimiters between queries Refer is a preprocessor for nroff or troff 1 that finds and formats references The input files standard input default are copied to the standard output except for lines between and command lines which are assumed to contain keywords as for lookbib and are replaced by information from the biblio graphic data base The user may avoid the search override fields from it or add new fields The refer ence data from whatever source are assigned to a set of troff strings Macro packages such as ms 7 print the finished reference text from these strings A flag is placed in the text at the point of reference by default the references are indicated by numbers The following options are available ar Reverse the first r author names Jones J A instead of J A Jones If r is omitted all author names are reversed b Bare mode do not put any flags in text neither numbers nor labels Cstring Capitalize with CAPS SMALL CAPS the fields whose key letters are in string e Instead of leaving the references where encountered accumulate them until a sequence of the form LIST is encountered and then write out all references collected so far Collapse references to the same source kx Instead of num
259. ich these libraries are found are named on the appropriate pages FILES lib libc a lib libm a usr lib libm a one or the other SEE ALSO stdio 3 nm 1 Id 1 cc 1 771 intro 2 DIAGNOSTICS Functions in the math library 3M may return conventional values when the function is undefined for the given arguments or when the value is not representable In these cases the external variable errno see intro 2 is set to the value EDOM or ERANGE The values of EDOM and ERANGE are defined in the include file lt math h gt ASSEMBLER In assembly language these functions may be accessed by simulating the C calling sequence For exam ple ecvt 3 might be called this way 7th Edition setd mov sign sp mov _ decpt sp mov ndigit sp movf value sp jsr pc ecvt add 14 sp ABORT 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual ABORT 3 NAME abort generate IOT fault DESCRIPTION Abort executes the PDP11 IOT instruction This causes a signal that normally terminates the process with a core dump which may be used for debugging SEE ALSO adb 1 signal 2 exit 2 DIAGNOSTICS Usually IOT trap core dumped from the shell 7th Edition 1 ABS 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual NAME abs integer absolute value SYNOPSIS abs i DESCRIPTION Abs returns the absolute value of its integer operand SEE ALSO floor 3 for fabs BUGS You get what the hardware gives on the largest negative integer
260. if the entry is a character type special file if the entry is a plain file The next 9 characters are interpreted as three sets of three bits each The first set refers to owner per missions the next to permissions to others in the same user group and the last to all others Within each set the three characters indicate permission respectively to read to write or to execute the file as a program For a directory execute permission is interpreted to mean permission to search the directory for a specified file The permissions are indicated as follows r if the file is readable w if the file is writable x if the file is executable if the indicated permission is not granted The group execute permission character is given as s if the file has set group ID mode likewise the user execute permission character is given as s if the file has set user ID mode 7th Edition 1 ES 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual LS 1 The last character of the mode normally x or is t if the 1000 bit of the mode is on See chmod 1 for the meaning of this mode When the sizes of the files in a directory are listed a total count of blocks including indirect blocks is printed FILES etc passwd to get user ID s for ls 1 etc group to get group ID s for Is g 7th Edition 2 M4 1 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual M4 1 m4 macro processor SYNOPSIS m files DESCRIPTION M4 is a macro
261. iles for each source file p Prepare object files for profiling see prof 1 0 Invoke an object code optimizer 5S Compile the named programs and leave the assembler language output on corresponding files suffixed s No o is created f Use a floating point interpreter for PDP11 s that lack 11 70 style floating point oO output Name the final output file output instead of a out The following options are peculiar to f77 onetrip Compile DO loops that are performed at least once if reached Fortran 77 DO loops are not performed at all if the upper limit is smaller than the lower limit u Make the default type of a variable undefined rather than using the default Fortran rules C Compile code to check that subscripts are within declared array bounds W Suppress all warning messages If the option is w66 only Fortran 66 compatibility warn ings are suppressed F Apply EFL and Ratfor preprocessor to relevant files put the result in the file with the suffix changed to f but do not compile m Apply the M4 preprocessor to each r or e file before transforming it with the Ratfor or EFL preprocessor Ex Use the string x as an EFL option in processing e files Rx Use the string x as a Ratfor option in processing r files Other arguments are taken to be either loader option arguments or F77 compatible object programs typ ically produced by an e
262. iles requested are on the mounted tape or a later tape thus the reverse order and doesn t read through the tape if no files are If you are working with a single volume dump or the number of files being restored is large respond to the query with 1 and restor will read the tapes in sequential order If you have a hierarchy to restore you can use dumpdir 1 to produce the list of names and a shell script to move the resulting files to their homes Print the date the tape was written and the date the filesystem was dumped from The r option should only be used to restore a complete dump tape onto a clear file system or to restore an incremental dump tape onto this Thus etc mkfs dev rp0 40600 restor r dev rpO 1s a typical sequence to restore a complete dump Another restor can be done to get an incremental dump in on top of this A dump followed by a mkfs and a restor is used to change the size of a file system FILES default tape unit varies with installation rst SEE ALSO dump 1 mkfs 1 dumpdir 1 7th Edition RESTOR 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual RESTOR 1M DIAGNOSTICS There are various diagnostics involved with reading the tape and writing the disk There are also diag nostics if the i list or the free list of the file system is not large enough to hold the dump If the dump extends over more than one tape it may ask you to change tapes Reply with a new line when the next tape has been mounted
263. ime even while a program is typing at you Of course if you type during output the printed output will have the input characters interspersed However whatever you type will be saved up and interpreted in correct sequence There is a limit to the amount of read ahead but it is generous and not likely to be exceeded unless the system is in trouble When the read ahead limit is exceeded the system throws away all the saved characters The character in typed input kills all the preceding characters in the line so typing mistakes can be repaired on a single line Also the character erases the last character typed Successive uses of FP erase characters back to but not beyond the beginning of the line and can be transmitted to a program by preceding them with Y So to erase Y you need two s These conventions can be changed by the stty 1 command The break or interrupt key causes an interrupt signal as does the The ASCII delete or rubout character which is not passed to programs This signal generally causes whatever program you are run ning to terminate It is typically used to stop a long printout that you don t want However programs can arrange either to ignore this signal altogether or to be notified when it happens instead of being ter minated The editor for example catches interrupts and stops what it is doing instead of terminating so that an interrupt can
264. ime tp long tp DESCRIPTION Stime sets the system s idea of the time and date Time pointed to by fp is measured in seconds from 0000 GMT Jan 1 1970 Only the super user may use this call SEE ALSO date 1 time 2 ctime 3 DIAGNOSTICS Zero is returned if the time was set 1 if user is not the super user ASSEMBLER stime 25 time in r0 r1 sys stime 7th Edition 1 SYNC 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual SYNC 2 NAME sync update super block SYNOPSIS sync DESCRIPTION Sync causes all information in core memory that should be on disk to be written out This includes modified super blocks modified i nodes and delayed block I O It should be used by programs which examine a file system for example icheck df etc It is mandatory before a boot SEE ALSO sync 1 update 8 BUGS The writing although scheduled is not necessarily complete upon return from sync ASSEMBLER sync 36 sys sync 7th Edition 1 TIME 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual TIME 2 NAME time ftime get date and time SYNOPSIS long time 0 long time tloc long tloc include lt sys types h gt include lt sys timeb h gt ftime tp struct timeb tp DESCRIPTION Time returns the time since 00 00 00 GMT Jan 1 1970 measured in seconds If tloc is nonnull the return value is also stored in the place to which tloc points The ftime entry fills in a structure pointed to by its argument as defined by lt sys
265. ined using the following operators in order of decreasing precedence 1 A parenthesized group of primaries and operators parentheses are special to the Shell and must be escaped 2 The negation of a primary is the unary not operator 3 Concatenation of primaries the and operation is implied by the juxtaposition of two primaries 4 Alternation of primaries o is the or operator 7th Edition 1 FIND 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual FIND 1 EXAMPLE To remove all files named a out or o that have not been accessed for a week find name a out o name o Y atime 7 exec rm FILES etc passwd etc group SEE ALSO sh 1 test 1 filsys 5 BUGS The syntax is painful 7th Edition 2 GRAPH 1G UNIX Programmer s Manual GRAPH 1G NAME graph draw a graph SYNOPSIS graph option DESCRIPTION Graph with no options takes pairs of numbers from the standard input as abscissas and ordinates of a graph Successive points are connected by straight lines The graph is encoded on the standard output for display by the plot 1 filters If the coordinates of a point are followed by a nonnumeric string that string is printed as a label begin ning on the point Labels may be surrounded with quotes in which case they may be empty or contain blanks and numbers labels never contain newlines The following options are recognized each as a separate argument
266. initial setting of both mappings is suitable for normal a out and core files If either file is not of the kind expected then for that file b is set to 0 el is set to the maximum file size and fI is set to 0 in this way the whole file can be examined with no address translation So that adb may be used on large files all appropriate values are kept as signed 32 bit integers dev mem dev swap a out core SEE ALSO ptrace 2 a out 5 core 5 DIAGNOSTICS BUGS Adb when there is no current command or format Comments about inaccessible files syntax errors abnormal termination of commands etc Exit status is 0 unless last command failed or returned nonzero status A breakpoint set at the entry point is not effective on initial entry to the program When single stepping system calls do not count as an executed instruction Local variables whose names are the same as an external variable may foul up the accessing of the external 7th Edition 5 AR 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual AR 1 NAME ar archive and library maintainer SYNOPSIS ar key posname afile name DESCRIPTION Ar maintains groups of files combined into a single archive file Its main use is to create and update library files as used by the loader It can be used though for any similar purpose Key is one character from the set drqtpmx optionally concatenated with one or more of vuaibcl Afile is the archive file The names are constitue
267. inter Also set by math functions see intro 3 ENFILE File table overflow The system s table of open files is full and temporarily no more opens can be accepted EMFILE Too many open files Customary configuration limit is 20 per process ENOTTY Not a typewriter The file mentioned in stty or gtty is not a terminal or one of the other devices to which these calls apply ETXTBSY Text file busy An attempt to execute a pure procedure program that is currently open for writing or reading Also an attempt to open for writing a pure procedure program that is being executed INTRO 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual INTRO 2 27 EFBIG File too large The size of a file exceeded the maximum about 10 bytes 28 ENOSPC No space left on device During a write to an ordinary file there is no free space left on the device 29 ESPIPE Illegal seek An lseek was issued to a pipe This error should also be issued for other non seekable devices 30 EROFS Read only file system An attempt to modify a file or directory was made on a device mounted read only 31 EMLINK Too many links An attempt to make more than 32767 links to a file 32 EPIPE Broken pipe A write on a pipe for which there is no process to read the data This condition normally gen erates a signal the error is returned if the signal is ignored 33 EDOM Math argument The argument of a function in the math package 3M is out of the domain of the function 34 ERANGE Result too
268. ion of the shell file is abandoned Otherwise the shell returns the exit status of the last command executed see also exit If lt lt is used to provide standard input to an asynchronous process invoked by amp the shell gets mixed up about naming the input document A garbage file tmp sh is created and the shell complains about not being able to find the file by another name 7th Edition 6 SIZE 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SIZE 1 NAME size size of an object file SYNOPSIS size object DESCRIPTION Size prints the decimal number of bytes required by the text data and bss portions and their sum in octal and decimal of each object file argument If no file is specified a out is used SEE ALSO a out 5 7th Edition 1 SLEEP 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SLEEP 1 NAME sleep suspend execution for an interval SYNOPSIS sleep time DESCRIPTION Sleep suspends execution for time seconds It is used to execute a command after a certain amount of time as in sleep 105 command amp or to execute a command every so often as in while true do command sleep 37 done SEE ALSO alarm 2 sleep 3 BUGS Time must be less than 65536 seconds 7th Edition 1 SORT 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SORT 1 NAME sort sort or merge files SYNOPSIS sort mubdfinrtx pos1 pos2 o name T directory name DESCRIPTION Sort sorts lines of all the named files togeth
269. ir contents There are several options l List in long format giving mode number of links owner size in bytes and time of last modification for each file See below If the file is a special file the size field will instead contain the major and minor device numbers t Sort by time modified latest first instead of by name as is normal a List all entries usually and are suppressed S Give size in blocks including indirect blocks for each entry d If argument is a directory list only its name not its contents mostly used with 1 to get status on directory r Reverse the order of sort to get reverse alphabetic or oldest first as appropriate u Use time of last access instead of last modification for sorting t or printing D c Use time of last modification to inode mode etc instead of last modification to file for sort ing t or printing D i Print i number in first column of the report for each file listed f Force each argument to be interpreted as a directory and list the name found in each slot This option turns off l t s and r and turns on a the order is the order in which entries appear in the directory g Give group ID instead of owner ID in long listing The mode printed under the 1 option contains 11 characters which are interpreted as follows the first character is d if the entry is a directory b ifthe entry is a block type special file c
270. irst argument is the name of the entry The second is b if the special file is block type disks tape or e if it is character type other devices The last two arguments are numbers specifying the major device type and the minor device e g unit drive or line number The assignment of major device numbers is specific to each system They have to be dug out of the system source file conf c SEE ALSO mknod 2 7th Edition 1 MOUNT 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual MOUNT 1M NAME mount umount mount and dismount file system SYNOPSIS etc mount special name r etc umount special DESCRIPTION Mount announces to the system that a removable file system is present on the device special The file name must exist already it must be a directory unless the root of the mounted file system is not a directory It becomes the name of the newly mounted root The optional last argument indicates that the file system is to be mounted read only Umount announces to the system that the removable file system previously mounted on device special is to be removed These commands maintain a table of mounted devices If invoked without an argument mount prints the table Physically write protected and magnetic tape file systems must be mounted read only or errors will occur when access times are updated whether or not any explicit write is attempted FILES etc mtab mount table SEE ALSO mount 2 mtab 5 BUGS Mounting file sy
271. its base 8 exp 13 bits fraction struct acct char ac_comm 10 comp t ac_utime he comp t ac_stime i comp t ac_etime is time t ac btime is short ac uid short ac gid i short ac mem comp t ac_io i dev_t ac tty is comp t ac_rw is char ac_flag i 5 flag bits define AFORK 01 define ASU 02 If the process does an exec 2 the first 10 characters of the filename appear in ac_comm The account ing flag contains bits indicating whether exec 2 was ever accomplished and whether the process ever had super user privileges SEE ALSO acct 2 sa 1 7th Edition command name user time system time elapsed time beginning time user ID group ID average memory usage number of disk IO blocks control typewriter blocks read or written accounting flag has executed fork but no exec used super user privileges AR 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual AR 5 NAME ar archive library file format SYNOPSIS include lt ar h gt DESCRIPTION The archive command ar is used to combine several files into one Archives are used mainly as libraries to be searched by the link editor d A file produced by ar has a magic number at the start followed by the constituent files each preceded by a file header The magic number and header layout as described in the include file are define ARMAG 0177545 struct ar_hdr char ar_name 14 long ar_date
272. iz i file t category1 category2 DESCRIPTION FILES BUGS Quiz gives associative knowledge tests on various subjects It asks items chosen from category and expects answers from category2 If no categories are specified quiz gives instructions and lists the available categories Quiz tells a correct answer whenever you type a bare newline At the end of input upon interrupt or when questions run out guiz reports a score and terminates The t flag specifies tutorial mode where missed questions are repeated later and material is gradually introduced as you learn The i flag causes the named file to be substituted for the default index file The lines of these files have the syntax line category newline category line category alternate category alternate alternate empty alternate primary primary character P category option option category Y The first category on each line of an index file names an information file The remaining categories specify the order and contents of the data in each line of the information file Information files have the same syntax Backslash V is used as with sh 1 to quote syntactically significant characters or to insert transparent newlines into a line When either a question or its answer is empty quiz will refrain from asking it asr games quiz k The construct alab doesn t work in an information fi
273. k 2 should always deal in 512 byte multiples 7th Edition 1 TC 4 UNIX Programmer s Manual TC 4 NAME tc TC 11 TU56 DECtape DESCRIPTION The files tap0 tap7 refer to the TC 11 TU56 DECtape drives 0 to 7 The 256 word blocks on a standard DECtape are numbered 0 to 577 FILES dev tap SEE ALSO tp 1 7th Edition 1 TM 4 UNIX Programmer s Manual TM 4 NAME tm TM 11 TU 10 magtape interface DESCRIPTION The files mt0 mt7 refer to the DEC TU10 TM11 magtape When closed it can be rewound or not see below If it was open for writing two end of files are written If the tape is not to be rewound it is positioned with the head between the two tapemarks If the 0200 bit is on in the minor device number the tape is not rewound when closed A standard tape consists of a series of 512 byte records terminated by an end of file To the extent pos sible the system makes it possible if inefficient to treat the tape like any other file Seeks have their usual meaning and it is possible to read or write a byte at a time Writing in very small units is inadvis able however because it tends to create monstrous record gaps The mt files discussed above are useful when it is desired to access the tape in a way compatible with ordinary files When foreign tapes are to be dealt with and especially when long records are to be read or written the raw interface is appropriate The associated files are named rmt0
274. k sets a mask used whenever a file is created by creat 2 or mknod 2 the actual mode see chmod 2 of the newly created file is the logical and of the given mode and the complement of the argument Only the low order 9 bits of the mask the protection bits participate In other words the mask shows the bits to be turned off when files are created The previous value of the mask is returned by the call The value is initially O no restrictions The mask is inherited by child processes SEE ALSO creat 2 mknod 2 chmod 2 ASSEMBLER umask 60 sys umask complmode 7th Edition 1 UNLINK 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual UNLINK 2 NAME unlink remove directory entry SYNOPSIS unlink name char name DESCRIPTION Name points to a null terminated string Unlink removes the entry for the file pointed to by name from its directory If this entry was the last link to the file the contents of the file are freed and the file is destroyed If however the file was open in any process the actual destruction is delayed until it is closed even though the directory entry has disappeared SEE ALSO rm 1 link 2 DIAGNOSTICS Zero is normally returned 1 indicates that the file does not exist that its directory cannot be written or that the file contains pure procedure text that is currently in use Write permission is not required on the file itself It is also illegal to unlink a directory except for the super user A
275. ke this that is republished in many variant forms All entries are based on a common format not all of whose subsections will always appear The name subsection lists the exact names of the commands and subroutines covered under the entry and gives a very short description of their purpose The synopsis summarizes the use of the program being described A few conventions are used particularly in the Commands subsection Boldface words are considered literals and are typed just as they appear Square brackets around an argument indicate that the argument is optional When an argument is given as name it always refers to a file name gt Ellipses are used to show that the previous argument prototype may be repeated A final convention is used by the commands themselves An argument beginning with a minus sign is often taken to mean some sort of option specifying argument even if it appears in a position where a file name could appear Therefore it is unwise to have files whose names begin with The description subsection discusses in detail the subject at hand The files subsection gives the names of files which are built into the program A see also subsection gives pointers to related information A diagnostics subsection discusses the diagnostic indications which may be produced Messages which are intended to be self explanatory are not listed The bugs subsection gives known bugs and sometimes defici
276. kes x a sub i xy sup 2 produces a and e sup x sup 2 y sup 2 gives e 2 a Fractions are made with over a over b yields T 1 v axr bx c l sqrt makes square roots J over sqrt ax sup 2 bx c results in n The keywords from and to introduce lower and upper limits on arbitrary things lim Y x is made with n o 0 lim from n gt inf T sum from 0 to n x sub i Left and right brackets braces etc of the right height are made with left and right left x sup 2 y 2 sup 2 over alpha right 1 produces a 1 The right clause is optional Legal characters after left and right are braces brackets bars e and f for ceiling and floor and for nothing at all use ful for a right side only bracket a Vertical piles of things are made with pile Ipile cpile and rpile pile a above b above c produces b C There can be an arbitrary number of elements in a pile Ipile left justifies pile and cpile center with different vertical spacing and rpile right justifies Matrices are made with matrix matrix Icol x sub i above y sub 2 ccol 1 above 2 y produces Xi 1 3 In addition there is rcol for a right justified column 7th Edition 2 22 74 1 EQN 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual EQN 1 Diacritical marks are made with dot dotdot hat tilde bar vec dyad and under x dot f t bar is x f t y dotdot bar n under is y n and x vec y dyad is Y Sizes and font can be changed
277. key content pair must not exceed the internal block size currently 512 bytes Moreover all key content pairs that hash together must fit on a single block Store will return an error in the event that a disk block fills with inseparable data Delete does not physically reclaim file space although it does make it available for reuse 7th Edition 1 DBM 3X UNIX Programmer s Manual DBM 3X The order of keys presented by firstkey and nextkey depends on a hashing function not on anything interesting 7th Edition 2 ECVT 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual ECVT 3 NAME ecvt fevt gcvt output conversion SYNOPSIS char ecvt value ndigit decpt sign double value int ndigit decpt sign char fevt value ndigit decpt sign double value int ndigit decpt sign char gevt value ndigit buf double value char buf DESCRIPTION Ecvt converts the value to a null terminated string of ndigit ASCII digits and returns a pointer thereto The position of the decimal point relative to the beginning of the string is stored indirectly through decpt negative means to the left of the returned digits If the sign of the result is negative the word pointed to by sign is non zero otherwise it is zero The low order digit is rounded Fcvt is identical to ecvt except that the correct digit has been rounded for Fortran F format output of the number of digits specified by ndigits Gcvt converts the value to a null terminated AS
278. ks from exactly the same source text It was used to produce this manual Status inquiries Various commands exist to provide you with useful information Who 1 prints a list of users presently logged in Date 1 prints the current time and date Ls 1 will list the files in your directory or give summary information about particular files Surprises Certain commands provide inter user communication Even if you do not plan to use them it would be well to learn something about them because someone else may aim them at you To communicate with another user currently logged in write 1 is used mail 1 will leave a message whose presence will be announced to another user when he next logs in The write ups in the manual also suggest how to respond to the two commands if you are a target When you log in a message of the day may greet you before the first CONVERTING FROM THE 6TH EDITION There follows a catalogue of significant mostly incompatible changes that will affect old users convert ing to the 7th edition No attempt is made to list all new facilities or even all minor but easily spotted changes just the bare essentials without which it will be almost impossible to do anything Addressing files Byte addresses in files are now long 32 bit integers Accordingly seek has been replaced by lseek 2 Every program that contains a seek must be modified Stat and fstat 2 have been affected similarly since file lengths are now
279. ks of 512 bytes If the file argument is omitted the offset argument must be preceded Dumping continues until end of file SEE ALSO adb 1 7th Edition PASSWD 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual PASSWD 1 NAME passwd change login password SYNOPSIS passwd name DESCRIPTION This command changes or installs a password associated with the user name your own name by default The program prompts for the old password and then for the new one The caller must supply both The new password must be typed twice to forestall mistakes New passwords must be at least four characters long if they use a sufficiently rich alphabet and at least six characters long if monocase These rules are relaxed if you are insistent enough Only the owner of the name or the super user may change a password the owner must prove he knows the old password FILES etc passwd SEE ALSO login 1 passwd 5 crypt 3 Robert Morris and Ken Thompson Password Security A Case History 7th Edition 1 PLOT 1G UNIX Programmer s Manual PLOT 1G NAME plot graphics filters SYNOPSIS plot Tterminal raster DESCRIPTION These commands read plotting instructions see plot 5 from the standard input and in general produce plotting instructions suitable for a particular terminal on the standard output If no terminal type is specified the environment parameter STERM see environ 5 is used Known terminals are 4014 Te
280. ktronix 4014 storage scope 450 DASI Hyterm 450 terminal Diablo mechanism 300 DASI 300 or GSI terminal Diablo mechanism 3008 DASI 300S terminal Diablo mechanism ver Versatec D1200A printer plotter This version of plot places a scan converted image in usr tmp raster and sends the result directly to the plotter device rather than to the standard output The optional argument causes a previously scan converted file raster to be sent to the plotter FILES asr bin tek asr bin t450 asr bin t300 asr bin t300s usr bin vplot lasr tmp raster SEE ALSO plot 3 plot 5 BUGS There is no lockout protection for usr tmp raster 7th Edition 1 PR 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual PR 1 NAME pr print file SYNOPSIS pr option file DESCRIPTION Pr produces a printed listing of one or more files The output is separated into pages headed by a date the name of the file or a specified header and the page number If there are no file arguments pr prints its standard input Options apply to all following files but may be reset between files n Produce n column output n Begin printing with page n h Take the next argument as a page header wn For purposes of multi column output take the width of the page to be n characters instead of the default 72 ln Take the length of the page to be n lines instead of the default 66 t Do not print the 5 line header or the 5 line trailer normally supplied for
281. l symbol When the file is processed by the link editor and the external symbol becomes defined the value of the symbol will be added into the word in the file If relocation information is present it amounts to one word per word of program text or initialized data There is no relocation information if the relocation info stripped flag in the header is on Bits 3 1 of a relocation word indicate the segment referred to by the text or data word associated with the relocation word 000 absolute number 002 reference to text segment 004 reference to initialized data 006 reference to uninitialized data bss 010 reference to undefined external symbol Bit O of the relocation word indicates if 1 that the reference is relative to the pc e g clr x if 0 that the reference is to the actual symbol e g clr x The remainder of the relocation word bits 15 4 contains a symbol number in the case of external refer ences and is unused otherwise The first symbol is numbered 0 the second 1 etc SEE ALSO as 1 Id 1 nm 1 7th Edition 2 ACCT 5 NAME acct execution accounting file SYNOPSIS include lt sys acct h gt DESCRIPTION Acct 2 causes entries to be made into an accounting file for each process that terminates The account UNIX Programmer s Manual ing file is a sequence of entries whose layout as defined by the include file is typedef unsigned short comp t floating point 3 b
282. large The value of a function in the math package 3M is unrepresentable within machine precision SEE ALSO intro 3 ASSEMBLER as usr include sys s file The PDP11 assembly language interface is given for each system call The assembler symbols are defined in usr include sys s Return values appear in registers rO and rl it is unwise to count on these registers being preserved when no value is expected An erroneous call is always indicated by turning on the c bit of the condition codes The error number is returned in rU The presence of an error is most easily tested by the instruc tions bes and bec branch on error set or clear These are synonyms for the bcs and bcc instruc tions On the Interdata 8 32 the system call arguments correspond well to the arguments of the C routines The sequence is la 2 errno 1 0 amp callno svc 0 args Thus register 2 points to a word into which the error number will be stored as needed it is cleared if no error occurs Register 0 contains the system call number the nomenclature is identical to that on the PDP11 The argument of the svc is the address of the arguments laid out in storage as in the C calling sequence The return value is in register 2 possibly 3 also as in pipe and is 1 in case of error The overflow bit in the program status word is also set when errors occur 7th Edition 3 ACCESS 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual ACCESS 2 NAME access determin
283. le DESCRIPTION Group contains for each group the following information group name encrypted password numerical group ID a comma separated list of all users allowed in the group This is an ASCII file The fields are separated by colons Each group is separated from the next by a new line If the password field is null no password is demanded This file resides in directory etc Because of the encrypted passwords it can and does have general read permission and can be used for example to map numerical group ID s to names FILES etc group SEE ALSO newerp 1 crypt 3 passwd 1 passwd 5 7th Edition 1 MPXIO 5 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual MPXIO 5 mpxio multiplexed i o SYNOPSIS include lt sys mx h gt include lt sgtty h gt DESCRIPTION Data transfers on mpx files see mpx 2 are multiplexed by imposing a record structure on the io stream Each record represents data from to a particular channel or a control or status message associ ated with a particular channel The prototypical data record read from an mpx file is as follows struct input_record short index short count short ccount char data T where index identifies the channel and count specifies the number of characters in data If count is zero ccount gives the size of data and the record is a control or status message Although count or ccount might be odd the operating system aligns records on short i e 16
284. le SYNOPSIS close fildes DESCRIPTION Given a file descriptor such as returned from an open creat dup or pipe 2 call close closes the associ ated file A close of all files is automatic on exit but since there is a limit on the number of open files per process close is necessary for programs which deal with many files Files are closed upon termination of a process and certain file descriptors may be closed by exec 2 see ioctl 2 SEE ALSO creat 2 open 2 pipe 2 exec 2 ioctl 2 DIAGNOSTICS Zero is returned if a file is closed 1 is returned for an unknown file descriptor ASSEMBLER close 6 file descriptor in r0 sys close 7th Edition 1 CREAT 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual CREAT 2 NAME creat create a new file SYNOPSIS creat name mode char name DESCRIPTION Creat creates a new file or prepares to rewrite an existing file called name given as the address of a null terminated string If the file did not exist it is given mode mode as modified by the process s mode mask see umask 2 Also see chmod 2 for the construction of the mode argument If the file did exist its mode and owner remain unchanged but it is truncated to 0 length The file is also opened for writing and its file descriptor is returned The mode given is arbitrary it need not allow writing This feature is used by programs which deal with temporary files of fixed names The creation is done with a mode that fo
285. le Use a b 7th Edition 1 REVERSI 6 UNIX Programmer s Manual REVERSI 6 NAME reversi a game of dramatic reversals SYNOPSIS usr games reversi r file DESCRIPTION Reversi also known as friends Chinese friends and Othello is played on an 8x8 board using two sided tokens Each player takes his turn by placing a token with his side up in an empty square Dur ing the first four turns players may only place tokens in the four central squares of the board Subse quently with each turn a player must capture one or more of his opponent s tokens He does this by placing one of his tokens such that it and another of his tokens embrace a solid line of his opponent s horizontally vertically or diagonally Captured tokens are flipped over and thus can be re captured If a player cannot outflank his opponent he forfeits his turn The play continues until the board is filled or until no more outflanking is possible In this game your tokens are asterisks and the machine s are at signs You move by typing in the row and column at which you want to place your token as two digits 1 8 optionally separated by blanks or tabs You can also type c to continue the game after hitting break this is only necessary if you interrupt the machine while it is deliberating gn to start reversi playing against itself for the next n moves or until the break key is hit n to stop printing the board after ea
286. le descriptor xd the WATCH control message see mpxio 5 will be delivered on channel i A responds to this message with attach or detach The former causes the open to 7th Edition 2 MPX 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual MPX 2 complete and return a file descriptor to B The latter deallocates channel i and causes the open to fail One mpx file may be placed in listener mode This is done by writing ioctl xd MXLSTN 0 where xd is an mpx file descriptor and MXLSTN is defined in usr include sgtty h The semantics of listener mode are that all file names discovered by open 2 to have the syntax system pathname see uucp 1 are treated as opens on the mpx file The operating system sends the listener process an OPEN message see mpxio 5 which includes the file name being opened Attach and detach then apply as described above Detach has two other uses it closes and releases the resources of any active channel it is applied to and should be used to respond to a CLOSE message see mpxio 5 on a channel so the channel may be reused connect fd cd end Fd is a character file descriptor and cd is a file descriptor for a channel such as might be obtained via extract chan xd xd or by open 2 followed by attach Connect splices the two streams together If end is negative only the output of fd is spliced to the input of cd If end is positive the output of cd is spliced to the input of fd If end is zero then both splices are made
287. lem 7th Edition deprecated 2 TR 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TR 1 NAME tr translate characters SYNOPSIS tr cds string string2 DESCRIPTION Tr copies the standard input to the standard output with substitution or deletion of selected characters Input characters found in string are mapped into the corresponding characters of string2 When string2 is short it is padded to the length of string by duplicating its last character Any combination of the options cds may be used c complements the set of characters in string with respect to the universe of characters whose ASCII codes are 01 through 0377 octal d deletes all input characters in stringl s squeezes all strings of repeated output characters that are in string2 to single characters In either string the notation a b means a range of characters from a to b in increasing ASCII order The character followed by 1 2 or 3 octal digits stands for the character whose ASCII code is given by those digits A V followed by any other character stands for that character The following example creates a list of all the words in filel one per line in file2 where a word is taken to be a maximal string of alphabetics The second string is quoted to protect from the Shell 012 is the ASCII code for newline tr cs A Za z 012 lt filel gt file2 SEE ALSO ed 1 ascii 7 BUGS Won t handle ASCII NUL in string or string2
288. les One file is a directory containing a bit map and has dir as its suffix The second file contains all data and has pag as its suffix Before a database can be accessed it must be opened by dbminit At the time of this call the files file dir and file pag must exist An empty database is created by creating zero length dir and pag files Once open the data stored under a key is accessed by fetch and data is placed under a key by store A key and its associated contents is deleted by delete A linear pass through all keys in a database may be made in an apparently random order by use of firstkey and nextkey Firstkey will return the first key in the database With any key nextkey will return the next key in the database This code will traverse the data base for key firstkey key dptr NULL key nextkey key DIAGNOSTICS BUGS All functions that return an int indicate errors with negative values A zero return indicates ok Rou tines that return a datum indicate errors with a null 0 dptr The pag file will contain holes so that its apparent size is about four times its actual content Older UNIX systems may create real file blocks for these holes when touched These files cannot be copied by normal means cp cat tp tar ar without filling in the holes Dptr pointers returned by these subroutines point into static storage that is changed by subsequent calls The sum of the sizes of a
289. list lines dle a id a E ART N Tink Wi dere Es phy de bce wee Ca See Se ag Seah afa link link to a nle link editor output Fink toallero to 2 Bicis ote ar a elas a lint a C program verifier o USt a ara A LE A e AY a list contents of directory o a literature references in documents In make alink n a E G RON loddet t IA E EE A localtime gmtime asctime tiMezone locations in progra sse oos o eee a ea e O a lock lock a process in primary memory log in to a new group log log10 pow sqrt exponential login sign on login accounting 2 2 ee ee login Tames fk aia ge A ao ee ey A a TE wm BE N login newgrp read readonly set shift login password Ies DE n k Sin i Fee Oe aa ia BY longjmp non local goto look find lines in a sorted list lookbib find and insert literature lorder find ordering relation foran ls list contents of directory Iseek tell move read write pointer 2 ltol3 convert between 3 byte integers and m4 macro processor 2 0008 macros for formatting manuscripts macros to typeset manual 0 madd msub mult mdiv min mout pow gcd mag tape formats 0 000008 magtape interface magtape interface Maile de aa Bue Gale a a It E mail send or receive mail among users
290. ll An integer constant EOF 1 is returned upon end of file or error by integer functions that deal with streams Any routine that uses the standard input output package must include the header file lt stdio h gt of per tinent macro definitions The functions and constants mentioned in sections labeled 3S are declared in the include file and need no further declaration The constants and the following functions are imple mented as macros redeclaration of these names is perilous getc getchar putc putchar feof ferror fileno SEE ALSO open 2 close 2 read 2 write 2 DIAGNOSTICS The value EOF is returned uniformly to indicate that a FILE pointer has not been initialized with fopen input output has been attempted on an output input stream or a FILE pointer designates corrupt or otherwise unintelligible FILE data 7th Edition 1 STRING 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual STRING 3 NAME strcat strncat strcmp strncmp strcpy strncpy strlen index index string operations SYNOPSIS char strcat sl s2 char s1 s2 char strncat s1 s2 n char s1 s2 stremp s1 s2 char s1 s2 strncmp sl s2 n char s1 s2 char strepy sl s2 char s1 s2 char strncpy sl s2 n char s1 s2 strlen s char s char index s c char s c char rindex s c char s DESCRIPTION BUGS These functions operate on null terminated strings They do not check for overflow of an
291. ll special file is discarded Reads from a null special file always return O bytes FILES dev null 7th Edition 1 PK 4 UNIX Programmer s Manual PK 4 NAME pk packet driver DESCRIPTION The packet driver implements a full duplex end to end flow control strategy for machine to machine communication Packet driver protocol is established by calling pkon 2 with a character device file descriptor and a desired packet size in bytes The packet size must be a power of 2 32 lt size lt 4096 The file descriptor must represent an 8 bit data path This is normally obtained by setting the device in raw mode see ioctl 2 The actual packet size which may be smaller than the desired packet size is arrived at by negotiation with the packet driver at the remote end of the data link The packet driver maintains two data areas for incoming and outgoing packets The output area is needed to implement retransmission on errors and arriving packets are queued in the input area Data arriving for a file not open for reading is discarded Initially the size of both areas is set to two packets It is not necessary that reads and writes be multiples of the packet size although there is less system overhead if they are Read operations return the maximum amount of data available from the input area up to the number of bytes specified in the system call The buffer sizes in write operations are not nor mally transmitted across the link However wri
292. llhist bj principal word list used by look 1 history file for spell 1 blackjack hangman quiz k what quiz 6 knows index category index africa countries and capitals include standard include files lib man a out h stdio h math h sys object file layout a out 5 standard I O stdio 3 3M system defined layouts cf usr sys h acct h process accounts acct 5 bufh internal system buffers object libraries and stuff to keep lib small lint 12 subprocesses for lint 1 llib Ic llib Im atrun struct tmac font uucp suftab units eign dummy declarations for lib libc a used by lint 1 dummy declarations for lib libc m scheduler for at 1 passes of struct 1 macros for troff 1 tmac an macros for man 7 tmac s macros for ms 7 fonts for troff 1 R Times Roman B Times Bold programs and data for uucp 1 L sys remote system names and numbers uucico the real copy program table of suffixes for hyphenation used by troff 1 conversion tables for units 1 list of English words to be ignored by ptx 1 volume 1 of this manual man 1 man0 general HIER 7 7th Edition spool mail wd doc sys UNIX Programmer s Manual HIER 7 intro introduction to volume 1 ms 7 format XX template for manual page manl chapter 1 as 1 mount 1m catl preprinted pages for man1 as 1 mount 1m delayed execution files at used by at 1 Ipd used by p
293. lowing a and the char acter must be matched explicitly Matches any string including the null string Matches any single character Matches any one of the characters enclosed A pair of characters separated by matches any character lexically between the pair Quoting The following characters have a special meaning to the shell and cause termination of a word unless quoted amp lt gt newline space tab A character may be quoted by preceding it with a newline is ignored All characters enclosed between a pair of quote marks except a single quote are quoted Inside double quotes param eter and command substitution occurs and quotes the characters and is equivalent to 1 2 whereas is equivalent to 1 2 Prompting When used interactively the shell prompts with the value of PS1 before reading a command If at any time a newline is typed and further input is needed to complete a command then the secondary prompt PS2 is issued Input output Before a command is executed its input and output may be redirected using a special notation inter preted by the shell The following may appear anywhere in a simple command or may precede or fol low a command and are not passed on to the invoked command Substitution occurs before word or digit is used lt word Use file word as standard input file descriptor 0 gt word Use file word as standard outp
294. ls how big an array is needed char buf BUFSIZ A buffer is normally obtained from malloc 3 upon the first getc or putc 3 on the file except that out put streams directed to terminals and the standard error stream stderr are normally not buffered SEE ALSO fopen 3 getc 3 putc 3 malloc 3 7th Edition 1 SETJMP 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual SETJMP 3 NAME setimp longjmp non local goto SYNOPSIS include lt setjmp h gt setjmp env jmp_buf env longjmp env val jmp_buf env DESCRIPTION These routines are useful for dealing with errors and interrupts encountered in a low level subroutine of a program Setjmp saves its stack environment in env for later use by longjmp It returns value 0 Longjmp restores the environment saved by the last call of setjmp It then returns in such a way that execution continues as if the call of setjmp had just returned the value val to the function that invoked setjmp which must not itself have returned in the interim All accessible data have values as of the time longjmp was called SEE ALSO signal 2 7th Edition 1 SIN 3M UNIX Programmer s Manual SIN 3M NAME sin cos tan asin acos atan atan2 trigonometric functions SYNOPSIS include lt math h gt double sin x double x double cos x double x double asin x double x double acos x double x double atan x double x double atan2 x y double x y DESCRIPTION Sin cos and tan retur
295. ltiples 7th Edition 1 RP 4 UNIX Programmer s Manual RP 4 NAME rp RP 11 RP03 moving head disk DESCRIPTION The files rp0 rp7 refer to sections of RP disk drive 0 The files rp amp rp15 refer to drive 1 etc This allows a large disk to be broken up into more manageable pieces The origin and size of the pseudo disks on each drive are as follows disk start length 0 0 81000 1 0 5000 2 5000 2000 3 7000 74000 4 7 unassigned Thus rp0 covers the whole drive while rp1 rp2 rp3 can serve usefully as a root swap and mounted user file system respectively The rp files access the disk via the system s normal buffering mechanism and may be read and written without regard to physical disk records There is also a raw interface which provides for direct transmission between the disk and the user s read or write buffer A single read or write call results in exactly one I O operation and therefore raw I O is considerably more efficient when many words are transmitted The names of the raw RP files begin with rrp and end with a number which selects the same disk section as the corresponding rp file In raw I O the buffer must begin on a word boundary FILES dev rp dev rrp SEE ALSO hp 4 BUGS In raw I O read and write 2 truncate file offsets to 512 byte block boundaries and write scribbles on the tail of incomplete blocks Thus in programs that are likely to access raw devices read write and Isee
296. m char format sprintf s format arg char s format DESCRIPTION Printf places output on the standard output stream stdout Fprintf places output on the named output stream Sprintf places output in the string s followed by the character 0 Each of these functions converts formats and prints its arguments after the first under control of the first argument The first argument is a character string which contains two types of objects plain char acters which are simply copied to the output stream and conversion specifications each of which causes conversion and printing of the next successive arg printf Each conversion specification is introduced by the character Following the there may be an optional minus sign which specifies left adjustment of the converted value in the indi cated field an optional digit string specifying a field width if the converted value has fewer characters than the field width it will be blank padded on the left or right if the left adjustment indicator has been given to make up the field width if the field width begins with a zero zero padding will be done instead of blank padding an optional period which serves to separate the field width from the next digit string an optional digit string specifying a precision which specifies the number of digits to appear after the decimal point for e and f conversion or the maximum number
297. m 1 DIAGNOSTICS Mkdir returns exit code 0 if all directories were successfully made Otherwise it prints a diagnostic and returns nonzero 7th Edition 1 MKFS 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual MKFS 1M NAME mkfs construct a file system SYNOPSIS etc mkfs special proto DESCRIPTION Mkfs constructs a file system by writing on the special file special according to the directions found in the prototype file proto The prototype file contains tokens separated by spaces or new lines The first token is the name of a file to be copied onto block zero as the bootstrap program see bproc 8 The second token is a number specifying the size of the created file system Typically it will be the number of blocks on the device perhaps diminished by space for swapping The next token is the number of 1 nodes in the i list The next set of tokens comprise the specification for the root file File specifications consist of tokens giving the mode the user id the group id and the initial contents of the file The syn tax of the contents field depends on the mode The mode token for a file is a 6 character string The first character specifies the type of the file The characters bed specify regular block special character special and directory files respectively The second character of the type is either u or to specify set user id mode or not The third is g or for the set group id mode The rest of the mode is a three digit oct
298. m wtmp SEE ALSO init 8 login 1 utmp 5 7th Edition 1 ADB 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual ADB 1 NAME adb debugger SYNOPSIS adb w objfil corfil DESCRIPTION Adb is a general purpose debugging program It may be used to examine files and to provide a con trolled environment for the execution of UNIX programs Objfil is normally an executable program file preferably containing a symbol table if not then the sym bolic features of adb cannot be used although the file can still be examined The default for objfil is a out Corfil is assumed to be a core image file produced after executing objfil the default for corfil is core Requests to adb are read from the standard input and responses are to the standard output If the w flag is present then both objfil and corfil are created if necessary and opened for reading and writing so that files can be modified using adb Adb ignores QUIT INTERRUPT causes return to the next adb command In general requests to adb are of the form address count command If address is present then dot is set to address Initially dot is set to 0 For most commands count specifies how many times the command will be executed The default count is 1 Address and count are expressions The interpretation of an address depends on the context it is used in If a subprocess is being debugged then addresses are interpreted in the usual way in the address space of the subp
299. me the super block of the file system was changed During a reboot s_time of the super block for the root file system is used to set the system s idea of the time The fields s_tfree s_tinode s fname and s_fpack are not currently maintained Enumbers begin at 1 and the storage for i nodes begins in block 2 I nodes are 64 bytes long so 8 of them fit into a block I node 2 is reserved for the root directory of the file system but no other i number has a built in meaning Each i node represents one file The format of an i node as given in the include file lt sys ino h gt is Tnode structure as it appears on a disk block struct dinode unsigned short di_mode mode and type of file short di nlink number of links to file short di vid owner s user id short dL gid owner s group id off t di size number of bytes in file char di_addr 40 disk block addresses time t di atime time last accessed time t di mtime time last modified time t di ctime time created T define INOPB 8 8 inodes per block the 40 address bytes E 39 used 13 addresses by of 3 bytes each Di_mode tells the kind of file it is encoded identically to the st_mode field of stat 2 Di_nlink is the number of directory entries links that refer to this i node Di_uid and di_gid are the owner s user and group IDs Size is the number of bytes in the file Di_atime and di_mtime
300. meaning and it is possible to read or write a byte at a time Writing in very small units 1s inadvisable however because it tends to create monstrous record gaps The last octal digit of the minor device number selects the drive The middle digit selects a controller The initial digit is even to select 800 BPI odd to select 1600 BPI If the 0200 bit is on initial digit 2 or 3 the tape is not rewound on close Note that the minor device number has no necessary connection with the file name and in fact tp 1 turns the short name x into dev mtx The mt files discussed above are useful when it is desired to access the tape in a way compatible with ordinary files When foreign tapes are to be dealt with and especially when long records are to be read or written the raw interface is appropriate The associated files may be named rmt0 rmt7 but the same minor device considerations as for the regular files still apply Each read or write call reads or writes the next record on the tape In the write case the record has the same length as the buffer given During a read the record size is passed back as the number of bytes read provided it is no greater than the buffer size if the record is long an error is indicated In raw tape I O the buffer must begin on a word boundary and the count must be even Seeks are ignored A zero count is returned when a tape mark is read another read will fetch the first record of the next tape fil
301. ment which should be a pointer to a float The input format for floating point numbers is an optionally signed string of digits possibly containing a decimal point followed by an optional exponent field consisting of an E or e followed by an optionally signed integer o indicates a string not to be delimited by space characters The left bracket is followed by a set of characters and a right bracket the characters between the brackets define a set of characters making 7th Edition 1 SCANF 3S UNIX Programmer s Manual SCANF 3S up the string If the first character is not circumflex the input field is all characters until the first character not in the set between the brackets if the first character after the left bracket is the input field is all characters until the first character which is in the remaining set of characters between the brackets The corresponding argument must point to a character array The conversion characters d 0 and x may be capitalized or preceeded by l to indicate that a pointer to long rather than to int is in the argument list Similarly the conversion characters e or f may be capi talized or preceded by 1 to indicate a pointer to double rather than to float The conversion characters d o and x may be preceeded by h to indicate a pointer to short rather than to int The scanf functions return the number of successfully matched and assigned input items This can be used to decide how many input i
302. mmand on a specified system and send standard output to a file on a specified system The command string is made up of one or more arguments that look like a shell command line except that the command and file names may be prefixed by system name A null system name is interpreted as the local system File names may be one of 1 a full pathname 2 a pathname preceded by xxx where xxx is a userid on the specified system and is replaced by that user s login directory 3 anything else is prefixed by the current directory The option will cause the standard input to the uux command to be the standard input to the command string For example the command uux diff usg usr dan fl pwba a4 dan f1 gt fi diff will get the f1 files from the usg and pwba machines execute a diff command and put the results in f1 diff in the local directory Any special shell characters such as lt gt should be quoted either by quoting the entire command string or quoting the special characters as individual arguments FILES usr uucp spool spool directory usr uucp other data and programs SEE ALSO uucp 1 D A Nowitz Uucp implementation description WARNING An installation may and for security reasons generally will limit the list of commands executable on behalf of an incoming request from uux Typically a restricted site will permit little other than the receipt of mail via uux BUGS Only the first command
303. n erated like illegal instruction or externally generated like interrupt See signal 2 for the list Then the traced process enters a stopped state and its parent is notified via wait 2 When the child is in the stopped state its core image can be examined and modified using ptrace If desired another ptrace request can then cause the child either to terminate or to continue possibly ignoring the signal The value of the request argument determines the precise action of the call O This request is the only one used by the child process it declares that the process is to be traced by its parent All the other arguments are ignored Peculiar results will ensue if the parent does not expect to trace the child 1 2 The word in the child process s address space at addr is returned If I and D space are separated request indicates I space 2 D space Addr must be even The child must be stopped The input data is ignored 3 The word of the system s per process data area corresponding to addr is returned Addr must be even and less than 512 This space contains the registers and other information about the process its layout corresponds to the user structure in the system 4 5 The given data is written at the word in the process s address space corresponding to addr which must be even No useful value is returned If I and D space are separated request 4 indicates I space 5 D space Attempts to write in pure procedure fail i
304. n arbitrary path name SEE ALSO In 1 unlink 2 DIAGNOSTICS Zero is returned when a link is made 1 is returned when name cannot be found when name2 already exists when the directory of name2 cannot be written when an attempt is made to link to a directory by a user other than the super user when an attempt is made to link to a file on another file system when a file has too many links ASSEMBLER link 9 sys link namel name2 7th Edition 1 LOCK 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual LOCK 2 NAME lock lock a process in primary memory SYNOPSIS lock flag DESCRIPTION If the flag argument is non zero the process executing this call will not be swapped except if it is required to grow If the argument is zero the process is unlocked This call may only be executed by the super user BUGS Locked processes interfere with the compaction of primary memory and can cause deadlock This sys tem call is not considered a permanent part of the system ASSEMBLER lock 53 sys lock flag 7th Edition local 1 LSEFK 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual LSEFK 2 NAME Iseek tell move read write pointer SYNOPSIS long Iseek fildes offset whence long offset long tell fildes DESCRIPTION The file descriptor refers to a file open for reading or writing The read resp write pointer for the file is set as follows If whence is O the pointer is set to offset bytes If whence is 1 the pointer is set to its
305. n exec is obsoleted by exece but remains for historical reasons When the called file starts execution on the PDP11 the stack pointer points to a word containing the number of arguments Just above this number is a list of pointers to the argument strings followed by a null pointer followed by the pointers to the environment strings and then another null pointer The strings themselves follow a O word is left at the very top of memory SP gt nargs argO argn 0 envO envm 0 arg0 lt arg0 0 gt env0 lt env0 0 gt 0 On the Interdata 8 32 the stack begins at a conventional place currently 0xD0000 and grows upwards After exec the layout of data on the stack is as follows int 0 arg0 byte argp0 int argO 7th Edition 2 EXEC 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual int 0 envp0 int envO int 0 2 gt space 40 int nargs int argp0 int envp0 3 gt This arrangement happens to conform well to C calling conventions 7th Edition EXEC 2 EXITO UNIX Programmer s Manual EXIT 2 NAME exit terminate process SYNOPSIS exit status int status _exit status int status DESCRIPTION Exit is the normal means of terminating a process Exit closes all the process s files and notifies the parent process if it is executing a wait The low order 8 bits of status are available to the parent pro cess This call can never return The C function exit may cause cleanup actions before the final sys exit
306. n force until the Shell exits If no userid is specified root is assumed To remind the super user of his responsibilities the Shell substitutes for its usual prompt SEE ALSO sh 1 7th Edition 1 SUM 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SUM 1 NAME sum sum and count blocks in a file SYNOPSIS sum file DESCRIPTION Sum calculates and prints a 16 bit checksum for the named file and also prints the number of blocks in the file It is typically used to look for bad spots or to validate a file communicated over some transmission line SEE ALSO wc 1 DIAGNOSTICS Read error is indistinuishable from end of file on most devices check the block count 7th Edition 1 SYNC 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual SYNC 1M NAME sync update the super block SYNOPSIS sync DESCRIPTION Sync executes the sync system primitive If the system is to be stopped sync must be called to insure file system integrity See sync 2 for details SEE ALSO sync 2 update 8 7th Edition 1 TABS 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TABS 1 NAME tabs set terminal tabs SYNOPSIS tabs n terminal DESCRIPTION Tabs sets the tabs on a variety of terminals Various of the terminal names given in term 7 are recog nized the default is however suitable for most 300 baud terminals If the n flag is present then the left margin is not indented as is normal SEE ALSO stty 1 term 7 7th Edition 1 TAIL
307. n is a troff 1 preprocessor for typesetting mathematics on a Graphic Systems phototypesetter neqn on terminals Usage is almost always eqn file troff neqn file nroff If no files are specified these programs reads from the standard input A line beginning with EQ marks the start of an equation the end of an equation is marked by a line beginning with EN Neither of these lines is altered so they may be defined in macro packages to get centering numbering etc It is also possible to set two characters as delimiters subsequent text between delimiters is also treated as eqn input Delimiters may be set to characters x and y with the command line argument dxy or more commonly with delim xy between EQ and EN The left and right delimiters may be identical Del imiters are turned off by delim off All text that is neither between delimiters nor between EO and EN is passed through untouched The program checkeq reports missing or unbalanced delimiters and EQ EN pairs Tokens within eqn are separated by spaces tabs newlines braces double quotes tildes or circumflexes Braces are used for grouping generally speaking anywhere a single character like x could appear a complicated construction enclosed in braces may be used instead Tilde represents a full space in the output circumflex half as much Subscripts and superscripts are produced with the keywords sub and sup Thus x sub i ma
308. n is performed Any other input means don t do it causes tar to use the next argument as the name of the archive instead of dev mt If the name of the file is tar writes to standard output or reads from standard input whichever is appropriate Thus tar can be used as the head or tail of a filter chain Tar can also be used to move hierarchies with the command cd fromdir tar cf cd todir tar xf causes tar to use the next argument as the blocking factor for tape records The default is 1 the maximum is 20 This option should only be used with raw magnetic tape archives See f above The block size is determined automatically when reading tapes key letters x and t tells tar to complain if it cannot resolve all of the links to the files dumped If this is not specified no error messages are printed tells tar to not restore the modification times The mod time will be the time of extraction TAR 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TAR 1 DIAGNOSTICS Complaints about bad key characters and tape read write errors Complaints if enough memory is not available to hold the link tables BUGS There is no way to ask for the n th occurrence of a file Tape errors are handled ungracefully The u option can be slow The b option should not be used with archives that are going to be updated The current magtape driver cannot backspace raw magtape If the archive is on a disk file the b option should not be used at all a
309. n some of these cases it is possible for octal 20 to be added into the trap type this indicates that the processor was in user mode when the trap occurred If you wish to examine the stack after such a trap either dump the system or use the console switches to examine core the required address mapping is described below Interpreting dumps All file system problems should be taken care of before attempting to look at dumps The dump should be read into the file usr sys core cp 1 will do At this point you should execute ps alxk and who to print the process table and the users who were on at the time of the crash You should dump od 1 the first 30 bytes of usr sys core Starting at location 4 the registers RO R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 SP and KDSA6 KISA6 for 11 40s are stored If the dump had to be restarted RO will not be correct Next take the value of KA6 location 022 8 in the dump multiplied by 0100 8 and dump 01000 8 bytes starting from there This is the per process data associated with the process running at the time of the crash Relabel the addresses 140000 to 141776 R5 is C s frame or display pointer Stored at R5 is the old R5 pointing to the previous stack frame At R5 2 is the saved PC of the calling procedure Trace this calling chain until you obtain an R5 value of 141756 which is where the user s RS is stored If the chain is broken you have to look for a plausible R5 PC pair and continue from there Each PC should
310. n this table to get the message string without the newline Sys_nerr is the number of messages provided for in the table it should be checked because new error codes may be added to the system before they are added to the table SEE ALSO intro 2 7th Edition 1 PKOPEN 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual PKOPEN 3 NAME pkopen pkclose pkread pkwrite pkfail packet driver simulator SYNOPSIS char pkopen fd pkclose ptr char ptr pkread ptr buffer count char ptr buffer pkwrite ptr buffer count char ptr buffer pkfail DESCRIPTION These routines are a user level implementation of the full duplex end to end communication protocol described in pk 4 If fd is a file descriptor open for reading and writing pkopen carries out the initial synchronization and returns an identifying pointer The pointer is used as the first parameter to pkread pkwrite and pkclose Pkread pkwrite and pkclose behave analogously to read write and close 2 However a write of zero bytes is meaningful and will produce a corresponding read of zero bytes SEE ALSO pk 4 pkon 2 DIAGNOSTICS BUGS Pkfail is called upon persistent breakdown of communication Pkfail must be supplied by the user Pkopen returns a null 0 pointer if packet protocol can not be established Pkread returns 1 on end of file O in correspondence with a 0 length write This simulation of pk 4 leaves something to be desired in needing spe
311. n trigonometric functions of radian arguments The magnitude of the argument should be checked by the caller to make sure the result is meaningful Asin returns the arc sin in the range 7 2 to 7 2 Acos returns the arc cosine in the range 0 to 7 Atan returns the arc tangent of x in the range 7 2 to 7 2 Atan2 returns the arc tangent of x y in the range T to 7 DIAGNOSTICS Arguments of magnitude greater than 1 cause asin and acos to return value 0 errno is set to EDOM The value of tan at its singular points is a huge number and errno is set to ERANGE BUGS The value of tan for arguments greater than about 2 31 is garbage 7th Edition 1 SINH 3M UNIX Programmer s Manual SINH 3M NAME sinh cosh tanh hyperbolic functions SYNOPSIS include lt math h gt double sinh x double x double cosh x double x double tanh x double x DESCRIPTION These functions compute the designated hyperbolic functions for real arguments DIAGNOSTICS Sinh and cosh return a huge value of appropriate sign when the correct value would overflow 7th Edition 1 SLEEP 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual SLEEP 3 NAME sleep suspend execution for interval SYNOPSIS sleep seconds unsigned seconds DESCRIPTION The current process is suspended from execution for the number of seconds specified by the argument The actual suspension time may be up to 1 second less than that requested because scheduled wakeups occur at fixed 1
312. n zero logical or has result zero if both of its arguments are zero It has result one if either of its arguments are non zero lt lt gt gt lt gt 7th Edition 2 BAS 1 A UNIX Programmer s Manual BAS 1 The relational operators lt less than lt less than or equal gt greater than gt greater than or equal equal to lt gt not equal to return one if their arguments are in the specified relation They return zero otherwise Relational operators at the same level extend as follows a gt b gt c is the same as a gt b amp b gt c Add and subtract Multiply and divide Exponentiation The following is a list of builtin functions arg i is the value of the i th actual parameter on the current level of function call exp x is the exponential function of x log x is the natural logarithm of x sqr x is the square root of x sin x is the sine of x radians cos x is the cosine of x radians atn x is the arctangent of x Its value is between 7 2 and 7 2 rnd is a uniformly distributed random number between zero and one expr is the only form of program input A line is read from the input and evaluated as an expres sion The resultant value is returned abs x is the absolute value of x int x returns x truncated towards 0 to an integer FILES tmp btm temporary b out save file bin ed for edit DIAGNOSTICS Syntax errors cause the incorrect line to be typed with
313. nated by or then the file objfil or corfil respectively is used for subsequent requests So that for example m will cause Y to refer to objfil gt name Dot is assigned to the variable or register named A shell is called to read the rest of the line following modifier Miscellaneous commands The available modifiers are lt f Read commands from the file f and return gt f Send output to the file f which is created if it does not exist r Print the general registers and the instruction addressed by pc Dot is set to pc f Print the floating registers in single or double length If the floating point status of ps 1s set to double 0200 bit then double length is used anyway b Print all breakpoints and their associated counts and commands a ALGOL 68 stack backtrace If address is given then it is taken to be the address of 7th Edition ADB 1 S 26 ge modifier Manage be cs Ss VARIABLES UNIX Programmer s Manual ADB 1 the current frame instead of r4 If count is given then only the first count frames are printed C stack backtrace If address is given then it is taken as the address of the current frame instead of r5 If C is used then the names and 16 bit values of all automatic and static variables are printed for each active function If count is given then only the first count frames are printed The names and values of external variables are printed Set the p
314. nd spaces from its neighbors n The first n characters are ignored Fields are skipped before characters SEE ALSO sort 1 comm 1 7th Edition 1 UNITS 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual UNITS 1 NAME units conversion program SYNOPSIS units DESCRIPTION Units converts quantities expressed in various standard scales to their equivalents in other scales It works interactively in this fashion You have inch You want cm 2 54000e 00 3 9370le 01 A quantity is specified as a multiplicative combination of units optionally preceded by a numeric multi plier Powers are indicated by suffixed positive integers division by the usual sign You have 15 pounds force in2 You want atm 1 02069e 00 9 79730e 01 Units only does multiplicative scale changes Thus it can convert Kelvin to Rankine but not Centigrade to Fahrenheit Most familiar units abbreviations and metric prefixes are recognized together with a generous leavening of exotica and a few constants of nature including pi ratio of circumference to diameter C speed of light e charge on an electron g acceleration of gravity force same as g mole Avogadro s number water pressure head per unit height of water au astronomical unit Pound is a unit of mass Compound names are run together e g lightyear British units that differ from their US counterparts are prefixed thus brgallon Currency is denoted belgiumfranc britain pound For a compl
315. ne char acter Fputs copies the null terminated string s to the named output stream Neither routine copies the terminal null character SEE ALSO fopen 3 gets 3 putc 3 printf 3 ferror 3 fread 3 for fwrite BUGS Puts appends a newline fputs does not all in the name of backward compatibility 7th Edition 1 QSORT 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual QSORT 3 NAME qsort quicker sort SYNOPSIS qsort base nel width compar char base int compar DESCRIPTION Qsort is an implementation of the quicker sort algorithm The first argument is a pointer to the base of the data the second is the number of elements the third is the width of an element in bytes the last is the name of the comparison routine to be called with two arguments which are pointers to the elements being compared The routine must return an integer less than equal to or greater than 0 according as the first argument is to be considered less than equal to or greater than the second SEE ALSO sort 1 7th Edition 1 RAND 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual RAND 3 NAME rand srand random number generator SYNOPSIS srand seed int seed rand DESCRIPTION Rand uses a multiplicative congruential random number generator with period 2 to return successive pseudo random numbers in the range from 0 to Pole The generator is reinitialized by calling srand with 1 as argument It can be set to a random starting point by calling srand with
316. ned by bits 200 and 100 are ignored In raw mode every character is passed immediately to the program without waiting until a full line has been typed No erase or kill processing is done the end of file indicator EOT the interrupt character DEL and the quit character FS are not treated specially There are no delays and no echoing and no replacement of one character for another characters are a full 8 bits for both input and output parity is up to the program Mode 020 causes input carriage returns to be turned into new lines input of either CR or LF causes LF CR both to be echoed for terminals with a new line function CBREAK is a sort of half cooked rare mode Programs can read each character as soon as typed instead of waiting for a full line but quit and interrupt work and output delays case translation CRMOD XTABS ECHO and parity work normally On the other hand there is no erase or kill and no special treatment of or EOT TANDEM mode causes the system to produce a stop character default DC3 whenever the input queue is in danger of overflowing and a start character default DC1 when the input queue has drained sufficiently It is useful for flow control when the terminal is actually another machine that obeys the conventions Several ioctl calls have the form include lt sgtty h gt ioctl fildes code arg struct sgttyb arg The applicable codes are TIOCGETP Fetch the parameters associat
317. nes If name designates a null string a file descriptor is returned as described but no entry is created in the file system Once created an mpx file may be opened see open 2 by any process This provides a form of inter process communication whereby a process B can call process A by opening an mpx file created by A To B the file is ordinary with one exception the connect primitive could be applied to it Otherwise the functions described below are used only in process A and descendants that inherit the open mpx file When a process opens an mpx file the owner of the file receives a control message when the file is next read The method for answering this kind of call involves using attach and detach as described in more detail below Once B has opened A s mpx file it is said to have a channel to A A channel is a pair of data streams in this case one from B to A and the other from A to B Several processes may open the same mpx file yielding multiple channels within the one mpx file By accessing the appropriate channel A can com municate with B and any others When A reads see read 2 from the mpx file data written to A by the other processes appears in A s buffer using a record format described in mpxio 5 When A writes see write 2 on its mpx file the data must be formatted in a similar way The following commands are used to manipulate mpx files and channels join adds a new channel on an mpx file to an op
318. nfree If the new block address is 0 there are no blocks left so give an error If s_nfree became 0 read the new block into s_nfree and s_free To free a block check if s_nfree is NICFREE if so copy s_nfree and the s_free array into it write it out and set s_nfree to 0 In any event set s free s_nfree to the freed block s address and increment s_nfree S_ninode is the number of free i numbers in the s_inode array To allocate an i node if s_ninode is greater than 0 decrement it and return s_inode s ninode If it was 0 read the i list and place the numbers of all free inodes up to NICINOD into the x inode array then try again To free an i node provided s_ninode is less than NICINODE place its number into s_inode s ninode and increment s_ninode If s_ninode is already NICINODE don t bother to enter the freed i node into any table This list of i nodes is only to speed up the allocation process the information as to whether the inode is really free or not is maintained in the inode itself S_flock and s_ilock are flags maintained in the core copy of the file system while it is mounted and their values on disk are immaterial The value of s_fmod on disk is likewise immaterial it is used as a flag to indicate that the super block has changed and should be copied to the disk during the next periodic update of file system information S_ronly is a write protection indicator its disk value is also imma terial S_time is the last ti
319. nguage ainia AR Ae ea oe a Re Re store delete firstkey nextkey data bas cb C program abort generate IOT fault abort 3 abs integer absolute value abs 3 absolute value floor ceiling functions floor 3 ac login accounting ac 1 access determine accessibility of fle access 2 access physical addresses 2 2 0 000 phys 2 accessibility of nle access 2 accountin s ea u ad ra ae Ree ae eS ac 1 ACCOUNUNG sp ssi Zr ao Ge AMES Rl RE WE aS sa 1 accounting file 2 2 0 2 00 00200 e acct 5 accounting on or off 2 2 020007 acct 2 accton system accounting sa 1 acos atan atan2 trigonometric functions sin 3 ACU interface dn 4 adb debugger 2 0 2 0005 adb 1 Addresses mi e X Pee oR a PO ee R phys 2 ARES a A cece IER ea oe By aca BG ee L L basename 1 al graphics Interface plot 3 alarm schedule signal after specified time alarm 2 allocation a as A A brk 2 allocator e S26 ese He ea Se de ee Ge Swe malloc 3 analysis programs 1 2 00 eee eee lex 1 antique Media popa eee co hoe eh ge ae oe Bw 8 bed 6 a out assembler and link editor output a out 5 ar archive and library maintainer 2 ar 1 ar archive library file format
320. nput file BUGS Uses a quadratic algorithm not worth fixing for the typical use of ordering a library archive file 7th Edition 1 TTY 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TTY 1 NAME tty get terminal name SYNOPSIS tty DESCRIPTION Tty prints the pathname of the user s terminal DIAGNOSTICS not a tty if the standard input file is not a terminal 7th Edition 1 UNIQ 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual UNIQ 1 NAME uniq report repeated lines in a file SYNOPSIS uniq ude n n input output DESCRIPTION Uniq reads the input file comparing adjacent lines In the normal case the second and succeeding copies of repeated lines are removed the remainder is written on the output file Note that repeated lines must be adjacent in order to be found see sort 1 If the u flag is used just the lines that are not repeated in the original file are output The d option specifies that one copy of just the repeated lines is to be written The normal mode output is the union of the u and d mode outputs The e option supersedes u and d and generates an output report in default style but with each line preceded by a count of the number of times it occurred The n arguments specify skipping an initial portion of each line in the comparison n The first n fields together with any blanks before each are ignored A field is defined as a string of non space non tab characters separated by tabs a
321. nput to the shell and the resulting command s executed exec arg The command specified by the arguments is executed in place of this shell without creating a new process Input output arguments may appear and if no other arguments are given cause the shell input output to be modified exit 7 Causes a non interactive shell to exit with the exit status specified by n If n is omitted then the exit status is that of the last command executed An end of file will also exit from the shell export name The given names are marked for automatic export to the environment of subsequently executed commands If no arguments are given then a list of exportable names is printed login arg Equivalent to exec login arg newgrp arg Equivalent to exec newgrp arg read name One line is read from the standard input successive words of the input are assigned to the vari ables name in order with leftover words to the last variable The return code is O unless the end of file is encountered readonly name The given names are marked readonly and the values of the these names may not be changed by subsequent assignment If no arguments are given then a list of all readonly names is printed set eknptuvx arg e If non interactive then exit immediately if a command fails k All keyword arguments are placed in the environment for a command not just those that precede the command name n Read commands b
322. ns that a program attempting to read will be suspended until an entire line has been typed Also no matter how many characters are requested in the read call at most one line will be returned It is not however necessary to read a whole line at once any number of characters may be requested in a read even one without losing information There are special modes discussed below that permit the program to read each character as typed without waiting for a full line During input erase and kill processing is normally done By default the character erases the last character typed except that it will not erase beyond the beginning of a line or an EOT By default the character kills the entire line up to the point where it was typed but not beyond an EOT Both these characters operate on a keystroke basis independently of any backspacing or tabbing that may have been done Either or may be entered literally by preceding it by VW the erase or kill character remains but the V disappears These two characters may be changed to others When desired all upper case letters are mapped into the corresponding lower case letter The upper case letter may be generated by preceding it by Y In addition the following escape sequences can be generated on output and accepted on input for use v V Certain ASCII control characters have special meaning These characters are not passed to a reading
323. nt Ignore and only files contain words one per line SEE ALSO deroff 1 7th Edition 1 PROF 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual PROF 1 NAME prof display profile data SYNOPSIS prof v a 1 low high file DESCRIPTION Prof interprets the file mon out produced by the monitor subroutine Under default modes the symbol table in the named object file a out default is read and correlated with the mon out profile file For each external symbol the percentage of time spent executing between that symbol and the next is printed in decreasing order together with the number of times that routine was called and the number of milliseconds per call If the a option is used all symbols are reported rather than just external symbols If the 1 option is used the output is listed by symbol value rather than decreasing percentage If the v option is used all printing is suppressed and a graphic version of the profile is produced on the standard output for display by the plot 1 filters The numbers low and high by default O and 100 cause a selected percentage of the profile to be plotted with accordingly higher resolution In order for the number of calls to a routine to be tallied the p option of cc must have been given when the file containing the routine was compiled This option also arranges for the mon out file to be produced automatically FILES mon out for profile a out for namelis
324. nt as a symbol and enter it as undefined in the symbol table This is useful for loading wholly from a library since initially the symbol table is empty and an unresolved reference is needed to force the loading of the first routine lx This option is an abbreviation for the library name lib libx a where x is a string If that does not exist ld tries usr lib libx a A library is searched when its name is encountered so the placement of a l is significant X Do not preserve local non globl symbols in the output symbol table only enter external sym bols This option saves some space in the output file X Save local symbols except for those whose names begin with L This option is used by cc 1 to discard internally generated labels while retaining symbols local to routines r Generate relocation bits in the output file so that it can be the subject of another d run This flag also prevents final definitions from being given to common symbols and suppresses the undefined symbol diagnostics d Force definition of common storage even if the r flag is present n Arrange that when the output file is executed the text portion will be read only and shared among all users executing the file This involves moving the data areas up to the first possible 4K word boundary following the end of the text i When the output file is executed the program text and data areas will live in separate address spaces T
325. nt files in the archive file The meanings of the key charac ters are d Delete the named files from the archive file r Replace the named files in the archive file If the optional character u is used with r then only those files with modified dates later than the archive files are replaced If an optional position ing character from the set abi is used then the posname argument must be present and specifies that new files are to be placed after a or before b or i posname Otherwise new files are placed at the end q Quickly append the named files to the end of the archive file Optional positioning characters are invalid The command does not check whether the added members are already in the archive Useful only to avoid quadratic behavior when creating a large archive piece by piece t Print a table of contents of the archive file If no names are given all files in the archive are tabled If names are given only those files are tabled p Print the named files in the archive m Move the named files to the end of the archive If a positioning character is present then the posname argument must be present and as in r specifies where the files are to be moved X Extract the named files If no names are given all files in the archive are extracted In neither case does x alter the archive file Y Verbose Under the verbose option ar gives a file by file description of the making of a new archive file from the old archive and the con
326. nt is a list of name value pairs that is passed to an executed program in the same way as a normal argument list see exec 2 and environ 5 The shell interacts with the environment in several ways On invocation the shell scans the environment and creates a parameter for each name found giving it the corresponding value Executed commands inherit the same environment If the user modifies the values of these parameters or creates new ones none of these affects the environment unless the export command is used to bind the shell s parameter to the environment The environment seen by any executed command is thus composed of any unmodified name value pairs originally inher ited by the shell plus any modifications or additions all of which must be noted in export commands The environment for any simple command may be augmented by prefixing it with one or more assign ments to parameters Thus these two lines are equivalent TERM 450 cmd args export TERM TERM 450 cmd args If the k flag is set all keyword arguments are placed in the environment even if the occur after the command name The following prints a b c and c echo a b c set k echo a b c Signals The INTERRUPT and QUIT signals for an invoked command are ignored if the command is followed by amp otherwise signals have the values inherited by the shell from its parent But see also trap Execution Each time a command is executed the above substitutions ar
327. nt returns O if the action occurred 1 if special is inaccessible or not an appropriate file if name does not exist if special is already mounted if name is in use or if there are already too many file sys tems mounted Umount returns O if the action occurred 1 if if the special file is inaccessible or does not have a mounted file system or if there are active files in the mounted file system ASSEMBLER mount 21 sys mount special name rwflag umount 22 sys umount special 7th Edition 1 MPX 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual MPX 2 NAME mpx create and manipulate multiplexed files SYNOPSIS mpx name access char name join fd xd chan xd extract i xd attach i xd detach i xd connect fd cd end npgrp i xd pgrp ckill i xd signal include lt sys mx h gt mpxcall cmd vec int vec DESCRIPTION mpxcall cmd vec is the system call shared by the library routines described below Cmd selects a command using values defined in lt sys mx h gt Vec is the address of a structure containing the argu ments for the command mpx name access Mpx creates and opens the file name with access permission access see creat 2 and returns a file descriptor available for reading and writing A 1 is returned if the file cannot be created if name already exists or if the file table or other operating system data structures are full The file descriptor is required for use with other routi
328. nt to 1p it is useful for stepping through text If an interrupt signal ASCII DEL is sent ed prints a and returns to its command level Some size limitations 512 characters per line 256 characters per global command list 64 characters per file name and 128K characters in the temporary file The limit on the number of lines depends on the amount of core each line takes 1 word When reading a file ed discards ASCII NUL characters and all characters after the last newline It refuses to read files containing non ASCII characters tmp e ed hup work is saved here if terminal hangs up SEE ALSO B W Kernighan A Tutorial Introduction to the ED Text Editor B W Kernighan Advanced editing on UNIX sed 1 crypt 1 DIAGNOSTICS BUGS Mame for inaccessible file for errors in commands TMP for temporary file overflow To protect against throwing away valuable work a g or e command is considered to be in error unless a w has occurred since the last buffer change A second g or e will be obeyed regardless The command mishandles DEL A command cannot be subject to a g command Because 0 is an illegal address for a w command it is not possible to create an empty file with ed 7th Edition 5 EQN 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual EQN 1 NAME eqn neqn checked typeset mathematics SYNOPSIS eqn dxy pn sn fn file checked file DESCRIPTION Eq
329. ntire address space is dumped In general the debugger adb 1 is sufficient to deal with core images SEE ALSO adb 1 signal 2 7th Edition 1 DIR 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual DIR 5 NAME dir format of directories SYNOPSIS include lt sys dir h gt DESCRIPTION A directory behaves exactly like an ordinary file save that no user may write into a directory The fact that a file is a directory is indicated by a bit in the flag word of its i node entry see filsys 5 The struc ture of a directory entry as given in the include file is ifndef DIRSIZ define DIRSIZ14 endif struct direct ino t d_ino char d_name DIRSIZ By convention the first two entries in each directory are for and The first is an entry for the directory itself The second is for the parent directory The meaning of is modified for the root directory of the master file system and for the root directories of removable file systems In the first case there is no parent and in the second the system does not permit off device references Therefore in both cases has the same meaning as SEE ALSO filsys 5 7th Edition 1 DUMP 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual DUMP 5 NAME dump ddate incremental dump format SYNOPSIS include lt sys types h gt include lt sys ino h gt include lt dumprestor h gt DESCRIPTION Tapes used by dump and restor 1 contain a header record two groups of bit map re
330. o effect on the file until a w write command is given The copy of the text being edited resides in a temporary file called the buffer Commands to ed have a simple and regular structure zero or more addresses followed by a single char acter command possibly followed by parameters to the command These addresses specify one or more lines in the buffer Missing addresses are supplied by default In general only one command may appear on a line Certain commands allow the addition of text to the buffer While ed is accepting text it is said to be in input mode In this mode no commands are recognized all input is merely collected Input mode is left by typing a period alone at the beginning of a line Ed supports a limited form of regular expression notation A regular expression specifies a set of strings of characters A member of this set of strings is said to be matched by the regular expression In the following specification for regular expressions the word character means any character but new line 1 Any character except a special character matches itself Special characters are the regular expression delimiter plus and sometimes EA A matches any character A followed by any character except a digit or matches that character 4 A nonempty string s bracketed s or fs matches any character in or not in s In s has no special meaning and may only appear as the first letter A substring
331. ock lock a process in primary mem kmem core malloc free realloc calloc main sort sort or perror sys errlist sys _nerr system error precision itom madd msub mult mdiv chmod change getty set typewriter umask set file creation chmod change frexp Idexp touch update date last mount umount mount umount SAS E mtab integer itom madd msub mult mdiv min mv lseek tell hp RH 11 RP04 RPOS RP06 rp RP 11 RP03 multiple precision integer 2 itom madd multiple precision integer itom madd msub getenv value for environment getlogin get login mktemp make a unique file pwd working directory tty get terminal getpw get nlist get entries from nm print ttyname isatty ttyslot find terminals conventional ncheck generate dumpdir print the eqn creat create a arcv convert archives to newgrp log in to a fork spawn aT os rte See cd eval exec exit export login dbminit fetch store delete firstkey xvii man print sections of this manual manipulate tape archive 4 mantissa and exponent 0 manual S o Ae Me gee Ma Sao dear BPA RT A manualta sd ts Manuscripts ir a ee a 8 Mask tec te ie ae tel rea deh ty slo he od td et MatheMaties eso st ase he eo Ace Mot G
332. od octal dumpdir print the names of files on a des riptori s 24 448 2 a Soa fea AT a R a ee E Xi data Sink 00 sien ah a a D E a AR a datatypes eck a eae Oe e Da ia N database operator o R ER R a e ee ee data phone interface o dit ad e date and time date and time to ASCII date last modified of a file dbminit fetch store delete firstkey de desk calculator 2 2 eee dcheck file system directory consistency dd convert andcopyafile ddate incremental dump format debuggers isa HRD Be o eye ae SG DEC tape iors goa Go chins Seah a ee Boek ae Be e default directory e e eote e eA definitions Tor egn s aos RR ee BA ON de a a delete firstkey nextkey data base deliver the last part of a file deny messages La a a RTE a deroff remove nroff troff tbl and eqn DES encryption salen e o eS E AE descriptor 2 2G al Sa es Be ER ee ah desk calculator sde tocar eke Sige Soe ah determine accessibility of fle determine filetype 2 000 DEVICE A Sake eo df disk free saris e Paes a ee Gu dys Ste S diff differential file comparator diff3 3 way differential file comparison differential file comparator differential file comparison 2 4 dir format of directories o a AITE
333. of a shell pipeline may have a system name All other commands are executed on the system of the first command The use of the shell metacharacter will probably not do what you want it to do The shell tokens lt lt and gt gt are not implemented There is no notification of denial of execution on the remote machine 7th Edition 1 WAIT 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual WAIT 1 NAME wait await completion of process SYNOPSIS wait DESCRIPTION Wait until all processes started with amp have completed and report on abnormal terminations Because the wait 2 system call must be executed in the parent process the Shell itself executes wait without creating a new process SEE ALSO sh 1 BUGS Not all the processes of a 3 or more stage pipeline are children of the Shell and thus can t be waited for 7th Edition 1 WALL 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual WALL 1M NAME wall write to all users SYNOPSIS etc wall DESCRIPTION Wall reads its standard input until an end of file It then sends this message preceded by Broadcast Message to all logged in users The sender should be super user to override any protections the users may have invoked FILES dev tty etc utmp SEE ALSO mesg 1 write 1 DIAGNOSTICS Cannot send to when the open on a user s tty file fails 7th Edition 1 WC 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual WC 1 NAME we word count SYNOPSIS we lwc name DES
334. of the execution of usr lib atrun there may be bugs in scheduling things almost exactly 24 hours into the future 7th Edition 1 AWK 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual AWK 1 NAME awk pattern scanning and processing language SYNOPSIS awk Ec prog file DESCRIPTION Awk scans each input file for lines that match any of a set of patterns specified in prog With each pat tern in prog there can be an associated action that will be performed when a line of a file matches the pattern The set of patterns may appear literally as prog or in a file specified as f file 3 Files are read in order if there are no files the standard input is read The file name means the standard input Each line is matched against the pattern portion of every pattern action statement the associated action is performed for each matched pattern An input line is made up of fields separated by white space This default can be changed by using FS vide infra The fields are denoted 1 2 0 refers to the entire line A pattern action statement has the form pattern action A missing action means print the line a missing pattern always matches An action is a sequence of statements A statement can be one of the following if conditional statement else statement while conditional statement for expression conditional expression statement break continue statement variable
335. ol flow constructs essentially identical to those in C statement grouping statement statement statement decision making if condition statement else statement switch integer value case integer statement default statement loops while condition statement for expression condition expression statement do limits statement repeat statement until condition break n next n and some syntactic sugar to make programs easier to read and write free form input multiple statements line automatic continuation comments this is a comment translation of relationals gt gt etc become GT GE etc return expression returns expression to caller from function define define name replacement include include filename The option h causes quoted strings to be turned into 27H constructs C copies comments to the out put and attempts to format it neatly Normally continuation lines are marked with a amp in column 1 the option 6x makes the continuation character x and places it in column 6 Ratfor is best used with f77 1 SEE ALSO f77 1 B W Kernighan and P J Plauger Software Tools Addison Wesley 1976 7th Edition 1 REFER 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual REFER 1 NAME refer lookbib find and insert literature references in documents SYNOPSIS refer option lookbib file DESCRIPTION Lookbib accepts keywords from the standard input and searches a b
336. on many sources and while more haphazard than an ordinary dictionary is also more effective in respect to proper names and popular technical words Coverage of the specialized vocabularies of biology medicine and chemistry is light Pertinent auxiliary files may be specified by name arguments indicated below with their default settings Copies of all output are accumulated in the history file The stop list filters out misspellings e g thier thy y 1er that would otherwise pass Two routines help maintain the hash lists used by spell Both expect a list of words one per line from the standard input Spellin adds the words on the standard input to the preexisting list and places a new list on the standard output If no list is specified the new list is created from scratch Spellout looks up each word in the standard input and prints on the standard output those that are missing from or present on with option d the hash list D usr dict hlist ab hashed spelling lists American amp British S usr dict hstop hashed stop list H usr dict spellhist history file asr lib spell deroff 1 sort 1 tee 1 sed 1 The spelling list s coverage is uneven new installations will probably wish to monitor the output for several months to gather local additions British spelling was done by an American 7th Edition 1 SPLINE 1G UNIX Programmer s Manual SPLINE 1G NAME spline interpolate smooth curve SYNOPSIS spline
337. on was indicated by An input field is defined as a string of non space characters it extends to the next inappropriate character or until the field width if specified is exhausted The conversion character indicates the interpretation of the input field the corresponding pointer argu ment must usually be of a restricted type The following conversion characters are legal asingle is expected in the input at this point no assignment is done d a decimal integer is expected the corresponding argument should be an integer pointer o an octal integer is expected the corresponding argument should be a integer pointer x a hexadecimal integer is expected the corresponding argument should be an integer pointer s a character string is expected the corresponding argument should be a character pointer pointing to an array of characters large enough to accept the string and a terminating 30 which will be added The input field is terminated by a space character or a newline c a character is expected the corresponding argument should be a character pointer The normal skip over space characters is suppressed in this case to read the next non space character try 1s If a field width is given the corresponding argument should refer to a character array and the indi cated number of characters is read a floating point number is expected the next field is converted accordingly and stored through the f corresponding argu
338. onal sign and decimal point E sqrt E length E number of significant decimal digits scale E number of digits right of decimal point L E E Operators is remainder is power prefix and postfix apply to names f gt JS 4 A Statements E A if E S while E S for E E E S null statement break quit Function definitions define L L L auto L L Sites return E T Functions in 1 math library s x sine c x cosine e x exponential x log a x arctangent j n x Bessel function 7th Edition 1 BC 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual BC 1 All function arguments are passed by value The value of a statement that is an expression is printed unless the main operator is an assignment Either semicolons or newlines may separate statements Assignment to scale influences the number of digits to be retained on arithmetic operations in the manner of dc 1 Assignments to ibase or obase set the input and output number radix respectively The same letter may be used as an array a function and a simple variable simultaneously All variables are global to the program Auto variables are pushed down during function calls When using arrays as function arguments or defining them as automatic variables empty square brackets must follow the array name For example scale 20 define e x auto a b c i s a 1 b 1 s 1 forG 1 1 1 i
339. ontains a zero bit for all inodes that were empty on the file system when dumped MAGIC All header records have this number in c_magic CHECKSUM Header records checksum to this value The fields of the header structure are as follows C type The type of the header C date The date the dump was taken c_ddate The date the file system was dumped from C volume The current volume number of the dump c_tapea The current number of this 512 byte record c_inumber The number of the inode being dumped if this is of type TS_INODE C magic This contains the value MAGIC above truncated as needed c_checksum This contains whatever value is needed to make the record sum to CHECKSUM C dinode This is a copy of the inode as it appears on the file system see filsys 5 c_count The count of characters in c_addr c_addr An atray of characters describing the blocks of the dumped file A character is zero if the block associated with that character was not present on the file system otherwise the char acter is non zero If the block was not present on the file system no block was dumped the block will be restored as a hole in the file If there is not sufficient space in this record to describe all of the blocks in a file TS ADDR records will be scattered through the file each one picking up where the last left off Each volume except the last ends with a tapemark read as an end of file The last volume ends with a TS_END record and then the
340. or ed in define FORMAT 60 to print a value The file has four sections a header the program and data text relocation information and a symbol table in that order The last two may be empty if the program was loaded with the s option of ld or if the symbols and relocation have been removed by strip 1 In the header the sizes of each section are given in bytes but are even The size of the header is not included in any of the other sizes When an a out file is loaded into core for execution three logical segments are set up the text segment the data segment with uninitialized data which starts off as all 0 following initialized and a stack The text segment begins at O in the core image the header is not loaded If the magic number in the header is 0407 8 it indicates that the text segment is not to be write protected and shared so the data 7th Edition 1 A OUT S5 UNIX Programmer s Manual A OUT 5 segment is immediately contiguous with the text segment If the magic number is 0410 the data seg ment begins at the first 0 mod 8K byte boundary following the text segment and the text segment is not writable by the program if other processes are executing the same file they will share the text segment If the magic number is 411 the text segment is again pure write protected and shared and moreover instruction and data space are separated the text and data segment both begin at location 0 If the m
341. ord FILENAME the name of the current input file OFS the out put field separator default blank ORS the output record separator default newline and OFMT the output format for numbers default 6g EXAMPLES Print lines longer than 72 characters length gt 72 Print first two fields in opposite order print 2 1 Add up first column print sum and average s 1 END print sum is s average is s NR Print fields in reverse order for i NF i gt 0 i print i Print all lines between start stop pairs start stop Print all lines whose first field is different from previous one 1 prev print prev 1 SEE ALSO lex 1 sed 1 A V Aho B W Kernighan P J Weinberger Awk a pattern scanning and processing language BUGS There are no explicit conversions between numbers and strings To force an expression to be treated as a number add 0 to it to force it to be treated as a string concatenate to it 7th Edition 2 BAS 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual BAS 1 NAME bas basic SYNOPSIS bas file DESCRIPTION Bas is a dialect of Basic If a file argument is provided the file is used for input before the terminal is read Bas accepts lines of the form statement integer statement Integer numbered statements known as internal statements are stored for later execution They are stored in sorted ascending order Non numbered statements are immediately execut
342. ords constituting the program are listed on the left RK drive 0 012700 177412 005040 010040 012740 000005 105710 002376 005007 RP drive 0 012700 176726 005040 005040 005040 010040 012740 000005 105710 002376 005007 FILES anix system code mov clr mov mov tstb bge clr mov clr clr clr mov mov tstb bge clr rkda r0 r0 rkda cleared by start r0 10 5 10 10 1b pe rpmr r0 10 10 10 r0 10 5 10 10 1b pe usr mdec rpuboot usr mdec hpuboot copies of primary bootstrap boot second stage bootstrap SEE ALSO init 8 7th Edition CRASH 8 UNIX Programmer s Manual CRASH 8 NAME crash what to do when the system crashes DESCRIPTION This section gives at least a few clues about how to proceed if the system crashes It can t pretend to be complete Bringing it back up If the reason for the crash is not evident see below for guidance on evident you may want to try to dump the system if you feel up to debugging At the moment a dump can be taken only on magtape With a tape mounted and ready stop the machine load address 44 and start This should write a copy of all of core on the tape with an EOF mark Caution Any error is taken to mean the end of core has been reached This means that you must be sure the ring is in the tape is ready and the tape is clean and new If the dump fails you can try
343. orm x then addresses this line Gael The list command prints the addressed lines in an unambiguous way non graphic characters are printed in two digit octal and long lines are folded The command may be placed on the same line after any non i o command ma 7th Edition 3 ED 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual ED 1 The move command repositions the addressed lines after the line addressed by a The last of the moved lines becomes the current line EIA D The print command prints the addressed lines 1s left at the last line printed The p command may be placed on the same line after any non i o command P This command is a synonym for p 6 q The quit command causes ed to exit No automatic write of a file is done This command is the same as q except that no diagnostic results when no w has been given since the last buffer alteration r filename The read command reads in the given file after the addressed line If no file name is given the remembered file name if any is used see e and f commands The file name is remembered if there was no remembered file name already Address 0 is legal for r and causes the file to be read at the beginning of the buffer If the read is successful the number of characters read is typed is left at the last line read in from the file s regular expression replacement or s regular expression replacement g The substitute command s
344. out is used It is executable if no errors occurred during the assembly and if there were no unresolved external references FILES Nib as2 pass 2 of the assembler tmp atm 1 3 temporary a out object SEE ALSO 1d 1 nm 1 adb 1 a out 5 UNIX Assembler Manual by D M Ritchie DIAGNOSTICS When an input file cannot be read its name followed by a question mark is typed and assembly ceases When syntactic or semantic errors occur a single character diagnostic is typed out together with the line number and the file name in which it occurred Errors in pass cause cancellation of pass 2 The pos sible errors are Parentheses error Parentheses error String not terminated properly Indirection used illegally Error in address Branch instruction is odd or too remote Error in expression Error in local f or b type symbol Garbage unknown character End of file inside an if Multiply defined symbol as label Word quantity assembled at odd address different in pass 1 and 2 Relocation error Undefined symbol Syntax error 3 A d x E DS SS MR eee BUGS Syntax errors can cause incorrect line numbers in following diagnostics 7th Edition PDP11 1 AT 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual AT 1 NAME at execute commands at a later time SYNOPSIS at time day file DESCRIPTION At squirrels away a copy of the named file standard input default to be used as input to sh 1 at a specified later time
345. p space image of the program text portion of the file when its last user ter minates Thus when the next user of the file executes it the text need not be read from the file system but can simply be swapped in saving time Ability to set this bit is restricted to the super user since swap space is consumed by the images it is only worth while for heavily used commands Only the owner of a file or the super user may change the mode Only the super user can set the 1000 mode SEE ALSO chmod 1 DIAGNOSTIC Zero is returned if the mode is changed 1 is returned if name cannot be found or if current user is nei ther the owner of the file nor the super user ASSEMBLER chmod 15 sys chmod name mode 7th Edition 1 CHOWN 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual CHOWN 2 NAME chown change owner and group of a file SYNOPSIS chown name owner group char name DESCRIPTION The file whose name is given by the null terminated string pointed to by name has its owner and group changed as specified Only the super user may execute this call because if users were able to give files away they could defeat the nonexistent file space accounting procedures SEE ALSO chown 1 passwd 5 DIAGNOSTICS Zero is returned if the owner is changed 1 is returned on illegal owner changes ASSEMBLER chown 16 sys chown name owner group 7th Edition 1 CLOSE 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual CLOSE 2 NAME close close a fi
346. play end etext edata last locations in units conversion cb C make maintain nice set assert lint aC lex generator of lexical analysis struct structure Fortran pkon pkoff establish packet arithmetic true false ungetc puts fputs putc putchar fputc putw putc putchar fputc init getpass read printer plotter XIX pra print file 26 8 5 a E K eee precision arithmetic language 4 precision integer arithmetic prepare execution profile primary memory 0 020000 2 PMES A s heed ee E RA OE a AS EA eres factor primitive system datatypes 0 Pi at oS RY By eee oe ee BS print and set the date o o print calendar print file ss ya sta a De ee BS print Mame T tr Si eo we ao Re WEE A ER print sections of this manual print system facts print the names of files on a dump tape printf fprintf sprintf formatted output priority priority POCERO dhs ep edged do a Bree reacios process process process process process process control initialization 0 process identification o process in primary memory o process status process times process to access physical addresses process to terminate PLOCESS IT ACE es ac rd aber H K Ke KE ETA 8 process
347. popped and that value is used as a non negative scale factor the DC 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual DC 1 appropriate number of places are printed on output and maintained during multiplication divi sion and exponentiation The interaction of scale factor input base and output base will be rea sonable if all are changed together Z The stack level is pushed onto the stack Z replaces the number on the top of the stack with its length A line of input is taken from the input source usually the terminal and executed e are used by bc for array operations An example which prints the first ten values of n is lal dsa plal0 gt y sy Osal lyx SEE ALSO bc 1 which is a preprocessor for dc providing infix notation and a C like syntax which implements functions and reasonable control structures for programs DIAGNOSTICS x is unimplemented where x is an octal number stack empty for not enough elements on the stack to do what was asked Out of space when the free list is exhausted too many digits Out of headers for too many numbers being kept around Out of pushdown for too many items on the stack Nesting Depth for too many levels of nested execution 7th Edition 2 DCHECK 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual DCHECK 1M NAME dcheck file system directory consistency check SYNOPSIS dcheck i numbers filesystem DESCRIPTION Dcheck reads the directories in a file system and
348. program except in raw mode where they lose their special character Also it is possible to change these characters from the default see below EOT Control D may be used to generate an end of file from a terminal When an EOT is received on 1 TTY 4 DEL FS DC3 DC UNIX Programmer s Manual TTY 4 all the characters waiting to be read are immediately passed to the program without waiting for a new line and the EOT is discarded Thus if there are no characters waiting which is to say the EOT occurred at the beginning of a line zero characters will be passed back and this is the standard end of file indication Rubout is not passed to a program but generates an interrupt signal which is sent to all processes with the associated control terminal Normally each such process is forced to ter minate but arrangements may be made either to ignore the signal or to receive a trap to an agreed upon location See signal 2 Control or control shift L generates the quit signal Its treatment is identical to the interrupt signal except that unless a receiving process has made other arrangements it will not only be terminated but a core image file will be generated Control S delays all printing on the terminal until something is typed in Control Q restarts printing after DC3 without generating any input to a program When the carrier signal from the dataset drops usually because the user has hung up his terminal a
349. ps those for which there isn t room Segments that run out of bounds are dropped not windowed Logarithmic axes may not be reversed 7th Edition 1 GREP 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual GREP 1 NAME grep egrep fgrep search a file for a pattern SYNOPSIS grep option expression file egrep option expression file ferep option strings file DESCRIPTION Commands of the grep family search the input files standard input default for lines matching a pattern Normally each line found is copied to the standard output unless the h flag is used the file name is shown if there is more than one input file Grep patterns are limited regular expressions in the style of ed 1 it uses a compact nondeterministic algorithm Egrep patterns are full regular expressions it uses a fast deterministic algorithm that some times needs exponential space Fgrep patterns are fixed strings it is fast and compact The following options are recognized vV All lines but those matching are printed c Only a count of matching lines is printed l The names of files with matching lines are listed once separated by newlines n Each line is preceded by its line number in the file b Each line is preceded by the block number on which it was found This is sometimes useful in locating disk block numbers by context S No output is produced only status h Do not print filename headers with ou
350. r the structured ver sion of the program will not be a valid Ratfor program Extended range DO s generate cryptic errors Columns 73 80 are not special even when s is in effect Will not generate Ratfor FOR statements 7th Edition 1 STTY 1 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual STTY 1 stty set terminal options SYNOPSIS stty option DESCRIPTION Stty sets certain I O options on the current output terminal With no argument it reports the current set tings of the options The option strings are selected from the following set even even odd odd raw raw cooked cbreak cbreak nl nl echo echo Icase Icase tabs tabs ek erase c kill c allow even parity disallow even parity allow odd parity disallow odd parity raw mode input no erase kill interrupt quit EOT parity bit passed back negate raw mode same as raw make each character available to read 2 as received no erase and kill make characters available to read only when newline is received allow carriage return for new line and output CR LF for carriage return or new line accept only new line to end lines echo back every character typed do not echo characters map upper case to lower case do not map case replace tabs by spaces when printing preserve tabs reset erase and kill characters back to normal and set erase character to c C can be of the form X which is interpreted as a
351. r 1 lock present when line printer is active cf copy of file to be printed if necessary df daemon control file Jpd 8 tf transient control file while lpr is working uucp work files and staging area for uucp 1 LOGFILE summary log LOG log file for one transaction mailboxes for mail 1 uid mail file for user uid uid lock lock file while uid is receiving mail initial working directory of a user typically wd is the user s login name profile set environment for sh 1 environ 5 calendar user s datebook for calendar 1 papers mostly in volume 2 of this manual typically in ms 7 format as assembler manual C C manual system source dev device drivers bio c common code cat c cat 4 dh c DH11 tty 4 tty tty 4 conf hardware dependent code mch s assembly language portion conf configuration generator h header include files acct h acct 5 stath stat 2 sys source for system proper main c pipe c sysent c system entry points HIER 7 UNIX Programmer s Manual HIER 7 usr src source programs for utilities etc cmd source of commands as assembler makefile recipe for rebuilding the assembler as1 s source of passl ar c source for ar 1 troff source for nroff and troff 1 nmake makefile for nroff tmake makefile for troff font source for font tables usr lib font ftR c Roman term terminal characteristics tables usr lib term tab300 c DASI 300 libc source for functions in lib
352. r calloc thus sequences of free malloc and realloc can exploit the search strategy of malloc to do storage compaction Calloc allocates space for an array of nelem elements of size elsize The space is initialized to zeros Each of the allocation routines returns a pointer to space suitably aligned after possible pointer coer cion for storage of any type of object DIAGNOSTICS Malloc realloc and calloc return a null pointer 0 if there is no available memory or if the arena has been detectably corrupted by storing outside the bounds of a block Malloc may be recompiled to check the arena very stringently on every transaction see the source code BUGS When realloc returns 0 the block pointed to by ptr may be destroyed 7th Edition 1 MKTEMP 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual MKTEMP 3 NAME mktemp make a unique file name SYNOPSIS char mktemp template char template DESCRIPTION Mktemp replaces template by a unique file name and returns the address of the template The template should look like a file name with six trailing X s which will be replaced with the current process id and a unique letter SEE ALSO getpid 2 7th Edition 1 MONITOR 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual MONITOR 3 NAME monitor prepare execution profile SYNOPSIS monitor lowpc highpc buffer bufsize nfunc int lowpc highpe short buffer DESCRIPTION An executable program created by cc p automatically inclu
353. r operator expr parentheses for grouping a has higher precedence than o Notice that all the operators and flags are separate arguments to test Notice also that parentheses are meaningful to the Shell and must be escaped SEE ALSO sh 1 find 1 7th Edition 1 TIME 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TIME 1 NAME time time a command SYNOPSIS time command DESCRIPTION The given command is executed after it is complete time prints the elapsed time during the command the time spent in the system and the time spent in execution of the command Times are reported in seconds The execution time can depend on what kind of memory the program happens to land in the user time in MOS is often half what it is in core The times are printed on the diagnostic output stream BUGS Elapsed time is accurate to the second while the CPU times are measured to the 60th second Thus the sum of the CPU times can be up to a second larger than the elapsed time 7th Edition 1 TK 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TK 1 NAME tk paginator for the Tektronix 4014 SYNOPSIS tk t N pL file DESCRIPTION The output of tk is intended for a Tektronix 4014 terminal Tk arranges for 66 lines to fit on the screen divides the screen into N columns and contributes an eight space page offset in the default single column case Tabs spaces and backspaces are collected and plotted when necessary Teletype Model 37 half and rev
354. r when the copy is complete Uulog maintains a summary log of uucp and uux 1 transactions in the file usr spool uucp LOGFILE by gathering information from partial log files named usr spool uucp LOG It removes the partial log files The options cause uulog to print logging information ssys Print information about work involving system sys uuser Print information about work done for the specified user FILES lasr spool uucp spool directory usr lib uucp other data and program files SEE ALSO uux 1 mail 1 D A Nowitz Uucp Implementation Description WARNING The domain of remotely accessible files can and for obvious security reasons usually should be severely restricted You will very likely not be able to fetch files by pathname ask a responsible person on the remote system to send them to you For the same reasons you will probably not be able to send files to arbitrary pathnames 7th Edition 1 UUCP 1C UNIX Programmer s Manual UUCP 1C BUGS All files received by uucp will be owned by uucp The m option will only work sending files or receiving a single file Receiving multiple files specified by special shell characters will not activate the m option 7th Edition 2 UUX 1C UNIX Programmer s Manual UUX 1C NAME uux unix to unix command execution SYNOPSIS uux command string DESCRIPTION Uux will gather 0 or more files from various systems execute a co
355. rary see intro 3 usr include standard directory for include files Itmp pe temporaries for pcc lasr lib ccom compiler for pcc SEE ALSO B W Kernighan and D M Ritchie The C Programming Language Prentice Hall 1978 D M Ritchie C Reference Manual monitor 3 prof 1 adb 1 1d 1 DIAGNOSTICS The diagnostics produced by C itself are intended to be self explanatory Occasional messages may be produced by the assembler or loader Of these the most mystifying are from the assembler as 1 in particular m which means a multiply defined external symbol function or data BUGS Pcc is little tried on the PDP11 specialized code generated for that machine has not been well shaken down The O optimizer was designed to work with cc its use with pcc is suspect 7th Edition PDP11 2 CD 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual CD 1 NAME cd change working directory SYNOPSIS ed directory DESCRIPTION Directory becomes the new working directory The process must have execute search permission in directory Because a new process is created to execute each command cd would be ineffective if it were written as a normal command It is therefore recognized and executed by the Shell SEE ALSO sh 1 pwd 1 chdir 2 7th Edition 1 CHMOD 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual CHMOD 1 NAME chmod change mode SYNOPSIS chmod mode file DESCRIPTION The mode of each named file is changed according to mode which ma
356. rbids writing Then if a second instance of the program attempts a creat an error is returned and the program knows that the name is unusable for the moment SEE ALSO write 2 close 2 chmod 2 umask 2 DIAGNOSTICS The value 1 is returned if a needed directory is not searchable the file does not exist and the direc tory in which it is to be created is not writable the file does exist and is unwritable the file is a direc tory there are already too many files open ASSEMBLER creat 8 sys creat name mode file descriptor in r0 7th Edition 1 DUP 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual DUP 2 NAME dup dup2 duplicate an open file descriptor SYNOPSIS dup fildes int fildes dup2 fildes fildes2 int fildes fildes2 DESCRIPTION Given a file descriptor returned from an open pipe or creat call dup allocates another file descriptor synonymous with the original The new file descriptor is returned In the second form of the call fildes is a file descriptor referring to an open file and fildes2 is a non negative integer less than the maximum value allowed for file descriptors approximately 19 Dup2 causes fildes2 to refer to the same file as fildes If fildes2 already referred to an open file it is closed first SEE ALSO creat 2 open 2 close 2 pipe 2 DIAGNOSTICS The value 1 is returned if the given file descriptor is invalid there are already too many open files ASSEMBLER dup 41 fil
357. re error no imt Like no fs but produced elsewhere no inodes The in core inode table is full Try increasing NINODE in param h Shouldn t be a panic just a user error no clock During initialization neither the line nor programmable clock was found to exist swap error An unrecoverable I O error during a swap Really shouldn t be a panic but it is hard to fix unlink iget The directory containing a file being deleted can t be found Hardware or software out of swap space A program needs to be swapped out and there is no more swap space It has to be increased This really shouldn t be a panic but there is no easy fix out of text A pure procedure program is being executed and the table for such things is full This shouldn t be a panic trap An unexpected trap has occurred within the system This is accompanied by three numbers a ka6 which is the contents of the segmentation register for the area in which the system s stack is kept aps which is the location where the hardware stored the program status word during the trap and a trap type which encodes which trap occurred The trap types are 0 bus error 1 illegal instruction 2 BPT trace 3 IOT 4 power fail 5 EMT 6 recursive system call TRAP instruction 7 11 70 cache parity or programmed interrupt 7th Edition 2 CRASH 8 UNIX Programmer s Manual CRASH 8 10 floating point trap 11 segmentation violation I
358. red through the editor and written on a file you can give the file to the appropriate language processor as an argument The output of the language processor will be left on a file in the current directory named a out If the output is precious use mv to move it to a less exposed name soon If you wrote in assembly language you will probably need to load the program with library subroutines see d 1 The other two language processors call the loader automatically When you have finally gone through this entire process without provoking any diagnostics the resulting program can be run by giving its name to the Shell in response to the prompt Hs Your programs can receive arguments from the command line just as system programs do see exec 2 Text processing Almost all text is entered through the editor ed 1 The commands most often used to write text on a terminal are cat pr roff and nroff all in section 1 The cat command simply dumps ASCII text on the terminal with no processing at all The pr command paginates the text supplies headings and has a facility for multi column output Nroff is an elaborate text formatting program Used naked it requires careful forethought but for ordinary documents it has been tamed see ms 7 Roff is a simpler text formatting program and requires somewhat less forethought Troff prepares documents for a Graphics Systems phototypesetter it is very similar to nroff and often wor
359. reduces the report to only those files whose i numbers follow The a option allows printing of the names and which are ordinarily suppressed suppressed The s option reduces the report to special files and files with set user ID mode it is intended to discover concealed violations of security policy A file system may be specified The report is in no useful order and probably should be sorted SEE ALSO dcheck 1 icheck 1 sort 1 DIAGNOSTICS When the filesystem structure is improper denotes the parent of a parentless file and a pathname beginning with lt denotes a loop 7th Edition 1 NEWGRP 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual NEWGRP 1 NAME newgrp log in to a new group SYNOPSIS newgrp group DESCRIPTION Newgrp changes the group identification of its caller analogously to login 1 The same person remains logged in and the current directory is unchanged but calculations of access permissions to files are per formed with respect to the new group ID A password is demanded if the group has a password and the user himself does not When most users log in they are members of the group named other Newgrp is known to the shell which executes it directly without a fork FILES etc group etc passwd SEE ALSO login 1 group 5 7th Edition 1 NICE 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual NICE 1 NAME nice nohup run a command at low priority SYNOPSIS nice num
360. resulting number corresponds to a word inside buff that word is incre mented The scale is interpreted as an unsigned fixed point fraction with binary point at the left 0177777 8 gives a 1 1 mapping of pc s to words in buff 077777 8 maps each pair of instruction words together 02 8 maps all instructions onto the beginning of buff producing a non interrupting core clock Profiling is turned off by giving a scale of O or 1 It is rendered ineffective by giving a bufsiz of 0 Profiling is turned off when an exec is executed but remains on in child and parent both after a fork Profiling may be turned off if an update in buff would cause a memory fault SEE ALSO monitor 3 prof 1 ASSEMBLER profil 44 sys profil buff bufsiz offset scale 7th Edition 1 PTRACE 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual PTRACE 2 NAME ptrace process trace SYNOPSIS include lt signal h gt ptrace request pid addr data int addr DESCRIPTION Ptrace provides a means by which a parent process may control the execution of a child process and examine and change its core image Its primary use is for the implementation of breakpoint debugging There are four arguments whose interpretation depends on a request argument Generally pid is the process ID of the traced process which must be a child no more distant descendant of the tracing pro cess A process being traced behaves normally until it encounters some signal whether internally ge
361. returns normally It is used to give up control while waiting for a signal from kill 2 or alarm 2 SEE ALSO kill 1 kill 2 alarm 2 signal setjmp 3 ASSEMBLER pause 29 sys pause 7th Edition 1 PHYS 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual PHYS 2 NAME phys allow a process to access physical addresses SYNOPSIS phys segreg size physadr DESCRIPTION The argument segreg specifies a process virtual data space address range of 8K bytes starting at virtual address segregx8K bytes This address range is mapped into physical address physadrx64 bytes Only the first sizex64 bytes of this mapping is addressable If size is zero any previous mapping of this vir tual address range is nullified For example the call phys 6 1 0177775 will map virtual addresses 0160000 0160077 into physical addresses 017777500 017777577 In particu lar virtual address 0160060 is the PDP 11 console located at physical address 017777560 This call may only be executed by the super user SEE ALSO PDP 11 segmentation hardware DIAGNOSTICS The function value zero is returned if the physical mapping is in effect The value 1 is returned if not super user if segreg is not in the range 0 7 if size is not in the range 0 127 or if the specified segreg is already used for other than a previous call to phys BUGS This system call is obviously very machine dependent and very dangerous This system call is not con sidered a permanent part
362. returns the natural logarithm of x log10 returns the base 10 logarithm Pow returns x Sqrt returns the square root of x SEE ALSO hypot 3 sinh 3 intro 2 DIAGNOSTICS Exp and pow return a huge value when the correct value would overflow errno is set to ERANGE Pow returns 0 and sets errno to EDOM when the second argument is negative and non integral and when both arguments are 0 Log returns O when x is zero or negative errno is set to EDOM Sqrt returns O when x is negative errno is set to EDOM 7th Edition 1 FCLOSE 3S UNIX Programmer s Manual FCLOSE 3S NAME fclose fflush close or flush a stream SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt fclose stream FILE stream fflush stream FILE stream DESCRIPTION Fclose causes any buffers for the named stream to be emptied and the file to be closed Buffers allo cated by the standard input output system are freed Fclose is performed automatically upon calling exit 2 Fflush causes any buffered data for the named output stream to be written to that file The stream remains open SEE ALSO close 2 fopen 3 setbuf 3 DIAGNOSTICS These routines return EOF if stream is not associated with an output file or if buffered data cannot be transferred to that file 7th Edition 1 FERROR 3S UNIX Programmer s Manual FERROR 3S NAME feof ferror clearerr fileno stream status inquiries SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt feof stream FILE
363. ries are available to lint these libraries are referred to by a conventional name such as lm in the style of d 1 Any number of the options in the following list may be used The D U and I options of cc 1 are also recognized as separate arguments p Attempt to check portability to the IBM and GCOS dialects of C h Apply a number of heuristic tests to attempt to intuit bugs improve style and reduce waste b Report break statements that cannot be reached This is not the default because unfortunately most lex and many yacc outputs produce dozens of such comments Y Suppress complaints about unused arguments in functions x Report variables referred to by extern declarations but never used a Report assignments of long values to int variables c Complain about casts which have questionable portability u Do not complain about functions and variables used and not defined or defined and not used this is suitable for running lint on a subset of files out of a larger program n Do not check compatibility against the standard library Exit 2 and other functions which do not return are not understood this causes various lies Certain conventional comments in the C source will change the behavior of lint NOTREACHED at appropriate points stops comments about unreachable code V ARARGSn suppresses the usual checking for variable numbers of arguments in the following function declaration The data types of t
364. rmatting manuscripts msub mult mdiv min mout pow gcd rpow mtab mounted file system table mult mdiv min mout pow gcd rpow mv move or rename files and directories NAME o Ae ee oe SA ee ee ee E y name from UID dete a te ae de eo be E 75 ote eee Mame list da Scag ete he We td oe a ai Oe MAME St seg se eae eee LE Se a e a A name of a terminal NAMES a A a te E N names from i numbers e names of files on a dump tape ncheck generate names from i numbers neqn checked typeset mathematics New files pte is bd eg New formate vaT wwe eet ee Ge a Ahn EE Nada NEW PLOUP a aR a Baa dhe E ante od dan NEW PLOCESS hue ido ar a he HOR a ee 8 newgrp log in to a new group newgrp read readonly set shift times nextkey data base subroutines nice set program priority o nice nohup run a command at low priority nlist get entries from name list man 1 tp 1 frexp 3 man 1 man 7 ms 7 umask 2 eqn 1 maze 6 mp 3 bed 6 mem 4 lock 2 mem 4 malloc 3 sort 1 mesg 1 perror 3 mp 3 mkconf 1 mkdir 1 mkfs 1 mknod 1 mknod 2 mktemp 3 chmod 1 getty 8 umask 2 chmod 2 frexp 3 touch 1 monitor 3 moo 6 mount 1 mount 2 mount 1 mount 2 mtab 5
365. rn pattern list 33 esac A case command executes the list associated with the first pattern that matches word The form of the patterns is the same as that used for file name generation if list then list elif list then list else list fi The list following if is executed and if it returns zero the list following then is executed Oth erwise the list following elif is executed and if its value is zero the list following then is exe cuted Failing that the else list is executed while list do list done A while command repeatedly executes the while ist and if its value is zero executes the do list otherwise the loop terminates The value returned by a while command is that of the last executed command in the do list until may be used in place of while to negate the loop termi nation test list Execute list in a subshell list list is simply executed The following words are only recognized as the first word of a command and when not quoted if then else elif fi case in esac for while until do done 7th Edition 1 SH 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SH 1 Command substitution The standard output from a command enclosed in a pair of grave accents C may be used as part or all of a word trailing newlines are removed Parameter substitution The character is used to introduce substitutable parameters Positional parameters may be assigned values by set Variables may be set by writing name value
366. rocess For further details of address mapping see ADDRESSES EXPRESSIONS The value of dot The value of dot incremented by the current increment A The value of dot decremented by the current increment The last address typed integer An octal number if integer begins with a 0 a hexadecimal number if preceded by otherwise a decimal number integer fraction A 32 bit floating point number cccc The ASCII value of up to 4 characters may be used to escape a lt name The value of name which is either a variable name or a register name Adb maintains a number of variables see VARIABLES named by single letters or digits If name is a register name then the value of the register is obtained from the system header in corfil The register names are r0 r5 sp pc ps symbol A symbol is a sequence of upper or lower case letters underscores or digits not starting with a digit The value of the symbol is taken from the symbol table in objfil An initial or will be prepended to symbol if needed _ symbol In C the true name of an external symbol begins with _ It may be necessary to utter this name to disinguish it from internal or hidden variables of a program routine name The address of the variable name in the specified C routine Both routine and name are 7th Edition 1 ADB 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual ADB 11 symbols If name is omitted the value is the address of the most recently activated C
367. rocess control initialization initialization data ee Ode cade ie as Sen Boe Ry cee eds RD oe ee RA he Sa ee E input conversion 2 2 ee ee InputStream o es sE ie whee GE E input output s aia RE K Gi e eo oe ee Gwe N input output package 2 2 a INQUITIES amp Ae ite Ba BALE e e a E wa feof insert literature references in documents interface s e es ges Boe te BE ee a R N INLET ACE a ain be BEES Se Rip hy Sh a ln ey se ae G Interfaces Pox ses lak a OME Be interface 223 gv R ed eo E oS ee a INtETHACE nosa eng ay tied Ko end Te Stas ee aks WR a AC od interface Z ge TE N e og Ro a de bee RE de wD interfaca a aA ata aA cee aU ET nw E van Re Say Ge e interface 2 a See Wek a Wea Se eda E ak Ae hat interpolate smooth curve 45 interprocess channel lt s sene e dorn RRR e a introduction to commands ooo a introduction to library functions introduction to system calls anderror INUMDELSS a a A a TRAK 2 VO statistics osa a KB BO 2 T O to from a process o 0000008 ioctl stty gtty control device iostat report I O statistics TOT fault era tas ele aw eee isalnum isspace ispunct isprint iscntrl isatty ttyslot find name of aterminal iscntrl isascii character classification issue a shell command isupper islower isdigit isalnum isspace
368. rocess is repeated with arguments 4 5 6 and 7 Otherwise the value is either the fourth string or if 7th Edition 1 M4 1 incr eval len index substr translit include sinclude syscmd maketemp errprint dumpdef SEE ALSO UNIX Programmer s Manual M4 1 1t is not present null returns the value of its argument incremented by 1 The value of the argument is calculated by interpreting an initial digit string as a decimal number evaluates its argument as an arithmetic expression using 32 bit arithmetic Operators include exponentiation relationals parentheses returns the number of characters in its argument returns the position in its first argument where the second argument begins zero origin or 1 if the second argument does not occur returns a substring of its first argument The second argument is a zero origin number selecting the first character the third argument indicates the length of the substring A missing third argument is taken to be large enough to extend to the end of the first string transliterates the characters in its first argument from the set given by the second argument to the set given by the third No abbreviations are permitted returns the contents of the file named in the argument is identical to include except that it says nothing if the file is inaccessible executes the UNIX command given in the first argument No value is returned fill
369. rom a successful open creat dup or pipe call Buffer is the loca tion of nbytes contiguous bytes into which the input will be placed It is not guaranteed that all nbytes bytes will be read for example if the file refers to a typewriter at most one line will be returned In any event the number of characters read is returned If the returned value is O then end of file has been reached SEE ALSO open 2 creat 2 dup 2 pipe 2 DIAGNOSTICS As mentioned O is returned when the end of the file has been reached If the read was otherwise unsuc cessful the return value is 1 Many conditions can generate an error physical I O errors bad buffer address preposterous nbytes file descriptor not that of an input file ASSEMBLER read 3 file descriptor in r0 sys read buffer nbytes byte count in r0 7th Edition 1 SETUID 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual SETUID 2 NAME setuid setgid set user and group ID SYNOPSIS setuid uid setgid gid DESCRIPTION The user ID group ID of the current process is set to the argument Both the effective and the real ID are set These calls are only permitted to the super user or if the argument is the real ID SEE ALSO getuid 2 DIAGNOSTICS Zero is returned if the user group ID is set 1 is returned otherwise ASSEMBLER setuid 23 user ID in r0 sys setuid setgid 46 group ID in r0 sys setgid 7th Edition 1 SIGNAL 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual SIGN
370. ron 5 for some conventionally used names The C run time start off rou tine places a copy of envp in the global cell environ which is used by execv and execl to pass the environment to any subprograms executed by the current program The exec routines use lower level routines as follows to pass an environment explicitly 7th Edition 1 EXEC 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual EXEC 2 execle file arg0 argl argn 0 environ execve file argv environ Execlp and execvp are called with the same arguments as exec and execv but duplicate the shell s actions in searching for an executable file in a list of directories The directory list is obtained from the environment FILES bin sh shell invoked if command file found by execlp or execvp SEE ALSO fork 2 environ 5 DIAGNOSTICS If the file cannot be found if it is not executable if it does not start with a valid magic number see a out 5 if maximum memory is exceeded or if the arguments require too much space a return consti tutes the diagnostic the return value is 1 Even for the super user at least one of the execute permission bits must be set for a file to be executed BUGS If execvp is called to execute a file that turns out to be a shell command file and if it is impossible to execute the shell the values of argv 0 and argv 1 will be modified before return ASSEMBLER exec 11 sys exec name argv exece 59 sys exece name argv envp Plai
371. rrently connected SEE ALSO dp 4 7th Edition 1 DU 4 UNIX Programmer s Manual DU 4 NAME du dp DU 11 201 data phone interface DESCRIPTION The dp0 file is a 201 data phone interface Read and write calls to dp0 are limited to a maximum of 512 bytes Each write call is sent as a single record Seven bits from each byte are written along with an eighth odd parity bit The sync must be user supplied Each read call returns characters received from a single record Seven bits are returned unaltered the eighth bit is set if the byte was not received in odd parity A 10 second time out is set and a zero byte record is returned if nothing is received in that time FILES dev dp0 SEE ALSO dn 4 BUGS The name dp0 is a historical dreg 7th Edition 1 HP 4 UNIX Programmers Manual HP 4 NAME hp RH 11 RP04 RPOS RP06 moving head disk DESCRIPTION The octal representation of the minor device number is encoded idp where i is an interleave flag d is a physical drive number and p is a pseudodrive subsection within a physical unit If i is 0 the origins and sizes of the pseudodisks on each drive counted in cylinders of 418 512 byte blocks are disk start length 0 0 23 1 23 21 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 44 386 5 430 385 6 44 367 7 44 771 If i is 1 the minor device consists of the specified pseudodisk on drives numbered O through the desig nated drive number Successively numbered blocks are distributed across the drives
372. rst group is not list expression expression is used to print out the stored internal statements If no arguments are given all internal state ments are printed If one argument is given only that internal statement is listed If two argu ments are given all internal statements inclusively between the arguments are printed 7th Edition 1 BAS 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual BAS 1 print list The list of expressions and strings are concatenated and printed A string is delimited by acters 1 char prompt list Prompt is the same as print except that no newline character is printed return expression The expression is evaluated and the result is passed back as the value of a function call If no expression is given zero is returned run The internal statements are compiled The symbol table is re initialized The random number generator is reset Control is passed to the lowest numbered internal statement save expression expression Save is like list except that the output is written on the file argument If no argument is given on the command b out is used Expressions have the following syntax name A name is used to specify a variable Names are composed of a letter followed by letters and digits The first four characters of a name are significant number A number is used to represent a constant value A number is written in Fortran style and con tains digits an optional decimal point and possibly
373. rypted if non zero it is decrypted SEE ALSO passwd 1 passwd 5 login 1 getpass 3 BUGS The return value points to static data whose content is overwritten by each call 7th Edition 1 CTIME 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual CTIME 3 NAME ctime localtime gmtime asctime timezone convert date and time to ASCII SYNOPSIS char ctime clock long clock include lt time h gt struct tm localtime clock long clock struct tm gmtime clock long clock char asctime tm struct tm tm char timezone zone dst DESCRIPTION Ctime converts a time pointed to by clock such as returned by time 2 into ASCII and returns a pointer to a 26 character string in the following form All the fields have constant width Sun Sep 16 01 03 52 1973 n 0 Localtime and gmtime return pointers to structures containing the broken down time Localtime corrects for the time zone and possible daylight savings time gmtime converts directly to GMT which is the time UNIX uses Asctime converts a broken down time to ASCII and returns a pointer to a 26 character string The structure declaration from the include file is struct tm see ctime 3 int tm_sec int tm_min int tm_hour int tm_mday int tm_mon int tm_year int tm_wday int tm_yday int tm_isdst 5 These quantities give the time on a 24 hour clock day of month 1 31 month of year 0 11 day of week Sunday 0 year 1900 day of year 0 36
374. s format of file system volume format tables for nroff or troff formatitext ios a OS BAe A ae a formats formatted input conversion formatted output conversion formatting and typesetting formatting manuscripts Fortran 77 compiler Fortran dialect Fortran programs o sooo fortune the book of changes and other fprintf sprintf formatted output fputc putw put character or wordona fputs put a string on a stream fread fwrite buffered binary input output free free realloc calloc main memory freopen fdopen open a stream frexp ldexp modf split into mantissa and fscanf sscanf formatted input conversion fseek ftell rewind reposition a stream fstat get file Status o E e ftell rewind reposition a stream ftime get date and time functions TUBCH NS ds e e re a Ada functions 22 ar ra A functions s ra ds a es a a ee da 0 N sin COS game game of blackjack aia Gate hi en eB a a a e game of chess game of dramatic reversals 2 00 game of hunt the wumpus games gcd rpow multiple precision integer gcevt output conversion osoo a generate a maze problem generate configuration tables generate encryption key generate IOT fault generate large primes generate names from i numberS O A A ee E ae generator of lexical analysis programs getc getchar fgetc
375. s updating an archive stored in this manner can destroy it The current limit on file name length is 100 characters 7th Edition 2 TBL 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TBL 1 NAME tbl format tables for nroff or troff SYNOPSIS tbl files DESCRIPTION Tbl is a preprocessor for formatting tables for nroff or troff 1 The input files are copied to the stan dard output except for lines between TS and TE command lines which are assumed to describe tables and reformatted Details are given in the reference manual As an example letting t represent a tab which should be typed as a genuine tab the input TS css ccs ccc lnn Household Population Town tHouseholds tNumber tSize Bedminster t789 t3 26 Bernards Twp t3087 t3 74 Bernardsville t2018 t3 30 Bound Brook t3425 t3 04 Branchburg t1644 t3 49 Bridgewater t7897 t3 8 1 Far Hills t240 t3 19 TE yields Household Population Town Households Number Size Bedminster 789 3 26 Bernards Twp 3087 3 74 Bernardsville 2018 3 30 Bound Brook 3425 3 04 Branchburg 1644 3 49 Bridgewater 7897 3 81 Far Hills 240 3 19 If no arguments are given tbl reads the standard input so it may be used as a filter When it is used with eqn or neqn the tbl command should be first to minimize the volume of data passed through pipes SEE ALSO troff 1 eqn 1 M E Lesk TBL 7th Edition 1 TC 1 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual TC 1 tc photypesetter simula
376. s in a string of XX XXX in its argument with the current process id prints its argument on the diagnostic output file prints current names and definitions for the named items or for all if no arguments are given B W Kernighan and D M Ritchie The M4 Macro Processor 7th Edition MAIL 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual MAIL 1 NAME mail send or receive mail among users SYNOPSIS mail person mail r q p f file DESCRIPTION FILES Mail with no argument prints a user s mail message by message in last in first out order the optional argument r causes first in first out order If the p flag is given the mail is printed with no questions asked otherwise for each message mail reads a line from the standard input to direct disposition of the message newline Go on to next message d Delete message and go on to the next p Print message again Go back to previous message s file Save the message in the named files mbox default w file Save the message without a header in the named files mbox default m person Mail the message to the named persons yourself is default EOT control D Put unexamined mail back in the mailbox and stop q Same as EOT X Exit without changing the mailbox file Icommand Escape to the Shell to do command Print a command summary An interrupt stops the printing of the current letter The op
377. s necessary to know that at any time there is a current line Generally speaking the current line is the last line affected by a command however the exact effect on the current line is discussed under the description of the command Addresses are constructed as follows gt 1 The character addresses the current line 2 The character addresses the last line of the buffer 3 A decimal number n addresses the n th line of the buffer 4 X addresses the line marked with the name x which must be a lower case letter Lines are marked with the k command described below 5 A regular expression enclosed in slashes addresses the line found by searching forward from the current line and stopping at the first line containing a string that matches the regular expres sion If necessary the search wraps around to the beginning of the buffer 6 A regular expression enclosed in queries addresses the line found by searching backward from the current line and stopping at the first line containing a string that matches the regular expression If necessary the search wraps around to the end of the buffer 7 An address followed by a plus sign or a minus sign followed by a decimal number specifies that address plus resp minus the indicated number of lines The plus sign may be omitted 8 If an address begins with or the addition or subtraction is taken with respect to the current line
378. s occurred during the load The argument routines are concatenated in the order specified The entry point of the output is the beginning of the first routine If any argument is a library it is searched exactly once at the point it is encountered in the argument list Only those routines defining an unresolved external reference are loaded If a routine from a library references another routine in the library and the library has not been processed by ranlib 1 the referenced routine must appear after the referencing routine in the library Thus the order of programs within libraries may be important If the first member of a library is named _ SYMDEF then it is understood to be a dictionary for the library such as produced by ranlib the dictionary is searched itera tively to satisfy as many references as possible The symbols etext _edata and end etext edata and end in C are reserved and if referred to are set to the first location above the program the first location above initialized data and the first location above all data respectively It is erroneous to define these symbols Ld understands several options Except for 1 they should appear before the file names S Strip the output that is remove the symbol table and relocation bits to save space but impair the usefulness of the debugger This information can also be removed by strip 1 u Take the following argume
379. s tfree total free blocks ino t S tinode total free inodes short sm interleave factor short s_n PE char s_fname 6 file system name char s_fpack 6 file system pack name 5 S_isize 1s the address of the first block after the 1 list which starts just after the super block in block 2 Thus is i list is s_isize 2 blocks long S fsize is the address of the first block not potentially available for allocation to a file These numbers are used by the system to check for bad block addresses if an impossible block address is allocated from the free list or is freed a diagnostic is written on the on line console Moreover the free array is cleared so as to prevent further allocation from a presumably corrupted free list The free list for each volume is maintained as follows The s free array contains in s_free 1 S_free s_nfree 1 up to NICFREE free block numbers NICFREE is a configuration constant S_free 0 is the block address of the head of a chain of blocks constituting the free list The layout of each block of the free chain as defined in the include file lt sys fblk h gt is struct folk int df_nfree daddr t df free NICFREE T 7th Edition 1 FILSYS 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual FILSYS 5 The fields df nfree and df free in a free block are used exactly like s_nfree and s free in the super block To allocate a block decrement s_nfree and the new block number is s_free s_
380. second intervals and an arbitrary amount longer because of other activity in the system The routine is implemented by setting an alarm clock signal and pausing until it occurs The previous state of this signal is saved and restored If the sleep time exceeds the time to the alarm signal the pro cess sleeps only until the signal would have occurred and the signal is sent 1 second later SEE ALSO alarm 2 pause 2 7th Edition 1 STDIO 3S UNIX Programmer s Manual STDIO 3S NAME stdio standard buffered input output package SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt FILE stdin FILE stdout FILE stderr DESCRIPTION The functions described in Sections 3S constitute an efficient user level buffering scheme The in line macros getc and putc 3 handle characters quickly The higher level routines gets fgets scanf fscanf fread puts fputs printf fprintf fwrite all use getc and putc they can be freely intermixed A file with associated buffering is called a stream and is declared to be a pointer to a defined type FILE Fopen 3 creates certain descriptive data for a stream and returns a pointer to designate the stream in all further transactions There are three normally open streams with constant pointers declared in the include file and associated with the standard open files stdin standard input file stdout standard output file stderr standard error file A constant pointer NULL 0 designates no stream at a
381. sed to save on object text Putw appends word i e int w to the output stream It returns the word written Putw neither assumes nor causes special alignment in the file The standard stream stdout is normally buffered if and only if the output does not refer to a terminal this default may be changed by setbuf 3 The standard stream stderr is by default unbuffered uncondi tionally but use of freopen see fopen 3 will cause it to become buffered setbuf again will set the state to whatever is desired When an output stream is unbuffered information appears on the destina tion file or terminal as soon as written when it is buffered many characters are saved up and written as a block Fflush see fclose 3 may be used to force the block out early SEE ALSO fopen 3 fclose 3 getc 3 puts 3 printf 3 fread 3 DIAGNOSTICS These functions return the constant EOF upon error Since this is a good integer ferror 3 should be used to detect putw errors BUGS Because it is implemented as a macro putc treats a stream argument with side effects improperly In particular putc c f doesn t work sensibly 7th Edition 1 PUTS 35 UNIX Programmer s Manual PUTS 358 NAME puts fputs put a string on a stream SYNOPSIS ttinclude lt stdio h gt puts s char s fputs s stream char s FILE stream DESCRIPTION Puts copies the null terminated string s to the standard output stream stdout and appends a newli
382. ss utime set file login newgrp read readonly set shift ctime localtime gmtime asctime tsort ptrace process tr XXI substitute user id temporarily sum sum and count blocks in a file summarize disk usage 2 o ee ee ee summarize file system ownership super block arene T R ee a N e eng att ed superblock iar Z dha y PP GS a Ge eS superblock a e fies eg Oa SS Ge Se le Ge Ss suspend execution for an interval suspend execution for interval swab swap bytes o symbols and relocation bits sync update super block sync update the super block sys errlist sys nerr systemerror ii o e aia Bef Bibs ede ole ae e eee Z Se e CABLES cd rA Sannin Che een Min a nae ae Seine G tables for nroff or troff 2 o o ADS T 06 re a a oa a dodo de E de Z tail deliver the last part of a file tan asin acos atan atan2 trigonometric tanh hyperbolic functions CAPE Z 0 5 P ae se Se ae a ar Gee SA ao a ara a OS tape archive ua ee i de tape ARCHIVER sunt ean oe waag lee Se e eee le See a Se e wei Lap TOMAS sot e RS See a TR es es tar tape archiver 200 tbl format tables for nroff or troff tbl and eqn constructs o
383. ss for each typewriter specified in the file Each of these processes opens the appropriate typewriter for reading and writing These channels thus receive file descriptors 0 1 and 2 the standard input output and error files Opening the typewriter will usually involve a delay since the open is not completed until someone is dialed up and carrier established on the channel Then etc getty is called with argument as specified by the last char acter of the ttys file line Getty reads the user s name and invokes login 1 to log in the user and exe cute the shell Ultimately the shell will terminate because of an end of file either typed explicitly or generated as a result of hanging up The main path of init which has been waiting for such an event wakes up and removes the appropriate entry from the file utmp which records current users and makes an entry in usr adm wtmp which maintains a history of logins and logouts Then the appropriate typewriter is reo pened and getty is reinvoked Init catches the hangup signal SIGHUP and interprets it to mean that the system should be brought from multi user to single user Use kill 1 1 to send the hangup signal dev tty etc utmp usr adm wtmp etc ttys etc rc SEE ALSO login 1 kill 1 sh 1 ttys 5 getty 8 7th Edition 1 MAKEKEY 8 UNIX Programmer s Manual MAKEKEY 8 NAME makekey generate encryption key SYNOPSIS usr lib makekey DESCRIPTION Makekey impro
384. ss where an interrupt is simulated An RTI or RTT instruction will return from the interrupt 7th Edition 2 STAT 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual STAT 2 NAME stat fstat get file status SYNOPSIS include lt sys types h gt include lt sys stat h gt stat name buf char name struct stat buf fstat fildes buf struct stat buf DESCRIPTION Stat obtains detailed information about a named file Fstat obtains the same information about an open file known by the file descriptor from a successful open creat dup or pipe 2 call Name points to a null terminated string naming a file buf is the address of a buffer into which informa tion is placed concerning the file It is unnecessary to have any permissions at all with respect to the file but all directories leading to the file must be searchable The layout of the structure pointed to by buf as defined in lt stat h gt is given below Sr mode is encoded according to the define statements struct stat dev t St dev ino t st_ino unsigned short St mode short st_nlink short st_uid short st_gid dev t st_rdev off t SL SIze time t st atime time t st_mtime time t st ctime T define S_IFMT 0170000 type of file define S_IFDIR 0040000 directory define S_IFCHR 0020000 character special define S_IFBLK 0060000 block special define S_IFREG 0100000 regular define S_IFIFO0010000 fifo define S_ISUID 04000
385. ssing pos2 means the end of the line Under the tx option fields are strings separated by x otherwise fields are nonempty nonblank strings separated by blanks When there are multiple sort keys later keys are compared only after all earlier keys compare equal Lines that otherwise compare equal are ordered with all bytes significant These option arguments are also understood c Check that the input file is sorted according to the ordering rules give no output unless the file is out of sort m Merge only the input files are already sorted 0 The next argument is the name of an output file to use instead of the standard output This file may be the same as one of the inputs T The next argument is the name of a directory in which temporary files should be made Suppress all but one in each set of equal lines Ignored bytes and bytes outside keys do not parti cipate in this comparison Examples Print in alphabetical order all the unique spellings in a list of words Capitalized words differ from uncapitalized sort u 0f 0 list Print the password file passwd 5 sorted by user id number the 3rd colon separated field sort t 2n etc passwd Print the first instance of each month in an already sorted file of month day entries The options um with just one input file make the choice of a unique representative from a set of equal lines predictable 7th Edition 1 SORT 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SORT 1 sor
386. stems full of garbage will crash the system Mounting a root directory on a non directory makes some apparently good pathnames invalid 7th Edition 1 MV 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual MV 1 NAME mv move or rename files and directories SYNOPSIS mv filel file2 mv file directory DESCRIPTION Mv moves changes the name of filel to file2 If file2 already exists it is removed before file is moved If file2 has a mode which forbids writing mv prints the mode see chmod 2 and reads the standard input to obtain a line if the line begins with y the move takes place if not mv exits In the second form one or more files are moved to the directory with their original file names Mv refuses to move a file onto itself SEE ALSO cp 1 chmod 2 BUGS If file and file2 lie on different file systems mv must copy the file and delete the original In this case the owner name becomes that of the copying process and any linking relationship with other files is lost Mv should take f flag like rm to suppress the question if the target exists and is not writable 7th Edition 1 NCHECK 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual NCHECK 1M NAME ncheck generate names from i numbers SYNOPSIS ncheck i numbers a s filesystem DESCRIPTION Ncheck with no argument generates a pathname vs i number list of all files on a set of default file sys tems Names of directory files are followed by The i option
387. stituent files When used with t it gives a long listing of all information about the files When used with p it precedes each file with a name c Create Normally ar will create afile when it needs to The create option suppresses the nor mal message that is produced when afile is created l Local Normally ar places its temporary files in the directory tmp This option causes them to be placed in the local directory FILES tmp v temporaries SEE ALSO ld 1 ar 5 lorder 1 BUGS If the same file is mentioned twice in an argument list it may be put in the archive twice 7th Edition 1 ARCV 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual ARCV 1M NAME arcv convert archives to new format SYNOPSIS arcy file DESCRIPTION Arcv converts archive files see ar 1 ar 5 from 6th edition to 7th edition format The conversion is done in place and the command refuses to alter a file not in old archive format Old archives are marked with a magic number of 0177555 at the start new archives have 0177545 FILES tmp v temporary copy SEE ALSO ar 1 ar 5 7th Edition 1 AS 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual AS 1 NAME as assembler SYNOPSIS as o objfile file DESCRIPTION As assembles the concatenation of the named files If the optional first argument is used all undefined symbols in the assembly are treated as global The output of the assembly is left on the file objfile if that is omitted a
388. t BO B50 B75 B110 B134 B150 B200 B300 B600 B1200 B1800 B2400 B4800 7th Edition 0 hang up dataphone 50 baud 75 baud 110 baud 134 5 baud 150 baud 200 baud 300 baud 600 baud 9 1200 baud 10 1800 baud 11 2400 baud 12 4800 baud GO J G Lh ELA LA KH TTY 4 UNIX Programmer s Manual TTY 4 B9600 13 9600 baud EXTA 14 External A EXTB 15 External B In the current configuration only 110 150 300 and 1200 baud are really supported on dial up lines Code conversion and line control required for IBM 2741 s 134 5 baud must be implemented by the user s program The half duplex line discipline required for the 202 dataset 1200 baud is not supplied full duplex 212 datasets work fine The sg erase and sg kill fields of the argument structure specify the erase and kill characters respec tively Defaults are and The sg flags field of the argument structure contains several bits that determine the system s treatment of the terminal ALLDELAY 0177400 Delay algorithm selection BSDELAY 0100000 Select backspace delays not implemented BSO 0 BS1 0100000 VTDELAY 0040000 Select form feed and vertical tab delays FFO 0 FFl 0100000 CRDELAY 0030000 Select carriage return delays CRO 0 CRI 0010000 CR2 0020000 CR3 0030000 TBDELAY 0006000 Select tab delays TABO 0 TAB1 0001000 TAB2 0004000 XTABS 0006000 NLDELAY 0001400 Select new line delays NLO 0 NL 0000400 NL2 0001000 NL3 000140
389. t SEE ALSO monitor 3 profil 2 cc 1 plot 1 BUGS Beware of quantization errors 7th Edition 1 PS 1 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual PS 1 ps process status SYNOPSIS ps aklx namelist DESCRIPTION Ps prints certain indicia about active processes The a option asks for information about all processes with terminals ordinarily only one s own processes are displayed x asks even about processes with no terminal l asks for a long listing The short listing contains the process ID tty letter the cumulative execution time of the process and an approximation to the command line The long listing is columnar and contains F Flags associated with the process 01 in core 02 system process 04 locked in core e g for physical I O 10 being swapped 20 being traced by another process S The state of the process 0 nonexistent S sleeping W waiting R running I intermediate Z terminated T stopped UID The user ID of the process owner PID The process ID of the process as in certain cults it is possible to kill a process if you know its true name PPID The process ID of the parent process CPU Processor utilization for scheduling PRI The priority of the process high numbers mean low priority NICE Used in priority computation ADDR The core address of the process if resident otherwise the disk address SZ The size in blocks of the core image of the process WCHAN The event for
390. t um 0 1 dates FILES usr tmp stm tmp first and second tries for temporary files SEE ALSO uniq 1 comm 1 rev 1 join 1 DIAGNOSTICS Comments and exits with nonzero status for various trouble conditions and for disorder discovered under option c BUGS Very long lines are silently truncated 7th Edition 2 SPELL 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SPELL 1 NAME spell spellin spellout find spelling errors SYNOPSIS spell option file usr src cmd spelVspellin list usr src emd spell spellout d list DESCRIPTION FILES BUGS Spell collects words from the named documents and looks them up in a spelling list Words that nei ther occur among nor are derivable by applying certain inflections prefixes or suffixes from words in the spelling list are printed on the standard output If no files are named words are collected from the standard input Spell ignores most troff tbl and eqn 1 constructions Under the v option all words not literally in the spelling list are printed and plausible derivations from spelling list words are indicated Under the b option British spelling is checked Besides preferring centre colour speciality travelled etc this option insists upon ise in words like standardise Fowler and the OED to the contrary notwith standing Under the x option every plausible stem is printed with for each word The spelling list is based
391. t is a terminal or the u option is present SEE ALSO pr 1 cp 1 BUGS Beware of cat a b gt a and cat a b gt b which destroy input files before reading them 7th Edition 1 CB 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual CB 1 NAME cb C program beautifier SYNOPSIS cb DESCRIPTION Cb places a copy of the C program from the standard input on the standard output with spacing and indentation that displays the structure of the program BUGS 7th Edition 1 CC 1 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual CC 1 cc pec C compiler SYNOPSIS ce option file pec option file DESCRIPTION Cc is the UNIX C compiler It accepts several types of arguments Arguments whose names end with c are taken to be C source programs they are compiled and each object program is left on the file whose name is that of the source with o substituted for c The o file is normally deleted however if a single C program is compiled and loaded all at one go In the same way arguments whose names end with s are taken to be assembly source programs and are assembled producing a o file The following options are interpreted by cc See d 1 for load time options c Suppress the loading phase of the compilation and force an object file to be produced even if only one program is compiled p Arrange for the compiler to produce code which counts the number of times each routin
392. t line which must be the last line in which a substitution was made 1 v regular expression command list This command is the same as the global command g except that the command list is executed g with initially set to every line except those matching the regular expression 1 w filename The write command writes the addressed lines onto the given file If the file does not exist it is created mode 666 readable and writable by everyone The file name is remembered if there was no remembered file name already If no file name is given the remembered file name if any is used see e and f commands is unchanged If the command is successful the number of characters written is printed 7th Edition 4 ED 1 FILES UNIX Programmer s Manual ED 1 1 W filename This command is the same as w except that the addressed lines are appended to the file X A key string is demanded from the standard input Later r e and w commands will encrypt and decrypt the text with this key by the algorithm of crypt 1 An explicitly empty key turns off encryption gt The line number of the addressed line is typed is unchanged by this command I lt shell command gt The remainder of the line after the unchanged 6 is sent to sh 1 to be interpreted as a command is ep 1 lt newline gt An address alone on a line causes the addressed line to be printed A blank line alone is equivale
393. t specified places by certain commands or by the appearance of an empty input line or an input line beginning with a space The capabilities of roff are specified in the attached Request Summary Numerical values are denoted there by n or n titles by t and single characters by c Numbers denoted n may be signed or in which case they signify relative changes to a quantity otherwise they signify an absolute resetting Missing n fields are ordinarily taken to be 1 missing t fields to be empty and c fields to shut off the appropriate special interpretation Running titles usually appear at top and bottom of every page They are set by requests like he part1 part2 part3 Partl is left justified part2 is centered and part3 is right justified on the page Any sign in a title is replaced by the current page number Any nonblank may serve as a quote ASCII tab characters are replaced in the input by a replacement character normally a space according to the column settings given by a ta command See tr for how to convert this character on output Automatic hyphenation of filled output is done under control of hy When a word contains a designated hyphenation character that character disappears from the output and hyphens can be introduced into the word at the marked places only The mr option of nroff or troff 1 simulates roff to the greatest extent possible lasr lib suftab suffix hyphenation tables tmp rtm temporary
394. t the size is fixed by struct sgttyb ASSEMBLER ioctl 54 sys ioctl fildes request argp stty 31 file descriptor in r0 stty argp gtty 32 file descriptor in r0 sys gtty argp 7th Edition 1 KILO UNIX Programmer s Manual KILL 2 NAME kill send signal to a process SYNOPSIS kill pid sig DESCRIPTION Kill sends the signal sig to the process specified by the process number in r0 See signal 2 for a list of signals The sending and receiving processes must have the same effective user ID otherwise this call is res tricted to the super user If the process number is 0 the signal is sent to all other processes in the sender s process group see tty 4 If the process number is 1 and the user is the super user the signal is broadcast universally except to processes O and 1 the scheduler and initialization processes see init 8 Processes may send signals to themselves SEE ALSO signal 2 kill 1 DIAGNOSTICS Zero is returned if the process is killed 1 is returned if the process does not have the same effective user ID and the user is not super user or if the process does not exist ASSEMBLER kill 37 process number in r0 sys kill sig 7th Edition 1 LINK 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual LINK 2 NAME link link to a file SYNOPSIS link namel name2 char namel name2 DESCRIPTION A link to namel is created the link has the name name2 Either name may be a
395. ta Fey ee maze generate a maze problem mdiv min mout pow gcd rpow multiple Meda as FE Ge A EA ee E a eee SS mem kmem corememory MEMOLY caia a oe ee een te ea MEMO a ee oad Eee A nas G memory allocator 0200000 Merge less eA K Bo ee RN mesg permit or deny messages min mout pow gcd rpow multiple oaoa a mkconf generate configuration tables mkdir make a directory mkfs construct a filesystem mknod build special file mknod make a directory or a special file mktemp make a unique file name Mode ie tnd e BY Be A Ra modes art sa ra E A I Mode mask tea ita a na e BP eh ewe a oi rodeo E tte te modf split into mantissa and exponent modified Of avfile s s r T ogous ss 2 ale ea monitor prepare execution profile moo guessing game 0 0 mount and dismount filesystem mount or remove filesystem mount umount mount and dismount file mount umount mount or remove file system mounted file system table mout pow gcd rpow multiple precision move or rename files and directories move read write pointer 2 o moving head disk 000008 moving head disk 000004 ms macros for fo
396. tal minutes time for each category give seconds per call l Separate system and user time normally they are combined m Print number of processes and number of CPU minutes for each user n Sort by number of calls r Reverse order of sort s Merge accounting file into summary file usr adm savacct when done t For each command report ratio of real time to the sum of user and system times u Superseding all other flags print for each command in the accounting file the user ID and com mand name v If the next character is a digit n then type the name of each command used n times or fewer Await a reply from the typewriter if it begins with y add the command to the category junk This is used to strip out garbage FILES usr adm acct raw accounting usr adm savacct summary usr adm usracct per user summary SEE ALSO ac 1 acct 2 7th Edition 1 SED 1 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual SED 1 sed stream editor SYNOPSIS sed n e script f sfile file DESCRIPTION 7th Editi Sed copies the named files standard input default to the standard output edited according to a script of commands The f option causes the script to be taken from file sfile these options accumulate If there is just one e option and no f s the flag e may be omitted The n option suppresses the default output A script consists of editing commands one per line of the following form
397. tapemark The structure idates describes an entry of the file etc ddate where dump history is kept The fields of the structure are id name The dumped filesystem is dev id_nam id incno The level number of the dump tape see dump 1 id ddate The date of the incremental dump in system format see types 5 etc ddate SEE ALSO dump 1 dumpdir 1 restor 1 filsys 5 types 5 7th Edition 2 ENVIRON 5 UNIX Programmer s Manual ENVIRON 5 NAME environ user environment SYNOPSIS extern char environ DESCRIPTION An array of strings called the environment is made available by exec 2 when a process begins By convention these strings have the form name value The following names are used by various com mands PATH The sequence of directory prefixes that sh time nice 1 etc apply in searching for a file known by an incomplete path name The prefixes are separated by Login 1 sets PATH bin usr bin HOME A user s login directory set by login 1 from the password file passwd 5 TERM The kind of terminal for which output is to be prepared This information is used by com mands such as nroff or plot 1 which may exploit special terminal capabilities See term 7 for a list of terminal types Further names may be placed in the environment by the export command and name value arguments in sh 1 or by exec 2 It is unwise to conflict with certain Shell variables that ar
398. te count in r0 7th Edition 1 INTRO 3 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual INTRO 3 intro introduction to library functions SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt include lt math h gt DESCRIPTION This section describes functions that may be found in various libraries other than those functions that directly invoke UNIX system primitives which are described in section 2 Functions are divided into various libraries distinguished by the section number at the top of the page 3 These functions together with those of section 2 and those marked 3S constitute library libc which is automatically loaded by the C compiler cc 1 and the Fortran compiler f77 1 The link editor d 1 searches this library under the lc option Declarations for some of these functions may be obtained from include files indicated on the appropriate pages 3M These functions constitute the math library libm They are automatically loaded as needed by the Fortran compiler f77 1 The link editor searches this library under the Im option Declara tions for these functions may be obtained from the include file lt math h gt 3S These functions constitute the standard I O package see stdio 3 These functions are in the library libc already mentioned Declarations for these functions may be obtained from the include file lt stdio h gt 3X Various specialized libraries have not been given distinctive captions The files in wh
399. ted file system as described below If there are any problems with the root file system it is probably prudent to go to a backup system to avoid working on a mounted file system Repairing disks The first rule to keep in mind is that an addled disk should be treated gently it shouldn t be mounted unless necessary and if it is very valuable yet in quite bad shape perhaps it should be dumped before trying surgery on it This is an area where experience and informed courage count for much The problems reported by icheck typically fall into two kinds There can be problems with the free list duplicates in the free list or free blocks also in files These can be cured easily with an icheck s If the same block appears in more than one file or if a file contains bad blocks the files should be deleted and the free list reconstructed The best way to delete such a file is to use c ri 1 then remove its direc tory entries If any of the affected files is really precious you can try to copy it to another device first Dcheck may report files which have more directory entries than links Such situations are potentially dangerous clri discusses a special case of the problem All the directory entries for the file should be removed If on the other hand there are more links than directory entries there is no danger of spread ing infection but merely some disk space that is lost for use It is sufficient to copy the file if it has any entries an
400. tem call If execution is resumed after processing the signal it will appear as if the interrupted system call returned this error condition 5 EIO I O error Some physical 1 O error occurred during a read or write This error may in some cases occur on a call following the one to which it actually applies 6 ENXIO No such device or address VO on a special file refers to a subdevice that does not exist or beyond the limits of the device It may also occur when for example a tape drive is not dialled in or no disk pack is loaded on a drive 7 E2BIG Arg list too long An argument list longer than 5120 bytes is presented to exec 8 ENOEXEC Exec format error A request is made to execute a file which although it has the appropriate permissions does not start with a valid magic number see a out 5 9 EBADF Bad file number Either a file descriptor refers to no open file or a read resp write request is made to a file that is open only for writing resp reading 10 ECHILD No children Wait and the process has no living or unwaited for children 7th Edition 1 INTRO 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 7th Edition UNIX Programmer s Manual INTRO 2 EAGAIN No more processes In a fork the system s process table is full or the user is not allowed to create any more processes ENOMEM Not enough core During an exec or break a program asks for more core than the syst
401. tems were found The constant EOF is returned upon end of input note that this is different from 0 which means that no conversion was done if conversion was intended it was frustrated by an inappropriate character in the input For example the call int i float x char name 50 scanf d f s 11 amp x name with the input line 25 54 32E 1 thompson will assign to i the value 25 x the value 5 432 and name will contain thompson 0 Or int i float x char name 50 scanf 2d f d 1234567890 amp i amp x name with input 56789 0123 56a72 will assign 56 to i 789 0 to x skip 0123 and place the string 56 0 in name The next call to getchar will return a SEE ALSO atof 3 getc 3 printf 3 DIAGNOSTICS The scanf functions return EOF on end of input and a short count for missing or illegal data items BUGS The success of literal matches and suppressed assignments is not directly determinable 7th Edition 2 SETBUF 35 UNIX Programmer s Manual SETBUF 35 NAME setbuf assign buffering to a stream SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt setbuf stream buf FILE stream char buf DESCRIPTION Setbuf is used after a stream has been opened but before it is read or written It causes the character array buf to be used instead of an automatically allocated buffer If buf is the constant pointer NULL input output will be completely unbuffered A manifest constant BUFSIZ tel
402. ten SEE ALSO read 2 write 2 fopen 3 getc 3 putc 3 gets 3 puts 3 printf 3 scanf 3 DIAGNOSTICS Fread and fwrite return 0 upon end of file or error 7th Edition 1 FREXP 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual FREXP 3 NAME frexp Idexp modf split into mantissa and exponent SYNOPSIS double frexp value eptr double value int eptr double Idexp value exp double value double modf value iptr double value iptr DESCRIPTION Frexp returns the mantissa of a double value as a double quantity x of magnitude less than 1 and stores an integer n such that value x 2 n indirectly through eptr Ldexp returns the quantity value 2 exp Modf returns the positive fractional part of value and stores the integer part indirectly through iptr 7th Edition 1 FSEEK 35 UNIX Programmer s Manual FSEEK 35 NAME fseek ftell rewind reposition a stream SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt fseek stream offset ptrname FILE stream long offset long ftell stream FILE stream rewind stream DESCRIPTION F seek sets the position of the next input or output operation on the stream The new position is at the signed distance offset bytes from the beginning the current position or the end of the file according as ptrname has the value 0 1 or 2 F seek undoes any effects of ungetc 3 Ftell returns the current value of the offset relative to the beginning of the file associated with the named
403. tes of zero length are treated specially and are reflected at the remote end as a zero length read This facilitates marking the serial byte stream usually for del imiting files When one side of a packet driver link is shut down by close 2 or pkoff see pkon 2 read 2 on the other side will return 0 and write on the other side will raise a SIGPIPE signal SEE ALSO pkon 2 pkopen 3 7th Edition local 1 RE 4 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual RF 4 rf RF11 RS11 fixed head disk file DESCRIPTION FILES BUGS This file refers to the concatenation of all RS 11 disks Each disk contains 1024 256 word blocks The length of the combined RF file is 1024x minor 1 blocks That is minor device zero is taken to be 1024 blocks long minor device one is 2048 etc The rfO file accesses the disk via the system s normal buffering mechanism and may be read and written without regard to physical disk records There is also a raw interface which provides for direct transmission between the disk and the user s read or write buffer A single read or write call results in exactly one I O operation and therefore raw I O is considerably more efficient when many words are transmitted The name of the raw RF file is rrf0 The same minor device considerations hold for the raw interface as for the normal interface In raw I O the buffer must begin on a word boundary and counts should be a multiple of 512 bytes a disk block Likewise se
404. tgrent endgrent get setuid setgid set user and getgid geteuid getegid get user and chown change owner and make maintain program ioctl stty moo wump the game of sinh cosh tanh setuid setgid set user and group su substitute user getpid get process geteuid getegid get user and group exit export login newgrp sh for case signal catch or core format of core dump ddate dump restor ptx permuted strcmp strncmp strcpy strncpy strlen ttys terminal popen pclose filsys fIbIk clri clear scanf fscanf sscanf formatted ungetc push character back into fread fwrite buffered binary stdio standard buffered ferror clearerr fileno stream status refer lookbib find and cat phototypesetter dn DN 11 ACU du dp DU 11 201 data phone ht RH 11 TU 16 magtape plot openpl et al graphics plot graphics tm TM 11 TU 10 magtape tty general terminal spline pipe create an intro intro mumbers Cu e a Siw er Be a AA intro errno ncheck generate names from iostat report popen pclose initiate abort generate ISAS o se sap de de Se ge isalpha isupper islower isdigit ttyname isdigit isalnum isspace ispunct isprint system ispunct isprint iscntrl isascii isalpha gcd rpow mul
405. th the t function v gives more informa tion about the tape entries than just the name means a fresh dump is being created the tape directory is cleared before beginning Usable only with r and u This option is assumed with magtape since it is impossible to selectively overwrite magtape Errors reading and writing the tape are noted but no action is taken Normally errors cause a return to the command level Use the first named file rather than a tape as the archive This option is known to work only with x causes tp to pause before treating each file type the indicative letter and the file name as with v and await the user s response Response y means yes so the file is treated Null response means no and the file does not take part in whatever is being done Response x means exit the fp command terminates immediately In the x function files previously asked about have been extracted already With r u and d no change has been made to the tape deprecated 1 TP 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TP 1 FILES dev tap dev mt SEE ALSO ar 1 tar 1 DIAGNOSTICS Several the non obvious one is Phase error which means the file changed after it was selected for dumping but before it was dumped BUGS A single file with several links to it is treated like several files Binary coded control information makes magnetic tapes written by p difficult to carry to other machines tar 1 avoids the prob
406. the next by a new line If the password field is null no password is demanded if the Shell field is null the Shell itself is used This file resides in directory etc Because of the encrypted passwords it can and does have general read permission and can be used for example to map numerical user ID s to names FILES etc passwd SEE ALSO getpwent 3 login 1 crypt 3 passwd 1 group 5 7th Edition 1 PLOT 5 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual PLOT 5 plot graphics interface DESCRIPTION Files of this format are produced by routines described in plot 3 and are interpreted for various devices by commands described in plot 1 A graphics file is a stream of plotting instructions Each instruction consists of an ASCII letter usually followed by bytes of binary information The instructions are exe cuted in order A point is designated by four bytes representing the x and y values each value is a signed integer The last designated point in an l m n or p instruction becomes the current point for the next instruction Each of the following descriptions begins with the name of the corresponding routine in plot 3 m n p l SEE ALSO move The next four bytes give a new current point cont Draw a line from the current point to the point given by the next four bytes See plot 1 point Plot the point given by the next four bytes line Draw a line from the point given by the next four bytes to the point
407. the remote side It also requires that the current erase and kill characters on the remote system be identical to the current ones on the local system Backslashes are inserted at appropriate places The use of take requires the existence of echo and tee on the remote system Also stty tabs mode 1s required on the remote system if tabs are to be copied without expansion dev cua0 dev cul0 dev null 7th Edition 1 CU IC UNIX Programmer s Manual CU 1C SEE ALSO dn 4 tty 4 DIAGNOSTICS Exit code is zero for normal exit nonzero various values otherwise BUGS The syntax is unique 7th Edition 2 DATE 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual DATE 1 NAME date print and set the date SYNOPSIS date yymmddhhmm ss DESCRIPTION If no argument is given the current date and time are printed If an argument is given the current date is set yy is the last two digits of the year the first mm is the month number dd is the day number in the month hh is the hour number 24 hour system the second mm is the minute number ss is optional and is the seconds For example date 10080045 sets the date to Oct 8 12 45 AM The year month and day may be omitted the current values being the defaults The system operates in GMT Date takes care of the conversion to and from local stan dard and daylight time FILES lasr adm wtmp to record time setting SEE ALSO utmp 5 DIAGNOSTICS No permission if you aren t th
408. timeb h gt Structure returned by ftime system call struct timeb time t time unsigned short millitm short timezone short dstflag The structure contains the time since the epoch in seconds up to 1000 milliseconds of more precise interval the local timezone measured in minutes of time westward from Greenwich and a flag that if nonzero indicates that Daylight Saving time applies locally during the appropriate part of the year SEE ALSO date 1 stime 2 ctime 3 ASSEMBLER ftime 35 sys ftime bufptr time 13 obsolete call sys time time since 1970 in r0 r1 7th Edition 1 TIMES 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual TIMES 2 NAME times get process times SYNOPSIS times buffer struct tbuffer buffer DESCRIPTION Times returns time accounting information for the current process and for the terminated child processes of the current process All times are in 1 HZ seconds where HZ 60 in North America After the call the buffer will appear as follows struct tbuffer 4 long proc user time long proc _system_ time long chid user time long chid system_time 5 The children times are the sum of the children s process times and their children s times SEE ALSO time 1 time 2 ASSEMBLER times 43 sys times buffer 7th Edition 1 UMASK 2 UNIX Programmer s Manual UMASK 2 NAME umask set file creation mode mask SYNOPSIS umask complmode DESCRIPTION Umas
409. tional argument q causes mail to exit after interrupts without changing the mailbox When persons are named mail takes the standard input up to an end of file or a line with just and adds it to each person s mail file The message is preceded by the sender s name and a postmark Lines that look like postmarks are prepended with gt A person is usually a user name recognized by login 1 To denote a recipient on a remote system prefix person by the system name and exclamation mark see uucp 1 The f option causes the named file e g mbox to be printed as if it were the mail file Each user owns his own mailbox which is by default generally readable but not writable The com mand does not delete an empty mailbox nor change its mode so a user may make it unreadable if desired When a user logs in he is informed of the presence of mail asr spool mail mailboxes etc passwd to identify sender and locate persons mbox saved mail tmp ma temp file 7th Edition 1 MAIL 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual MAIL 1 dead letter unmailable text uux 1 SEE ALSO xsend 1 write 1 uucp 1 BUGS There is a locking mechanism intended to prevent two senders from accessing the same mailbox but it is not perfect and races are possible 7th Edition 2 MAKE 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual MAKE 1 NAME make maintain program groups SYNOPSIS make f makefile option file
410. tiple precision integer bj the game of black jo jl XV grep egrep fgrep search a file fora TOUP A SLOUP seve des a he Roe Grae da ele ae aa group group HIG group file entry getgrent Stroup AD ec A ENE er RR Re ae group identity 0 getuid group Of a file gen BA ee es Sow ee Kae N BHOR havin E RN gtty control device o gUESSINEZAME aa a a EG ES hangman words word games hier file system hierarchy hp RH 11 RP04 RPOS RP06 moving head disk hs RH11 RS03 RS04 fixed head disk hle ht RH 11 TU 16 magtape interface hunt the wumpus o e 0000 002 e hyperbolic functions 22 0005 hypot cabs euclidean distance icheck file system storage consistency DD E E se E id temporarily tica 4 ee de Soe ees identification 3 4 444 eb died be Siete aod IN E S 25 ee el OR aah Suen ee Se H getuid getgid if while break continue cd eval exec igiore signals sir a O age le s sse a De A A BS incremental dump format o incremental file system dump o eo a a incremental file system restore WOKS e a Oe wee Oo tek eg Ge Ge eB be u hed eee de OG index index string operations strncat indir indirect system call init rc p
411. title automatically invoked at top of page May be redefined Bell Laboratories Piscataway New Jersey 08854 End quoted indented and shorter material Begin single paragraph which is indented and shorter Begin quoted indented and shorter material Roman text follows End relative indent level Cover sheet and first page for released paper Must precede other requests Start level of relative indentation Following IP s are measured from current indentation Insert signature s of author s ignored except in TM x is the reference line initials of author and typist Section head follows font automatically bold Make letters smaller Set tabs in ens Default is 5 10 15 End table End heading section of table Title follows Print document in BTL technical memorandum format Arguments are TM number quoted list of case number s and file number Must precede other requests Print in BTL technical report format report number is x Must be first Begin table if x is H table has repeated heading Underline argument even in troff UNIX first time used add footnote UNIX is a trademark of Bell Laboratories Bell Laboratories Whippany New Jersey 07981 TERM 7 These names are used by certain commands and are maintained as part of the shell environment see TERM 7 UNIX Programmer s Manual NAME terminals conventional names DESCRIPTION sh 1 environ 5 1620 DIABLO 162
412. to be loaded together It is indispensable for conversion work Fortran The old fc is replaced by f77 a true compiler for Fortran 77 compatible with C There are substantial changes in the language see A Portable Fortran 77 Compiler in Volume 2 Stream editor The program sed 1 is adapted to massive repetitive editing jobs of the sort encoun tered in converting to the new system It is well worth learning Standard I O The old fopen getc putc complex and the old p package are both dead and even getchar has changed All have been replaced by the clean highly efficient stdio 3 package The first things to know are that getchar 3 returns the integer EOF 1 which is not a possible byte value on end of file that 518 byte buffers are out and that there is a defined FILE data type Make The program make 1 handles the recompilation and loading of software in an orderly way from a makefile recipe given for each piece of software It remakes only as much as the modification dates of the input files show is necessary The makefiles will guide you in building your new system Shell chdir F L Bauer once said Algol 68 is the Everest that must be climbed by every computer scientist because it is there So it is with the shell for UNIX users Everything beyond simple command invocation from a terminal is different Even chdir is now spelled cd You will want to study sh 1 long and hard Debugging Adb 1 is a far more
413. tor SYNOPSIS te t sN pL file DESCRIPTION Tc interprets its input standard input default as device codes for a Graphic Systems phototypesetter cat The standard output of tc is intended for a Tektronix 4015 a 4014 teminal with ASCII and APL character sets The sixteen typesetter sizes are mapped into the 4014 s four sizes the entire TROFF character set is drawn using the 4014 s character generator using overstruck combinations where neces sary Typical usage troff t file tc At the end of each page tc waits for a newline empty line from the keyboard before continuing on to the next page In this wait state the command e will suppress the screen erase before the next page sN will cause the next N pages to be skipped and line will send line to the shell The command line options are t Don t wait between pages for directing output into a file sN Skip the first N pages pL Set page length to L L may include the scale factors p points i inches e centimeters and P picas default is picas 7 l w Multiply the default aspect ratio 1 5 of a displayed page by Lw SEE ALSO BUGS 7th Edition troff 1 plot 1 Font distinctions are lost The aspect ratio option is unbelievable TEE 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual TEE 1 NAME tee pipe fitting SYNOPSIS tee i a file DESCRIPTION Tee transcribes the standard input to the standard output and makes
414. tput line n spaces Translate c into d e into f etc Underline the letters and numbers in the next n input lines SA 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual SA 1M NAME sa accton system accounting SYNOPSIS sa abcjlnrstuv file etc accton file DESCRIPTION With an argument naming an existing file accton causes system accounting information for every pro cess executed to be placed at the end of the file If no arguemnt is given accounting is turned off Sa reports on cleans up and generally maintains accounting files Sa is able to condense the information in usr adm acct into a summary file usr adm savacct which con tains a count of the number of times each command was called and the time resources consumed This condensation is desirable because on a large system acct can grow by 100 blocks per day The sum mary file is read before the accounting file so the reports include all available information If a file name is given as the last argument that file will be treated as the accounting file sha is the default There are zillions of options a Place all command names containing unprintable characters and those used only once under the name other b Sort output by sum of user and system time divided by number of calls Default sort is by sum of user and system times C Besides total user system and real time for each command print percentage of total time over all commands j Instead of to
415. tput lines y Lower case letters in the pattern will also match upper case letters in the input grep only e expression Same as a simple expression argument but useful when the expression begins with a f file The regular expression egrep or string list fgrep is taken from the file X Exact only lines matched in their entirety are printed fgrep only Care should be taken when using the characters lt and Y in the expression as they are also meaningful to the Shell It is safest to enclose the entire expression argument in single quotes Fgrep searches for lines that contain one of the newline separated strings Egrep accepts extended regular expressions In the following description character excludes newline A followed by a single character matches that character The character matches the beginning end of a line A matches any character A single character not otherwise endowed with special meaning matches that character A string enclosed in brackets matches any single character from the string Ranges of ASCII character codes may be abbreviated as in a z0 9 A may occur only as the first character of the string A literal must be placed where it can t be mistaken as a range indicator A regular expression followed by matches a sequence of 0 or more 1 or more 0 or 1 matches of the regular expression Two regular expressions concatenated match a match
416. trailing blanks trimmed and new line added before sending the line to the output In the latter case ASCII characters are read into the conversion buffer converted to EBCDIC and blanks added to make up an output record of size cbs After completion dd reports the number of whole and partial input and output blocks For example to read an EBCDIC tape blocked ten 80 byte EBCDIC card images per record into the ASCII file x dd if dev rmt0 of x ibs 800 cbs 80 conv ascii lcase Note the use of raw magtape Dd is especially suited to I O on the raw physical devices because it allows reading and writing in arbitrary record sizes To skip over a file before copying from magnetic tape do dd of dev null dd of x lt dev rmt0 SEE ALSO ep 1 tr 1 7th Edition 1 DD 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual DD 1 DIAGNOSTICS f p records in out numbers of full and partial records read written BUGS The ASCII EBCDIC conversion tables are taken from the 256 character standard in the CACM Nov 1968 The ibm conversion while less blessed as a standard corresponds better to certain IBM print train conventions There is no universal solution Newlines are inserted only on conversion to ASCII padding is done only on conversion to EBCDIC These should be separate options 7th Edition 2 DEROFF 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual DEROFF 1 NAME deroff remove nroff troff tbl and eqn constructs SYNOPSIS deroff w file DESC
417. treme prejudice SYNOPSIS kill signo processid DESCRIPTION Kill sends signal 15 terminate to the specified processes If a signal number preceded by is given as first argument that signal is sent instead of terminate see signal 2 This will kill processes that do not catch the signal in particular kill 9 is a sure kill By convention if process number 0 is specified all members in the process group i e processes result ing from the current login are signaled The killed processes must belong to the current user unless he is the super user To shut the system down and bring it up single user the super user may use kill 1 1 see init 8 The process number of an asynchronous process started with amp is reported by the shell Process numbers can also be found by using ps 1 SEE ALSO 7th Edition ps 1 kill 2 signal 2 LD 1 NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual LD 1 ld loader SYNOPSIS Id option file DESCRIPTION Ld combines several object programs into one resolves external references and searches libraries In the simplest case several object files are given and ld combines them producing an object module which can be either executed or become the input for a further d run In the latter case the r option must be given to preserve the relocation bits The output of d is left on a out This file is made exe cutable only if no error
418. try Countdown for alarm 2 measured in seconds Print table for terminals only DH11 and DL11 handled with these headings Number of characters in raw input queue Number of characters in canonicalized input queue Number of characters in putput queue See tty 4 Physical device address Number of delimiters newlines in canonicalized input queue Calculated column position of terminal Miscellaneous state variables encoded thus waiting for open to complete open has special output start routine carrier is on busy doing output process is awaiting output open for exclusive use hangup on close Process group for which this is controlling terminal mx gt rwanos print information about a user process the next argument is its address as given by ps 1 The process must be in main memory or the file used can be a core image and the address 0 Print the open file table with these headings The core location of this table entry Miscellaneous state variables encoded thus PSTAT 1M UNIX Programmer s Manual PSTAT 1M R open for reading W open for writing P pipe CNT Number of processes that know this open file INO The location of the inode table entry for this file OFFS The file offset see Iseek 2 FILES unix namelist dev mem default source of tables SEE ALSO ps 1 stat 2 filsys 5 K Thompson UNIX Implementation 7th Edition 3 PTX 1 NAME SYNOPS UNIX Programmer s Manual PTX
419. unction portion of the key is specified by one of the following letters r The named files are written on the tape If files with the same names already exist they are replaced Same is determined by string comparison so abc can never be the same as usr dmr abc even if usr dmr is the current directory If no file argument is given is the default updates the tape u is like r but a file is replaced only if its modification date is later than the date stored on the tape that is to say if it has changed since it was dumped u is the default command if none is given deletes the named files from the tape At least one name argument must be given This func tion is not permitted on magtapes extracts the named files from the tape to the file system The owner and mode are restored If no file argument is given the entire contents of the tape are extracted lists the names of the specified files If no file argument is given the entire contents of the tape is listed The following characters may be used in addition to the letter which selects the function desired m 0 57 7th Edition Specifies magtape as opposed to DECtape This modifier selects the drive on which the tape is mounted For DECtape x is default for magtape 0 is the default Normally tp does its work silently The v verbose option causes it to type the name of each file it treats preceded by the function letter Wi
420. ut file descriptor 1 If the file does not exist then it is created otherwise it is truncated to zero length gt gt word Use file word as standard output If the file exists then output is appended by seeking to the end otherwise the file is created lt lt word The shell input is read up to a line the same as word or end of file The resulting document becomes the standard input If any character of word is quoted then no interpretation is placed upon the characters of the document otherwise parameter and command substitution occurs newline is ignored and is used to quote the characters and the first character of word lt amp digit The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor digit see dup 2 Similarly for the stan dard output using gt lt amp The standard input is closed Similarly for the standard output using gt If one of the above is preceded by a digit then the file descriptor created is that specified by the digit instead of the default 0 or 1 For example 2 gt amp 1 7th Edition 3 SH 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual SH 1 creates file descriptor 2 to be a duplicate of file descriptor 1 If a command is followed by amp then the default standard input for the command is the empty file dev null Otherwise the environment for the execution of a command contains the file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified by input output specifications Environment The environme
421. ut do not execute them t Exit after reading and executing one command u Treat unset variables as an error when substituting v Print shell input lines as they are read X Print commands and their arguments as they are executed Turn off the x and v options These flags can also be used upon invocation of the shell The current set of flags may be found in Remaining arguments are positional parameters and are assigned in order to 1 2 etc If no arguments are given then the values of all names are printed shift The positional parameters from 2 are renamed 1 times Print the accumulated user and system times for processes run from the shell trap arg n Arg is a command to be read and executed when the shell receives signal s n Note that arg is scanned once when the trap is set and once when the trap is taken Trap commands are exe cuted in order of signal number If arg is absent then all trap s n are reset to their original values If arg is the null string then this signal is ignored by the shell and by invoked com mands If n is 0 then the command arg is executed on exit from the shell otherwise upon receipt of signal n as numbered in signal 2 Trap with no arguments prints a list of commands associated with each signal number umask nnn The user file creation mask is set to the octal value nnn see umask 2 If nnn is omitted the 7th Edition 5 SH 1 FILES UNIX Programmer s
422. ves the usefulness of encryption schemes depending on a key by increasing the amount of time required to search the key space It reads 10 bytes from its standard input and writes 13 bytes on its standard output The output depends on the input in a way intended to be difficult to compute i e to require a substantial fraction of a second The first eight input bytes the input key can be arbitrary ASCII characters The last two the salt are best chosen from the set of digits upper and lower case letters and and The salt characters are repeated as the first two characters of the output The remaining 11 output characters are chosen from the same set as the salt and constitute the output key The transformation performed is essentially the following the salt is used to select one of 4096 crypto graphic machines all based on the National Bureau of Standards DES algorithm but modified in 4096 different ways Using the input key as key a constant string is fed into the machine and recirculated a number of times The 64 bits that come out are distributed into the 66 useful key bits in the result Makekey is intended for programs that perform encryption e g ed and crypt 1 Usually its input and output will be pipes SEE ALSO crypt 1 ed 1 7th Edition 1 UPDATE 8 UNIX Programmer s Manual UPDATE 8 NAME update periodically update the super block SYNOPSIS etc update DESCRIPTION Update is a program th
423. whatever you like as argument 7th Edition 1 SCANF 3S UNIX Programmer s Manual SCANF 3S NAME scanf fscanf sscanf formatted input conversion SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt scanf format pointer char format fscanf stream format pointer FILE stream char format sscanf s format pointer char s format DESCRIPTION Scanf reads from the standard input stream stdin Fscanf reads from the named input stream Sscanf reads from the character string s Each function reads characters interprets them according to a format and stores the results in its arguments Each expects as arguments a control string format described below and a set of pointer arguments indicating where the converted input should be stored The control string usually contains conversion specifications which are used to direct interpretation of input sequences The control string may contain 1 Blanks tabs or newlines which match optional white space in the input 2 An ordinary character not which must match the next character of the input stream 3 Conversion specifications consisting of the character an optional assignment suppressing char acter an optional numerical maximum field width and a conversion character A conversion specification directs the conversion of the next input field the result is placed in the vari able pointed to by the corresponding argument unless assignment suppressi
424. which the process is waiting or sleeping if blank the process is running TTY The controlling tty for the process TIME The cumulative execution time for the process The command and its arguments A process that has exited and has a parent but has not yet been waited for by the parent is marked lt defunct gt Ps makes an educated guess as to the file name and arguments given when the process was created by examining core memory or the swap area The method is inherently somewhat unreliable and in any event a process is entitled to destroy this information so the names cannot be counted on too much If the k option is specified the file usr sys core is used in place of dev mem This is used for postmor tem system debugging If a second argument is given it is taken to be the file containing the system s namelist FILES anix system namelist dev mem core memory usr sys core alternate core file dev searched to find swap device and tty names SEE ALSO kill 1 7th Edition PDP11 1 PS 1 UNIX Programmer s Manual PS 1 BUGS Things can change while ps is running the picture it gives is only a close approximation to reality Some data printed for defunct processes is irrelevant 7th Edition PDP11 2 PSTAT 1M NAME UNIX Programmer s Manual PSTAT 1M pstat print system facts SYNOPSIS pstat aixptuf suboptions file DESCRIPTION Pstat interprets the contents of certain system tables I
425. y upon entry No doubt the choice of keys and key security are the most vulnerable aspect of crypt FILES dev tty for typed key SEE ALSO ed 1 makekey 8 BUGS There is no warranty of merchantability nor any warranty of fitness for a particular purpose nor any other warranty either express or implied as to the accuracy of the enclosed materials or as to their sui tability for any particular purpose Accordingly Bell Telephone Laboratories assumes no responsibility for their use by the recipient Further Bell Laboratories assumes no obligation to furnish any assis tance of any kind whatsoever or to furnish any additional information or documentation 7th Edition 1 CU IC UNIX Programmer s Manual CU 1C NAME cu call UNIX SYNOPSIS cu telno t s speed a acu line DESCRIPTION FILES Cu calls up another UNIX system a terminal or possibly a non UNIX system It manages an interac tive conversation with possible transfers of text files Telno is the telephone number with minus signs at appropriate places for delays The t flag is used to dial out to a terminal Speed gives the transmis sion speed 110 134 150 300 1200 300 is the default value The a and I values may be used to specify pathnames for the ACU and communications line devices They can be used to override the following built in choices a dev cua0 1 dev culO After making the connection cu runs as two
426. y Kernighan Within the area it surveys this volume attempts to be timely complete and concise Where the latter two objectives conflict the obvious is often left unsaid in favor of brevity It is intended that each pro gram be described as it is not as it should be Inevitably this means that various sections will soon be out of date The volume is divided into eight sections 1 Commands 2 System calls 3 Subroutines 4 Special files 5 File formats and conventions 6 Games 7 Macro packages and language conventions 8 Maintenance Commands are programs intended to be invoked directly by the user in contradistinction to subroutines which are intended to be called by the user s programs Commands generally reside in directory bin for bin ary programs Some programs also reside in usr bin to save space in bin These directories are searched automatically by the command interpreter System calls are entries into the UNIX supervisor Every system call has one or more C language inter faces described in section 2 The underlying assembly language interface coded with opcode sys a synonym for trap is given as well An assortment of subroutines is available they are described in section 3 The primary libraries in which they are kept are described in intro 3 The functions are described in terms of C but most will work with Fortran as well The special files section 4 discusses the characteristics of each system
427. y be absolute or symbolic An absolute mode is an octal number constructed from the OR of the following modes 4000 set user ID on execution 2000 set group ID on execution 1000 sticky bit see chmod 2 0400 read by owner 0200 write by owner 0100 execute search in directory by owner 0070 read write execute search by group 0007 read write execute search by others A symbolic mode has the form who op permission op permission The who part is a combination of the letters u for user s permissions g group and o other The letter a stands for ugo If who is omitted the default is a but the setting of the file creation mask see umask 2 is taken into account Op can be to add permission to the file s mode to take away permission and to assign permission absolutely all other bits will be reset Permission is any combination of the letters r read w write x execute s set owner or group id and t save text sticky Letters u g or o indicate that permission is to be taken from the current mode Omitting permission is only useful with to take away all permissions The first example denies write permission to others the second makes a file executable chmod o w file chmod x file Multiple symbolic modes separated by commas may be given Operations are performed in the order specified The letter s is only useful with u or g Only the owner of a file or the super user may change its
428. y receiving string Strcat appends a copy of string s2 to the end of string s Strncat copies at most n characters Both return a pointer to the null terminated result Strcmp compares its arguments and returns an integer greater than equal to or less than 0 according as sl is lexicographically greater than equal to or less than s2 Strncmp makes the same comparison but looks at at most n characters Strcpy copies string s2 to s1 stopping after the null character has been moved Strncpy copies exactly n characters truncating or null padding s2 the target may not be null terminated if the length of s2 is n or more Both return s Strlen returns the number of non null characters in s Index rindex returns a pointer to the first last occurrence of character c in string s or zero if c does not occur in the string Strcmp uses native character comparison which is signed on PDP11 s unsigned on other machines 7th Edition 1 SWAB 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual SWAB 3 NAME swab swap bytes SYNOPSIS swab from to nbytes char from to DESCRIPTION Swab copies nbytes bytes pointed to by from to the position pointed to by to exchanging adjacent even and odd bytes It is useful for carrying binary data between PDP11 s and other machines Nbytes should be even 7th Edition 1 SYSTEM 3 UNIX Programmer s Manual SYSTEM 3 NAME system issue a shell command SYNOPSIS system string char string
429. yne syne update periodically du summarize disk write write to another setuid setgid set getuid getgid geteuid getegid get environ su substitute mail send or receive mail among wall write to all abs integer absolute fabs floor ceil absolute getenv true false provide truth assert program lint a C program vp filsys flblk ino format of file system readonly set shift times trap umask crash export login newgrp sh for case if xxiii trap umask wait command language trigonometric functions o o Ot Saa inse i a O IAE E IAE E troff nroff text formatting and ooa aaa troff tbl and eqn constructs true false provide truth values tsort topological sort o o 0004 ttt cubic tic tac toe tty general terminal interface tty get terminal name ttyname isatty ttyslot find name of a ttys terminal initialization data ttyslot find name of a terminal TU 10 magtape Interface TU 16 magtape interface 2 2 a TUS6 DECtape DD Ai a hed LEE ede a A Sa ce TYPOS sg 28 ae a ee ke BA le ok ea RTK N Ne 0 typeset manuals s wes Se ates Sok ae ee ae Bae 8 typeset mathematics 2 200 Py PESCttin Fe se as ee N Z HR Poe ed Ge E al Roe SES typewriter

UNIX Version 7 Volume 1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents